Iohn Huighen van Linschoten. his discours of voyages into ye Easte & West Indies Deuided into foure bookes.

THE SECOND BOOKE ¶ (Book 2)

The true and perfect description of the whole coast of Guinea, Man••congo, Angola, Monomotapa, and right ouer against them the Kape of Saint Augustine in Bri••n with the compas of the whole Ocean Seas, together with the Islands, 〈…〉〈…〉 S. Helena and the A••en••i••n, with all their Hauens, 〈…〉〈…〉 partes 〈…〉〈…〉.

Likewise a further description of the Card of Mada••ar ••herwise called the Island of S. Laurence, with the discouery of all the 〈…〉〈…〉 Chri••••, and numbers of Islands in the Indian Seas, and the situation of the Countrie of the Cape de Bona Speranza passing along to Mon••motapa, Ae••ala, & Mo∣samb••••••e, and from thence to Quiolo••, Gorga, Melin••e, Amara, ••aru, Maga∣do••o, Doara, &c. to the red Sea: and what further wanteth for the descrip∣tion thereof, you shall finde at large in Iohn Hughen of Lins••hotens booke. Also the voyages that the Portingall pilots haue made into all places of the Indies, extracted out of their Sea Cardes and bookes, and translated in∣to our mother tongue.

BEcause such as saile into India, doo com∣passe the most part of Affrica, therefore there are certaine Cardes placed in this booke, which shewe those partes of that coast, whereby the ships do saile, and not speaking of the rich Islands of Canar••a and Cabo verde, to al men well knewne, and right ouer against them, in Affrica, the kingdomes of Gualata, Tombuto, and Meili, whereof Gualata is very small and poore, both of victuals and fruit, hauing little else, but Milie: Tombuto great and populous, abounding in corne, beastes, milke, and butter, but wanting salt. Melli rich of corne, flesh, and cotten. We will come lower towards Guine••, a greater & richer kingdome then the rest, lying in E∣thiopia, or the Moores countrey: which the better to vnderstand, you must first knowe, that the ancient Cosmographers haue diuided Affrica into foure partes, as Barbaria, Numidia, Libia, and Aethiopia▪ or the Moores countrey, not comprehen¦ding Egypt nor Abexin, now called the land of P••ester Iohn, which are likewise Moores, and the rightest, as the scriptures wel declare, and ought to be counted and numbred amongst the chiefe prouinces of Affrica, which al Cosmographers, and de∣scribers of the world may reade. Touch∣ing the kingdome of Guinea, wherein the Portingales and Frenchmen haue traffi¦ked many yeares, and whither our Coun∣trymen in these dayes doe likewise trauel, it bordureth on the kingdome of Meil••, and vpon the riuer Niger, in length fiue hun¦dred Italian miles, which are about one hundred Dutch miles: in this country the Portingales hold a fort, being the castle of the Mine vpon the golden coast. There is also the coast of Melegete, our countrey men that sailed thither this yeare, did first

put in to the land between the Cape de las P••nas, and the Cape de tres Puntas, and found anker ground at twenty fadomes water, and with their boat rowing on land, they came to a place, wherein stoode man•• houses, and a little fort placed vpon a rocke and many Moores about it, and t•• 〈…〉〈…〉 so played vpon with shor, 〈…〉〈…〉 vnite off. This vil∣lage 〈…〉〈…〉 and the lande 〈…〉〈…〉 This sort is hol∣den 〈…〉〈…〉 b•••• is not strong: before 〈…〉〈…〉 about the l••ngth of twoo ••es 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••nto the sea there lie••h ••1. cliffes, so that you must passe right between them 〈…〉〈…〉 vnto the ••ort, lying in a boothe 〈…〉〈…〉. This castle lieth about three or foure miles from the Cape de tres 〈…〉〈…〉 not ••arre from it being a hilly and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 countrey with many trees, some of 〈…〉〈…〉 fadomes in compas: 〈…〉〈…〉 vilage called 〈◊〉〈◊〉 〈…〉〈…〉 and 〈…〉〈…〉 〈…〉〈…〉 with the 〈…〉〈…〉 〈…〉〈…〉 cloth or mo∣•• 〈…〉〈…〉 and tempe∣•• 〈…〉〈…〉 by south, towards 〈…〉〈…〉 in two dayes could make ••t two degrees, so that they sailed ech day one degree, although it was indifferent cold, by reason of the stormes that sel, east northeast, and ease and by north towardes the coast. Also such as wil satie from the Colde hauens to the cape de Lop•• G•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Island, must keepe 〈…〉〈…〉 southward as possibly they may, 〈…〉〈…〉 any wind, but hold as neere a•• they can, and yet al litle enough, or else fal beneath the cape de Rio •• Gabain, that is, the riuer of Gabain or elsewhere, vnles then the winde be ful we••st, or that they haue any 〈◊〉〈◊〉 out of the north, and so compassed into the south, otherwise it is not we•• to be done, for that there are some that haue bin 5. or 6. weekes sayling thi∣ther. Here ye must note, that the neerer ye 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to the Equinoctial line, there you find 〈◊〉〈◊〉 southerne windes: and when you 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the li•••• ••ou finde the winde south & 〈…〉〈…〉, and somewhat higher: 〈…〉〈…〉 ••wise vnderstand, that when 〈…〉〈…〉 ••ng fishes, that then yee 〈…〉〈…〉 of S. Thomas. 〈…〉〈…〉 with the people of 〈…〉〈…〉 with such as are not ouer 〈…〉〈…〉 the Portingales, which 〈…〉〈…〉 them slaues, for 〈…〉〈…〉: the countrey is 〈…〉〈…〉 either knowing God 〈…〉〈…〉, heathens, and idola¦ters, without gouernement or any order, abundant in golde, elephants teeth, corne, Ethiopian pepper, rice, barly, cotten wool, and many kindes of fruits, whereof aboue a hundred sortes, both vnknowne & neuer written of were brought from thence vnto me: besides this, there groweth all sorts of great beanes, some on trees, in coddes as big as a mans elbow, & a handful broad, others red and blacke like to the Turki••h beanes, but greater, some white & round, euery one in a place by it self, like 〈◊〉〈◊〉 others round and small, as red as currall. with blacke strikes, like those that growe in Egypt, where I haue ••••ne of them, and were called 〈◊〉〈◊〉 they are descr••bed by the learned doctor P••er A in 〈◊〉〈◊〉 booke of Egyptian herbes. There at ••••∣wise others that are hard, 〈…〉〈…〉 ••¦ted like marble 〈…〉〈…〉, and birds are there abound•• 〈…〉〈…〉 peacockes, wilde hennes, gr••y 〈◊◊〉〈◊◊〉, or 〈◊〉〈◊〉 smal 〈…〉〈…〉 very cunningly hang their nests vpon the braunches of the trees, whereof some were brought me thereby to preserue their egs from wormes and snakes. They haue ••o selfe abundance of fish, so that to conclude, there wanteth nothing in those countries, but onely the knowledge of the Gospell, thereby to bring them to the vnderstand¦ing of the word of God, and the pathway to saluation. The country is very hot, and intemperate for our countrey people, speci∣ally the••r signe, which is very hurtful, and breedeth much filth and wormes, because it is warme and moyst, and mother of ••ll corruption whereby springeth many dis¦eases, as burning feuers, l••skes, the bloo∣dy th•• ••nd 〈◊〉〈◊〉 like.

Sailing along the coast, they passed by the Island of 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and then vnder S. Thoma•• line, so called, because it was first discouered vppon S. Thomas day, the Island is in breadth about threescore Ita∣lian miles, which is twelue of our miles, and is in compasse one hundred and foure score miles, which are threescore Dut••h miles, in forme almost round, abounding 〈◊〉〈◊〉 sugar, and ginger, and all kind of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 alles, by rea•• of the came and mo••••nes of the dewes, which euery morning ••a••r the earth, as a most soueraigne thing ••o make such fruit increase and growe ••••.

From 〈◊〉〈◊〉 southeast and by ••••st they came before 〈◊〉〈◊〉 or th•• 〈…〉〈…〉 〈◊〉〈◊〉 before the which riuer 〈…〉〈…〉 three or foure 〈…〉〈…〉 daungerous 〈…〉〈…〉 commeth out 〈…〉〈…〉

with it, which make an extreame rough water: the riuer is aboue two miles broade, with many trees on both the sides, but there they found no man to traffike withall: wherevpon they sailed further, as the wind serued them, sometimes close by the ••hoare, and sometime further into the sea, there the coast lieth north and south, and very shalow, so that at the least a mile or a mile and a halfe into the sea, there is not aboue twelue or thirteene fadomes water, and neerer within halfe a mile of the shore, foure, fiue, sixe, or seuen fadoms, but a man may go neere vnto the shore, bi∣cause it is cleere and faire ground to anker in, and commonly in the night time they haue the land winde from off the shore, which is called Vento〈…〉〈…〉 Terra, specially being neere, a litle further the coast reach∣eth somewhat more to the west, vntill you come to the cape of Lopes Gonsales, where th••y stayed certaine days, to traffike with th•• country people, but not much, because the French men had beene there not long before, and spoiled the country, and during the time of their staying there, they obser∣ued many strange customes and maners of that people.

First, concerning their religion, they know neither God nor his laws, for some of them pray to the sunne & to the moone, some is certaine trees, or to the earth, be∣cause th••y ••••••ad vpon it, thinking it a gret offence to ••ort ••hereon: they go most com∣monly in the streetes with a great broade naked knife in their handes: they are all, both men and women pincked and raced on their bodies in diuers maners, and ve∣ry strong to behold, which they doe with a knife, racing their skinnes, then they take a certaine oyntment mixed with some co∣lour which they put into the races, they neuer drinke, but first they poure some of the drinke out of the pot: they drinke not likewise betweene meales, but when they haue eaten their meate, they drinke a har∣ty draught of water, or of their palme tree wine, or else of water sodden with honny. In the morning, and at any other time of the day, when they meete any man, or re∣uerence their ruler or gouernour in token of obedience, they fall vppon their knees, and beate their handes together, where they kneele vntill hee clappeth his handes, and sometimes they clap handes together one with the other, vttering these words, Fino, Fino Fino, wherewith they giue eache other leaue to departe, and by the same they signifie and shewe themselues to be friendes. The countrey people are much addicted to steale from straungers but not from their owne nation, and the women much giuen to lust and vncleane∣nesse, specially with straungers, which a∣mong them is no shame. There are some men that weare round bores about their neckes made of barkes, some great, some small, not much vnlike the bores, which with vs are vsed to bee hanged in Innes and Tauernes, to putte money in for the poore: but they will by no meanes let anie man see what is in them. For the most part both men and women goe bare hea∣ded, with their haire frizeled and folded, yet very shorte, some weare hartes that commonly are made of barkes of trees, or of Indian nuttes, some weare plumes or feathers, which are made fast to theyr haire with certaine wyars, whereof di¦uerse sorts were brought me from thence▪ some haue hoales in theyr vpper lippes, and also through the middle parte of their nose, and in the holes in theyr lippes they thrust peeces of bone, as broad as a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 with a stalke that passeth through the hole, which being thrust in, hangeth both before his nose and his mouth, some thrust small hornes or teeth through the holes and so weare them, all as they think▪ to beautifie themselues, some bore a hole in theyr neather lippes, and vsual∣ly thrust theyr tongues through it, manye of them both men and women weare Rings in their eares, whereof some are at the least seuen or eight ounces in weight, and some haue stickes thrust through their rings that are fiue or sixe fingers long.

As touching their apparell, they haue nothing but a matte made of the barke o•• a tree dyed redde, which they weare before their priuy members ouer some of theyr mattes: they weare Apes or sea catt••s skinnes, or the skinnes of some wilde beasts, in the middle whereof there hang∣eth a bell, such as wee hang about the neckes of cowes or sheepe: they paint theyr bodies redde, with a colour made of redde wood, whereof (had some brought me from thence, it maketh a fayre colour, and is somewhat lighter than b••astil, ma∣ny times they make one 〈◊〉〈◊〉 red, the other white or yellow, with a strike or two of the same colour in their faces.

Most of them weare a gerole or string about theyr middles of buffles skinne with they hayre vpon it, which meeteth not to∣gether vpon theyr bellies, by the breadth of a hand, but hath twoo endes sticking or turning vppe, and wyth a ver•• small string are made fast about them: and

before vppon their bellies they weare a short broad Iron knife, with a sheathe of the same mettal: those girdles some of them are a handful broad, some two, some three, and some broader: besides these kniues, they vse throwing kniues, with three or foure poyntes, being verie dange∣rous, whereof I can shew you.) The wo∣men weare great Iron, copper, or tinne rings about their legges, some one, others two, and some more: many of them wey∣ing at the least three or foure poundes waight the peece, being almost close about their legges, whereby a man can hardlie iudge how they gette them on: some men likewise vse them, but not manie. There are also some women that weare aprons before them made of Bresen, whereof I can shew you. This shal suffice for the de∣scription of their apparrell, and beautify∣ing of their bodyes, which is verie strange and vnseemely: no lesse disorder is there in their houses, for they liue like beastes, and sleep on mattes laid vpon the ground. Their meat is made of great white rootes, taken out of the earth, called Iniamos, very pleasant of taste, like the spanish Ba∣••at〈…〉〈…〉 or chesnuts. They are both rosted and sodden, with other rootes, and sugar canes, and Bananas, which are a fruite of a tree, like the Indian figges, mentioned in this booke, long like cucumbers, with a tart sweetish, but a pleasant taste: sometimes likewise they eate both fish & flesh, which they lay al in one vessell togither, and so sit round about it like a company of beastes, and neuer drinke, but after they haue done eating. The gouernours eate alone out of a tin vessel, the rest out of a filthie earthen vessel, and sit vpon a mat spread vpon the ground. The most worke that the women do, is to fetch water and fruite, and to dresse the meate: they will by no meanes ease themselues vppon the ground, estee∣ming that a great offence, but haue great vessels made for the same purpose, which are sette in the earth. They vse no other weapons against their enemies, but onely fistes and traues: they that dwell by the mine, are better appointed with bowes, arrowes, pikes, and targets as long as a man, made of barkes of trees, and such like things. Their Drums are broade aboue, and narrow below: they haue likewise Cornets of Elophants teeth: of all these kindes of instruments and weapons, I had some brought from thence. Our men being in the Riuer of Gaban came vnto an Iland, where they were carried on shore by a Moore, that had a great tooth sticking in his vpper lip, with a broade knife in his hand, and all his body rased and pinked as I saide before, where he brought them into a house among the Moores, wherein were certaine couerlets, made of the rinds or barkes of trees laide vppon the earth, where they sate downe, not making anie choyse, and being sette, he clapt them on the shoulders, pointing vpwards with his fingers, saying in his language, Ma••••∣bam, they not knowing what hee meant, looked vp, where they perceiued a blacke man sate vppon the top of a certaine paire of Staires, like an image, with many chaines of bones and rings hanging a∣bout him, fearefull to beholde: at his feete lay certaine blacke women, with Ele∣phants tailes in their handes, to beare a∣way the flies, and to make winde, where∣by they vnderstood him to be the Lorde of the Island. Wherupon they kneeled vpon one of their knees, honouring him accor∣ding to the custome of the lande, clapping their hands vntill the Ma•••• or Lord made signes vnto them, clapping his handes: which done, they rose vp, the Ma•••• giuing them some of those mars made of barks as a princely present, of the which with their linnen I can shew you: others of the same ship taking their pinnace entred into ano∣ther creeke in the same Riuer, about two miles higher, and there founde a great vil∣lage lying on the same riuer, so neere, that they might throw a stone ouer the houses: and being within two ships length or the shore, they cast anker on the shore there stood at least 1000. Moores, men, women, and children, whereof some had pikes, kniues, and other wepons in th••ir hands, crying with loude voyces, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and other wordes, clapping their handes together, which to them was strange, both to heare and see. Not long after, a Moore that by them about foure or fiue miles frō thence, had beene taken into their pinnace, step∣ped into the water, and went on shore, where being on land, the Moores, specially the women, hong about him, in such num∣bers, that he could hardly passe, singing and throwing grasse vppon him, that our men could neither heare nor see the man, neuer ceasing to sing and make a noyse, but still continuing, dancing, leaping, and with their kniues cutting off al the grasse: meane time there came one out of the vil∣lage, hauing a long staffe in his hand, as ••f he were some officer, willing them to leaue off theyr noyse, driuing th••m from the shore, but to no end 〈◊〉〈◊〉 reason of the great number of people that were there assem∣bled,

at the last the Moore that went out of the pinace from our men, with one of their Canuyten, (for so they called their boates) came aboord, bringing two men and an old woman, that was one of the gouernors wiues, hauing her breast painted greene, and in each hande a branch of a tree, sha∣king both her handes, and the two men clapping with their hands, giuing to vn∣derstand (as our men conceiued) according to their manner, that they were welcome: with them two of our men went on land, whereat the Moores made great ioy, with singing, dancing, leaping, and such like pa∣stimes, and going vnto the gouernor, di∣uers of them followed, specially the wo∣men, running both before and behinde them, leaping and dancing like mad men, most of them hauing of the great broade kniues in their handes, striking them to∣gether in most feareful maner: but it was no wonder to see them make so great ioy, and shew so much pastime, for that it was strange for them to see white men, which they neuer had seene, for that neuer any had beene or traffiked among them: true it is that the Portingales had beene in the same Riuer, but not so high, for our men were at the least tenne or twelue miles from their shippe within the Riuer, and the Riuer before that village called Cre∣mentun, was about a mile broade, ha∣uing another village on the other side, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 with their pinnace before that vil∣lage, they shot off a peece, whereat all the people ••ne backe, being afraid, but came presently againe: and as our men went vnto the ••ouernour, they led them by the armes, singing, and shewing great signes of ioy, for the comming of these white men into their countrie: and being at the Go∣uernours house, which was made of reeds, they stayed about halfe an howre before he came out, meane time the people that followed thē, neuer left singing & making anoyse•• and when hee came, there were three mattes, and two stools, a great and a little brought with him, by certain Moores that followed him. All his body and his face was painted white, either with chalk or some other painting, a sacke of whiting bring likewise brought after him. On his head he wore a cappe made of a skin, stuck ful of feathers, with chains made of bones aboue 100. times about his necke, armes, and legs, & being set vpon his stoole, there came an old woman, that gaue him some of the whiting, wherewith hee made as if he had washt his hands, the rest he threw vpon his face, & with that he held vp both his hands: meane time his wise had whi∣ting giuen her, which done, shee began to come forth of the house, singing and daun∣cing, al the other women following her, & doing the like: with that the gouernour called the Moore that brought our mē with him from the place aforesaid, saying vnto him that our men were welcome, clapping his handes together, and saying Fuio, Fu∣io, according to their manner, and after many other wordes, hee willed them to bring some Iron, saying they should haue teeth for it, which hauing done, he brought forth his teeth.

This riuer as I saide is verie broad and full of Crocodiles, and sea horses, it hath many creekes: and as they sailed from Crementun▪ it lyeth Southeast, where in the night they lauered 2. or 3. houres, and came twice on ground, and •••• sayling for∣wardes they passed by an Island, called Carace••••bo, lying in the mouth of the riuer, as there are many, being verie low and flat land, and ful of trees: From that Island there came a Ca••utien aboord their ship, and in it eighteene persons, and with them they had a smal drum, of a hol∣low stocke, whereon they played, and be∣ing by the ship, foure or fiue of them stept in, whereof one of them vppon his face, breast, and armes, was al white, he bore a greene branch of a tree, with a little bel, and some whiting in his hand, which hee strowed about the ship, ringing the bel, & when they or any of our men spake, hee made shewe as it were to consecrate and blesse the ship, which done, sirting downe, and stammering in his words, like a man possessed with some sprite, or one that had a shaking feuer. There was a great pot of Palme wine brought forth, whereof they dranke one vnto the other, which continu¦ed for the space of halfe an houre, which done, they went into their sc••te, & rowed to land, making signes to our men to come on shore, and to barter with them for their wares, which they did, carrying them some Iron and other marchandise, and went in∣to the gouernors house being in a village, where among other things they saw a lit∣tle cottage about three foote high, coue∣red with straw, and opē on the side, vnder the which stood a little gibet, wheron hung a little horne, with certaine stuffe therein, which they would not lette them see by no meanes, and vnder the gibet stood a staffe, with a dead childes scul fixed vpon it, ha∣uing in the one eye a bone, much like the bone that is founde in the head of a ••ad∣docke (whereof with vs they make horses,

bridles, and collars for degs, at the foote of the staff lay al sorts of bones, both of fishes and beasts: and among the rest, the ••awes of a Pris•••• (which in our countrey is cal∣led a sword fish) without teeth, which the master tooke away, & brought it vnto me: our men asking what y^t might signifie, they said, there lay a dead carcas: and being in another village as they passed forwarde, they sawe at the least twentie men sitting at the doore of one of their houses, whereof some seemed to bee of the principal com∣manders, and within that house there was a noyse of singing, both by great and smal, that it made them muse, whereupon they asked what it meant, they saide there was one dead. The women being in trauel, are not any thing ashamed, but euery one, both yong and old, men and women, run vnto her, the doore standing wide open: but one thing is to be wondered at, that the children are al circumcised, and yet they haue neither law, order, nor knowledge of God. The countrey is fruitful, and ful of al strange fruites, and abounding in al kinds of beasts, and birds of diners formes, both great and smal. There are some trees, where vpon one branch there hang at the least 100. birdes nests, altogether most pleasant to behold. They hang by certaine strawes made fast vnto the boughes, be∣cause snakes should not creepe in and suck their egges: many of those nests were brought vnto me. This shall suffice for the discription of the coast of Guinea, after the which followeth the mightie kingdome of Congo.

The ancient writers helde opinion that this lande was not inhabited, calling it Torri••••am Zonam, that is, a place in the earth, that through the heate of the sunne is burnt vp, but they were altogether de∣ceiued, for as Odoardus Lopez, a Por∣tingale witnesseth, hauing with many other Portingales long time inhabited therein. There is good dwelling, and the aire, cōtrarie to al mens iudgements, very temperate, and that in winter there is no extreame cold, but onely such weather as it is in haruest time at Rome. They vse no linings nor shirte bandes, nor change of clothes neither care they for the fire, it is likewise no colder on the tops of the hilles, then in the vallies, but generally it is war∣mer with them in the winter then in the summer, onely because of the continual raines, specially about the middle of the day, two houres before, and as much after dinner, which heat is very euill for our mē to endure. The people of the countrie are black, but part of the women fear what ••••l∣low: their haire for the most part is blacke and curled, and some haue red haire: they are of a mean stature, therin not much vn∣like the Portingales, the balles of theyr eyes being of diuers colours, blacke, and sea colour: their lips not so thicke as those of N••b••a, & other Moores: their faces of al proportions, fat leane, and indifferent be¦tweene both, like the Portingales, and not like other Moores of Guinea, that are foule and deformed. The length of the day and night is in a ma••er al one, for that it dif¦fereth not one quarter of an houre to anie mans iudgement) throughout the whole yeare: their winter beginneth in our lent. about the middle of March, and their sum∣mer in the middle of September •• in win∣ter it raigneth there continually, for the space of fiue moneths, that is, Aprill, May, Iune, Iuly, & August, in which time there are but few faire daies, and there the raine falleth in such great drops, that it is won∣derful, which water is al dronke vp into the earth with the drienesse of the land in summer time, wherein it raineth scarce once in sixe moneths: with the raine likewise the riuer is filled with thick mud∣die water, so that it floweth ouer the banks and moystneth the ground. The windes that in summer doo continually blow in those countries, are (as Hippocrates, and after him Iulius the first emperor of Rome, naming them with a greek name E••es••o••, Northwest, by the Portingales called Ven••o Maestro or general wi••d, as being ordinarie at that time of the yeare in all those countries, which are likewise causes of the raines, by driuing vp of m••stes and vapors, vppon the tops of the hils, which being there, and resoluing into water, doo fil the earth with raine, and those continu∣al raines, are likewise causes of the grow∣ing and increasing of the great riuers that are in Egypt and Ethiopia as Niger and Nylus, and al the riuers there abouts, some running into the Mediterranean, others into y^e great Ocean seas, by reason of their slime & fattines: and because in our sumer, (which is their winter for the most part it raineth throughout the countryes of Con∣go and Ethiopia, it is not to be wondered at if the riuers be greater, and do ouerflow more then they are, in the furder and very drie countries, for in Egypt (not accoun∣ting Alexandria with the places borde∣ring on the same) where it neuer raineth, it is holden for a verie strange & wonder∣ful thing, how the riuer Ni•• should gr••w so high, & ful of thicke muddie water, and

alwaies at one time of the yeare, not fay∣ling therein, thereby refreshing the earth, and giuing foode both to man and beast, whereby the ancient inhabitants of those countries, did vse to offer sacrifices vnto that Riuer, calling it as Ptolomeus in his fourth booke rehearseth a good Spirit, and yet at this day many Christians esteeme it for a miracle, for that without the in∣crease thereof, they would die for hunger: their liues ••as Iohn Chrisostome sayth) consisteth of the increasing of the waters, so then the Northwest winds, that in our summer time, which is their winter, blow in our countries, are the meanes in those countries, to gather cloudes and moy∣stures vpon the high hilles, from whence their raine proceedeth, which raine is the cause that their countrey is not so colde as ours, ingendering in those hot countries a certaine kinde of warme water. Those raines then are likewise the cause of the growing & ouerflowing of the riuer Ni••us, and other riuers in those countries, wher∣of the inhabitants haue deuised and writ∣ten to many fables. But in their summer, which is our winter, there bloweth contra∣ry windes, as south, and southeast, which without al doubt are cold, as blowing from the contrarie part of the Pole Antarctike, and coole those countries, as our winds do here in these countries, & like as with thē they cause a faire & cleare aire, so with vs they cause great store of raines, by a certain natural disposition of the heauens & the cli∣mates, ruled and gouerned by the high wisedom of God, that hath diuided the hea∣uens, & ordained the course of the sun and other planets, in such maner, that al parts of the earth by their light & brightnes are filled with warmth and coldnes, & therein do continue, with great proportion and e∣qualitie: so that for certain, if the freshnesse and coldnes of those winds did not refresh the countreyes of Ethiopia, Congo, and o∣ther places bordering on the same, it were impossible for the inhabitants to indure the heate. The same windes likewise doo refresh and comfort the inhabitants of Grecia the Islands of Candia and Cipies, the countries of Asia Mynor, and those of Suria and Egypt, which liue by the refre∣shing of those generall Northwest & west winds, which rightly by the Grecians are called Zoephero, that is, bringing life, & those also are the cause that in Ethiopia, Congo, and other countries bordering thereon it neuer Snoweth, no, not vpon the highest hilles, vnlesse it bee further off, towardes the Cape de Bona Speran∣za, or in some certaine places, by the Por∣tingales called Snow hilles, as in Congo they finde neither Ice nor snow, which with them would bee more esteemed then gold, therewith to coole their drink, so that the Riuers do not increase by the melting of snow, but only by means of the cōtinu∣al raine of fiue moneths, as I said before.

But returning to our former matter, you may trauel to Congo by two waies, one by the main sea, to S. Helena, and so further ouer, or along by the coast of Affrica, to the Island of Saint Thomas, and so to the Cape of Lopes Gonzales, lying vnder one degree vppon the South side of the Equi∣noctiall line, about 21. Duch miles from Saint Thomas Island, and from thence they saile with the wind (that commeth off the land,) along the coast, euerie euening casting anker in some creeke or hauen vn∣till they arriue at the place where they de¦sire to be. The kingdome of Congo be∣ginneth at the Cape de S. Catharina, which lyeth on the South side of the Equi∣noctial line, vnder two degrees and a halfe and passing along the coast, you saile by certain hils and strands, not woorth the noting, till you come to two creekes, in forme somewhat like a paire of spectacles, where there is a good hauen called Baro D Aluaro Gonzales, that is, the creeke or hauen of Aluaro Gonzale••: not farre from it runneth a little riuer into the sea, by reason of the rednesse thereof, by the Por∣tingales called Rio de ••as, Boreras, R••slas, because the water runneth ouer a certaine redde sande, that coloureth the water: at that place beginneth a high hill, cal∣led by the Portingales la Sierra Compli∣da, that is, a long hill: passing further, there is another riuer called ••a ••e ••as Almadias, which is as much to say, as the creeke or hauen for shippes, because in that place many bankes are made: in the mouth of this riuer there lyeth three Islands, wherof the greatest is the middle being inhabited, wherein there is a hauen for little ships, the other two are not inha∣bited. Parting from thence you come to the great riuer of Congo, called Za••e, ta∣king his beginning or spring, partly frō the same lake frō whence the riuer Nylus doth flow. This riuer casteth forth so great a∣boundance of water, that it is incredible, for that before it runneth into the sea it is at the least 5. miles & broad, & on y^e vpper part it is fresh water, for 8 10. & 16 Duch miles vnto the red sea, whereby the pilots sailing ouer it, know what place they are in. Vpwards into this riuer you may saile

with great barks she length of fine miles, but not higher, by reason of the discending and fall thereof from a steep high ground, as the riuers of Nilus, Donow, and Rhein do in some places, which are called Cata∣ra••tas, that is, shedings or fallings of wa∣ters, making so great a noyse, that it may bee heard a great way from it. In this riuer at the entry into the sea are many I∣slands, al inhabited, and very populous, that haue diuers gouernours, al subiectes to the king of Congo. In tunes past those Islands made warres one against the o∣ther in certaine scutes cut out of the bodie of a great tree, in their language called, Licondo, whereof some are so great, that sixe men cannot fadome them, with height and length correspondent, so that one of the greatest being cutte in proportion of a scute, woulde holde two hundred men: Those scutes they rowe with ores, wher∣with they make great speede, euery man hauing an ore and a bowe: and when they fight, they lay downe the ore, and vse their bowe: and to steere and winde those scutes, they vse no other ruther, than one of those ores. In this riuer there are ma∣ny strange beastes, specially Crocadiles, that are very great, in their language cal∣led Carman, the sea horse, and another that seemeth to haue handes, and a taile, like vnto a Flaske, which they call Am∣bize Angulo, that is, a sea hogge, because it is as fatte as a hogge, it hath a good and sauoury flesh, not like fish, although it bée a fish which feedeth not of that which is in the riuer, but eateth the grasse that grow∣eth on the riuers side, and hath an head like an ore, whereof there are some that weigh fiue hundred poundes, the Fisher men that take them, are bound vpon pain of death to bring them to the King.

There you finde an other hooke of land called Cabo di Padran, and alittle from thence the riuer Lelunda, which commeth out of a small lake lying within the land, from whence more Riuers haue their off∣spring, specially one called Coanza, wher∣of hereafter I will speake. This riuer Le∣lunda when it rayneth not, is very drie, so that it may be passed ouer by foote, it run∣neth vnder the hill (whereon Congo the chiefe cittie doth stand) and from thence to the riuer of Ambrizi, which is a great ri∣uer, with a hauen, and runneth not farre from the riuer of Congo into the sea: a li∣tle further you come to an other riuer cal∣led ••••ze, which hath no hauen, and from thence to Onzo another riuer with a good hauen, hauing her spring out of the same lake, from whence the riuer Nylus doth issue: and somwhat more to the south lieth the riuer Lemba, but it hath no ha∣uen, nor yet saileable. From thence you come to Damde, a very great riuer, wher∣in ships of two hundred tuns may saile: out of this riuer there runneth an arme or braunche lying southward called Bengo, which with Coanza (another great riuer) make the Island of Loanda: both their streames meeting together, driue foorth much filth and sand, which make the I∣sland greater. Bengo is a great streame or riuer, which may be sailed vppe at the least fiue and twenty Italian miles, which are about fiue Dutch miles: and betweene these two Islands (as I saide before) lieth the rich Island of Loanda, with the hauen called by the name of, the Island Loanda, which is as much to lay, euen or flat land, without hilles. This Island is about four miles long, and somewhat lesse than a quarter of a mile broad, and in some pla∣ces, not aboue a bowe shoote broad, where there is a thing much to be wondered at, that when it is ful sea, if one dig but twoo or three handfuls deep into the groūd, they shal find fresh water, and digging in the same ground when it ebbeth, the water is salt and brackish.

In this Island of Loanda are fished the Schulpekens, which in the kingdome of Congo, and other places borduring there∣abouts are vsed for mony, which fishing is done in this maner: There are certayne women, that being on the sea side, goe a∣little way into the water, lading certayne baskets with sand, which being filled, they carry them on land, & wash the sand from the Schulpkens, that are very small and in great numbers, by them esteemed of twoo sortes, some males, other females, which in shew and colour are the fairest, and al∣though many of them are found vpon the strand or shore of the riuer of Congo, yet those of Loanda are the best, fairest, & most esteemed of, they are very shining, and of an ash colour, other colours are of no ac∣count: for those Schulplikens you may buy any kinde of thing, whether it be gold, sil∣uer, or any kinde of victualles, whereby you may perceiue, that not onely in the kingdome of Congo, and the countries a∣bout it, but also in other places of Affrica, and in the kingdome of Chyna, and some part of India, they haue vsed other kindes of things in steed of mony, as we vse gold, siluer, copper, and such like mixtures: for in Ethiopia they vse pepper corns for mo∣ny. In the kingdome of ••bu••o about

the riuer Niger, Shu••penes, and Porcelle∣ten▪ as also in China, and Ben ••alen, so that mettall is not so much esteemed of in most partes of the worlde, as it is in Eu∣ropa, and other places circumtacent. In this Island there are seauen or eight villa∣ges by them called Libat••, whereof the principall is called the Holighost, where∣in the gouernour is resident, being sent from Congo, where he administreth Iu∣stice, and looketh sharpelye to the fishing of Schalpekens: There are many beasts, goates, and wilde swine, for that the tame become wilde, and runne into the woods: also therein groweth a great and strange tree called Enlanda, being alwaies gréene, of a strange form, specially in the branches that grow very high, and cast downe cer∣taine small threedes, which touching the earth do bring forth roots, from whence o∣ther plants or trees do spring forth most a∣boundantly in great numbers: vnder the first rhinde or barke of this tree groweth a certaine linnen, which being beaten and made cleane, and then stretched foorth in breadth and length, it serueth to apparell the common people. In this Island also they vse shipps made of palme or Indian nut trees, the boordes being peeced toge∣ther, after the manner of the Portingale barkes, wherein they vse both sailes and o••es, and with them they fish in all the riuers thereabout which are very full of fish, and with them likewise they row vn∣to the firme land. On that side which rea∣cheth towardes the firme land: there are trees that growe in certaine deepe places, on the shore, vpon the rootes whereof the sea continually beateth, where groweth oysters as broade as a mans hand, verie good to be eaten, and wel knowne to that countrey people, which they call Ambizi∣amatare, which is to say, stone fish. The Island at one ende is very neere vnto the firme land, and the chanell is oftentimes swoome ouer by the countrey people, and in the same chanel there are certaine smal Islandes, which when it floweth are not seene, but when it ebbeth, they appeare a∣boue the water, and being vncouered, they finde the oysters lying at the rootes of the trees, hare by the Island, on the outwarde part, swim many whales, that are blacke, and fight togither, killing ech other, wher∣of being fished, & taken vp by the Moores, they make treane oile, with the which and with pitch togither, they dresse their ships: the mouth of the ••auen lieth in the north, in breadth aboue halfe an Italian mile, be¦ing very deep, and right ouer against it on the firme land lieth the village of S. Paul, not very strongly fortified, and inhabited by Portingales, that are brought the thither with wife and children out of Por¦tingale, all the channell is very full of fish, specially of Sardins and Ench••ones, which in winter time are there in so great abun∣daunce, that they leape vpon the shore: al∣so diuers other good fishes, as soales, stur∣geons, barbles, and great creui••hes, which are very wholesome, and are there found in great numbers, whereby the common people doe liue. Satling further from Lo∣anda, you come to the Riuer called Coan∣za, which Riuer with Bengo, and other Riuers aforesaide doe make the Island of Loanda, so that Coanza also hath her off∣spring from a little lake, which maketh a Riuer that floweth out of the same greate lake, from whence Nylus and other Ri∣uers haue their issue, which Lake in this Carde is called Zane or Zembre, of the ancient fathers Tritoms Lanis, because therein (as it is saide) Sea-gods, and Mermaids haue beene found.

The entrance of the riuer of Coanza is about halfe a mile broad, & may be sailed vp with a scute at the lest xx. miles against the streame, but it hath no speciall hauen. Thereabout beginneth the kingdome of Angola, which in time past was vnder the obedience of the kinges of Congo, but not long since, by meanes of a certaine go∣uernor, it was taken from it, and made a gouernement of it selfe, which holdeth himselfe as a friend, and not as a vassaile to the king of Congo, yet many times hee sendeth him certaine presents in maner of a tribute.

Frō Coanza passing forward you come to a hook of land called Capo Ledo, which hauing compassed about, you finde other Riuers, the first is Songa, which may bee sailed vp xxv. Italian or fiue Duch miles, the next Bengleli, where now one of the king of Angolas subiects is gouernor: then you come to a very good hauen, fit and ca∣pable for all shippes, called the Creeke of Kine, of some, the banke of Kine, because thereabout great numbers of kine doe vse to pasture, being a plaine country, fruitful of grasse, and al kinds of vutualles: & there many times is openly to be solde certayne kinds of mettall, specially siluer, as Lopez and Pigafetta his interpreters do witnes, from whence most part of this description is drawne and taken forth: and so far was the coast of the mighty kingdome of Con∣go vsually accounted to bee, where the Portingales, in the first discouery of the

country did ordinarily traffike, and begin∣neth vnder 4 degrées and ½ on the south side of the Equinoctiall line, reaching til you come vnder 13. degrees, which are 630. Italian miles▪ that is, 126. Duch miles, accounting fiue Italian miles to e∣uerie Duch mile: and although this coun∣trie, as also al other, hath other sides, that lie both East, West, North, and South, yet this discriptiō of the West side (as far as it reacheth on the sea coasts) shal suffice for the necessary knowlege of those y^e saile along the Affrican or Indian seas. But to make it some what better knowne, I will, in parte, describe the fruitfulnes thereof: which to vnderstand you must know, that the whole kingdome of Congo is diuided into sire principall prouinces, which are called Bamba, Sogno, Sundi, Pango, Bat∣ta, and Pemba.

Bamba is the greatest and the richest, it reacheth along the Sea coast from the riuer of Ambrizi, to the riuer of Coan¦za, hauing in it many Lordes, whose names are needelesse to rehearse, for they are all called Mani, that is, Lord, as Mani Bamba, lord of Bamba, Mani Loanda, lord of Loanda, Mani Coanza, lord of Coanza. This prouince of Bamba is the key, shield and defence of the whole kingdom of Con¦go, from whence the king hath all his po∣wer & means to resist the enemy, for they withstand al rebellions of the places bor∣during about them: they haue diuers ex∣pert souldiers that are alwayes in armes, helping and assisting the king in all his wars, and in the same prouince, if need re∣quire, he may haue 400000. fighting mē, and according to the manner of the coun∣trey at his commaundement. The prin∣cipall towne of this prouince lieth in an e∣uen field, betweene the riuers of Loze and Ambrizi, and is called Panza, which is a common name to all theyr towns, where the gouernor lieth: it is distant from the sea about 100. Italian miles, which are 20. Dutch miles: in this prouince begin∣neth the hill, wherein are mines of siluer, and of al other mettalls (reaching toward the kingdome of Angola) being very rich, and there on the strande they finde the Schulphkens which they vse for money, where likwise is the greatest trade for sale of slaues in al that country, being brought from Angola, which the Portingales eue∣ry yeare do buy of them by thousands, car∣rying them to sell againe into diuers far & different countries. The people of the country are very expert in armes. They beare long and broad rapiers, or two han∣ded swordos like the Slauonians, or Swit∣zers, which are brought vnto them by the Portingales, & som of them are so strong, that with one blow they will strike a slaue cleane thorow the middle of the body into peeces: and further, there hath bin so of thē found that haue borne the fourth part of a butte of wine (weying about 325. li. vpon theyr shoulders: besides those wea∣pons, they haue bowes, wherein they bee very expert, with long shieldes made of barks solded togither, whereof I can shew you. In this prouince of Bamba there be diuers strange beasts as elephants, wher∣of there be many, by reason of the great a∣boundaunce of wooddes, meddowes, and streames, and be very great for that they grow halfe the time of theyr liues, which is 150. yeares. Those that haue bin found in Portingale, and here with vs, are 〈◊〉〈◊〉, because they are yong, & not come to the•••• full growths: and to prooue them to 〈◊◊〉〈◊◊〉 great, it may be tried by the greatnes and weight of some of the teeth that be brought from thence, for that there hath been 〈◊〉〈◊〉 found to be two hundred pounds 〈…〉〈…〉, euery pound foure and twenty 〈◊〉〈◊〉. In Congo speech an elephants tooth is called Mene Manzo, and the yong elephantes are by them called Moana Manzo, theyr eares are as big as the greatest target that the Turkes do beare, which are sixe spans long, in forme like a Gys, and somewhat sharpe towardes the shoulder, and with the beating of theyr eares and tayles, they driue away the flies, and likewise with the wrinckling and shrinking toge∣ther of theyr skinnes they kill them. The hayres on theyr tailes are very thicke, blacke, and shining, the olde hauing them much fayrer than the yoong, and be more woorth: theyr hayres are ••s••d by these country people, for necke laces, speciallie by the men and gentlewomen in the coun¦trey of Angola, and the places borduring on the same, which are much esteemed and accounted of bicause they come from these kindes of beasts, as also for the fay renesse and strength of the hayre, for that some of them are so strong that a man can not breake them with his handes. Some of the countrey people venture theyr liues, to get them, which is in this maner: when the elephant passeth through so narrowe a¦way that he cannot turne himselfe, they leape out, or follow him, and with sharpe kniues cut off his haires, which they sell, and are wreathed and folded in the man∣ner and forme of Ringes and Laces, and so worne about th••yr neckes, armes,

and fingers, thereof by whole tayles, with th•• th••••es they weare in those countries: and many rings of the same hayre made by the ••es, you may see at D Paluda∣•••• house: the ancient fathers had not the great knowlege of elephants, bicause they 〈◊〉〈◊〉, y^t they cannot bow their legs, & that 〈◊〉〈◊〉 step, standing vpright against trees, by which means they write them to be ta∣•• but the experience of our country mē, as also of the Portingales, haue foūd it to be oth••rwise, and th••t they haue ioynts in their legs, and can bow them, lifting vppe their two ••egges against trees, to eate the ••arizes, as also stooping or kneeling down to the water, ••o drinke therof, of the which wants in their legs ••can shew you: what more 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the discription of Ele∣phants, seing many autho••s haue made mention of them, I esteeme it needelesse to speake more thereof in this place. There are likewis•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the same form and ••n, as 〈…〉〈…〉 haue beene seene in 〈…〉〈…〉 ••heweth a won∣•• 〈…〉〈…〉 beast, which is, 〈…〉〈…〉 vpon a white man, 〈…〉〈…〉 that if a blacke and a 〈…〉〈…〉 both together, they 〈…〉〈…〉 blacke man, and not 〈…〉〈…〉 ••ng hungrie, they come a•••• ••••oure the catrel, although the hou∣•••• 〈…〉〈…〉 be neuer so neare which they do•••• 〈…〉〈…〉 and no other kind of beastes 〈…〉〈…〉 they spare not any kinde 〈…〉〈…〉 Co•••• they are called Engo••, and are ••••uel beasts like Lions, but of an∣•• colour and speckled: they are taken 〈…〉〈…〉 being putte into flesh and other 〈…〉〈…〉 being hot with arrowes 〈…〉〈…〉 of the Tiger, is 〈…〉〈…〉 extreame poyson, which 〈…〉〈…〉 procureth presit death. 〈…〉〈…〉 ••••ke them are punished 〈…〉〈…〉 their skins with∣out the 〈…〉〈…〉 ••une prouince hath another kind of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 called 〈◊〉〈◊〉, altoge∣th•••• 〈…〉〈…〉 only differing herein, that 〈…〉〈…〉 which the m••le doth not: this 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of a verie strange hatre, for that 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••he backe downe to the bell••e it is all 〈◊〉〈◊〉 with thee co••ours, white, blacke, and ••arke red, ea•••• ••ripe orderly follow∣•• the oth••r, and th•••• ••ingers broade, as 〈…〉〈…〉 the book printed at 〈…〉〈…〉. Of these beasts 〈…〉〈…〉 breede 〈◊〉〈◊〉 yeare there are 〈…〉〈…〉, and ••de, and there∣•• 〈…〉〈…〉, whereby the Portin∣•• 〈…〉〈…〉 s••••th, to say a man or other t••••••g is as sw••ft as a Zebra, meaning thereby, as swift as possible may be, being tamed, they would serue in place of horses, both to ride vpon, & to draw, as also in wars and other necessary affaires, so that herein a man may wel see the great prouidence of God, that hath enriched all countries with necessary prouisions, both of beastes and other thinges, as also with victuals: but because in al the kingdome of Congo there are no horses, and that they know not how to vse them, many of them know how to make their oren taine, wher∣of they haue great numbers, and setting saddles on their backes, with bridles in their mouthes, they ride vpon them also: in steede of beasts they vse men, which are brought vp to the same vse, and stande in the streetes readie to beare men, either in field beds, like the Indians in Palam∣kins or sitting vpon stooles or chaires, as you may see in the same booke that was printed in Rome. Therfore such as desire to make great haste as wee doo in riding post) take diuers slaues to beare them, and when one is wearie, there changeth and taketh another, as wee do horses, and by that meanes make speedy tourmes. There are likewise many other beasts, s••me as great as an ore, some lesse, by them called Empalanga, many wilde buffles and wolues, that are good of smel. and loue oyle, which they sucke out of the Palme trees, fores, harts, hindes, goates, comes, and hares in great aboundance, for that they are neither hunted nor killed. There likewise are many muske Cats by them made tame, whereby to gette the muske, which they delight in. Snakes and adders in those countries are of a strange forme, in respect of ours, and verie great, for there are some that are at the least 25. palmes long, and fiue in breadth, with their bellies & mouthes so great, that they will deuoure a hart or any other beast of the same big∣nesse: they feede vpon the land, and in the water, vsing both the elements, & hauing filled theyr bellies, they do oftentimes lie in some darke place to sleepe, and so are kil∣led, and by the countrey people eaten, estee∣ming them as daintie a meate as we doo hens and capons. There are many veno¦mous adders, which if they bite a man, he dyeth within foure and twentie houres after at the furthest. There are other beasts as big as a Rans Owle, like Dragons, ha∣uing wings and a taile, with a long mouth and many teeth, they eate raw flesh, they are of colour blew and greene, and with a painted skinne, and two feete: some of the Moores pray vnto them. There are like∣wise

many Camelions, as great as a hors∣leach, with a high backe, and foure féete, changing into al colours. Birds there are of diuers sorts, as Indian hennes, Pea∣cocks, geese, ducks, wilde and tame partri∣ges, fezants, pigins, and turtle doues, in great aboundance, also Eagles, Falcons, Hawkes, Pellicans, and such like birdes: besides al these, there are diuers parrats, both greene, and gray, and verie red, by them called Framenghi, with an innume∣rable number of small birdes, singing as pleasantly as Canare birdes. The second prouince of Congo called Songo, lyeth a∣bout the Riuer of Zaire and Loango, and reacheth to the Riuer Ambrizi towardes the North, vnder seauen degrees and a halfe, and endeth at the red stone Rocks, which lie vppon the borders of the king∣dome of Loango, in the middle of that pro∣uince. There is a towne called Songo, wherein the gouernor dwelleth, and of the same town the prouince taketh the name: In this prouince are many Eelphants, where they vse to exchange theyr teeth for Iron, likewise apes and munkies, both great and little, of diuers kindes, whereof many are verie pleasant and louing, good to passe the tune withall, doing whatsoe∣uer they see any man do: in this prouince they make much linnen of the Indian Palme trees, wherewith they haue great traffike, whereof I haue many sorts: they are rich of kine, and of other beasts afore∣sayde: for Religion they are heathens, and pray to what thing soeuer they will, they esteeme the sunne as husband, and for the greatest God, and the Moone as wife, for the seconde God. Their apparrell is like those of Congo, and haue war with theyr neighbors, the people of Anzicana.

Sundi the third prouince is the first, & as it were a parte of the kings owne inheri∣tance, and therfore it is ruled by the kings eldest sonne, or a Prince of the bloud roy∣all, that is next heyre vnto the crowne: it lyeth about the Citie of Congo, by the por∣tingals called S. Saluato••, and reacheth from thence about fortie Italian miles, or eight Duch miles, to the Riuer of Zaire. The people of that countrey as also of Pango, deale much with salte and colou∣red linnen, by the Portingales brought out of India, vsing schelpkēs for their mo∣ney, for the which wares they barter lin∣nen made of Palme trees, Elephants teeth, sables, Martires, and some girdles made of the leaues of Palme trees, much esteemed of in those countries, whereof I can shew you: in this prouince there grow∣eth much Cristall, and many kindes of mettals, yet they esteeme of iron more then of al others mettals, saying that other met∣tals are vnprofitable & of iron they ma••e kniues, swords, and other weapons, with such like instruments, necessarie for the vse of man.

Pango the fourth prouince, was in time past a free kingdome, ruled and gouerned of it selfe, on the North side reaching to∣wardes Sundy on the South side to Batta, on the West, to the country of Congo, and on the East to the Sunne hilles. The chee∣fest towne is called Pango, and lyeth on the West side of the Riuer Barbela, which issueth out of the great lake from whence Nilus floweth, their traffike is like those of Sundi.

Batta the fift prouince, on the North side ioyneth to Pango, and on the East to the Riuer Barbela, and so to the sunne hilles, and to the foote of the Saltpeeter hils, and of the South side of the same hils. it rea∣cheth to Barbela til you come to the burnt hil. The cheefe towne is called Batta, where the gouernor is resident, which go∣uernor is allowed to haue musket and ca∣liuer shot, because that Eastward, beyond the sun & Saltpeeter hils, on the East and West side of the riuer Nilus, there dwel∣leth certaine people▪ of the Congoers, cal∣led G••aquas, and in their owne countrie Agag, verie fierce and cruel, and much gi∣uen to fight, & to steale, whose ordinary in∣cursions into the countries about thē, and also into Batta, maketh them necessarily to stand vpon theyr guard, & so to defend thē∣selues. This prouince can raise 70. or 80. thousande men well armed: from thence are brought many Sables and Flumen, the rest of their traffike is like these at Pango and Sundi.

In Peniba being the sixt prouince, ••••th the cheefe Citie 〈◊〉〈◊〉, in times past cal∣led Banza, that is the head, and now by the Portingales S. Sa••tor it lyeth on a hill within the land, distant from the sea 1••••. Italian miles, or thirty Duch m••les 〈◊〉〈◊〉 hil verie great and high, and most 〈◊〉〈◊〉, yet it yeeldeth iron, being about two Duch miles in compasse, al built with man ••∣lages and houses, where there are about 100. thousand men. This hil is very fruit∣ful, by reason of the fresh ayre, which is very cleare and sounde: it yeeldeth much good water, which neuer hurteth in•• is rich of grasse and al kindes of beastes, and fruitfull trees, which are alwaies greene, aboundant in al sorts of graine that are v¦sed in those countries, specially of one sort,

called Luco. which is holden and esteemed for the best and principall kinde of graine, as our wheat, but smaller like mustardseed, and somewhat greater, which they grinde in handmilles, whereof they make a verie white flower, making bread that is both wholesome and of a good sauour, and not much vnlike our bread made of wheate: of this grain they haue great store in Congo, which not long since was first brought thi∣ther from the riuer Nylus, specially from that place where Nilus fills the second lake. There is also much barly, called Mazza di Congo, that is, graine of Congo, and also great quantitie of Maiz, that is, Turkishe wheate, which is there but little estéemed, and by their country people called Mazza Manprito, that is, graine of Portingale, wherewith they fatten their hogges: of rice they haue great plenty, but nothing worth. This country is likewise ful of diuers sorts of fruitful trées, so that the common sort of people for the most part doe nourish them∣selues therewith, as citrons, lemons, and specially very pleasaunt oranges, neither swéet nor sowre, but indifferent, betwéene both: there are likewise many Bananes, which some thinke to be the fruit that in Si∣ria and Egypt are called Mase, and in this Booke Indian Figs, they are very pleasant and sauery fruit, of a swéete and sowerish taste, being a good sustenance for the coun∣trey: in the fatte land there groweth many sortes of palme trees, as the Indian Nutts, and such as bring forth Dates, & some grea∣ter, and other sortes of Palme trees, where∣of they make oyle, wine, vineger, fruit, and bread: they presse the oyle out of the fruite as the Spaniardes do oliues, which for co∣lour and substaunce is like our butter, but gréene and somwhat yelow, which they vse in stéede of oyle and butter, and burne it in lampes: they likewise annoynt their bo∣dies therewith: to conclude, it is good to eate in tune of néede, as it hapned to our men, that without this oyle had died for hunger.

Of the same oyle brought from thence, together with the wine and vineger of the same palme trees, I can shew you: the wine they draw out of the top of the tree, which being bored, there issueth a certaine iuyce like milke, being colde and fresh to drincke: the first that commeth foorth is sweete and very pleasant, next issueth sowre, and the last is vineger, which may be vsed in sal∣lets, but beeing drinke when it is fresh and newe, it maketh the water to auoyde, whereby in those countries men are little troubled with the stone, and drincking much, it maketh them drunke, and fasse∣neth well. The bread they make of the stones of this fruit, which in forme are like almonds, but much harder: within those stones are certaine kernels very pleasaunt to eate, increasing sound and good flesh: this fruit both inwardly and outwardly is gréene, and is eaten both rawe and sodden. There are other trées that bring foorth a certaine fruit called Cola, as great as a pine apple, within it hauing an other kinde of fruit like chesnuts, wherein are foure redde or carnation hoales, which they holde in theyr mouths, sucking and chawing them, thereby to quench their thirst. This fruit put into water, maketh it sowre, and of a good taste, they strengthen the stomacke, and are passing good for an euil lyuer, other sortes of wilde Palme trees are likewise found there, which yéelde much frui••, to bée eaten, the leaues seruing to make mais, to couer houses, and to make baskets or o∣ther necessary housholde stuffe, whereof I haue many sortes.

There are likewise other trées caled O∣gbeghe, which bring forth fruit, in forme like yellow plumbes, pleasant both in smel and taste, from these trees they cut certaine braunches, which they plant or sette close together, making them fast each to other, as wée doe Bore or Thornes, therewith making sences for their houses, which bran∣ches growing vp they make likewise galle∣ries and arbors, therein to kéepe them from the heate of the Sunne.

Besides al the fruits aforesaide, there are many other sorts, verie good for phisicke, as also to eate, specially Tamarinde of a verie tart and pleasant taste, and verie good a∣gainst burning feauers. The Moores and Turkes trauelling by land, take the rind of Tamarinde with them, and mixing it with water, drinke it, to coole the inward heate, specially the lyuer & kidnies, thereby also to make them laxatiue, as also Cassia Fistula, which is there verie plentiful, also Citrons, Melons, Pompions, Cucumbers, and al o∣ther sorts of fruites that grow out of the earth. Such as desire a larger discourse tou∣ching the same, let them reade Odoardus▪* 1.1 Lopez, translated by Piga••etta, and printed in Rome, from whence I haue gathered the most parte heereof: and although the hou∣ses in Congo are small and low, yet there wanteth no substance to builde withall, specially Stones, for there are great store, whereof may bee made whose Pillers, and foure square peeces of fine redde Marble stone, and there are such great peeces, that a whole Church might bee

hewed out of one of them. Besides this marble, there are hilles of iasper, porphier, or red marble, nured with white and other colours, which in Rome is called marble of Numidia, Affrica, and Ethiopia, whereof many pillers are to be seene in Rome.

There is likewise found many grained stones, among the which there are that are mixed with iacinths, which maye bee ta∣ken foorth and separated from the other stones wherein they growe: of those maye likewise pillars and other workes be made, wherein might bee seene diuers sortes of stones. There are also other strange stones mixed with mettall, of diuerse colours, as copper, in shew greene and shining, where∣of they maye make Images, and other princely workes, so that want of substance to builde withall is not the cause of theyr small houses, for neyther stone, chalke, wood, nor beastes to drawe or carry them is wanting, onelie, they haue no masons, carpenters, nor brickelayers, that shoulde make th••ir houses, so that they dwel in lit∣tle cotages. Heere might be declared, how this kingdome in the discouerie of the East Indies being in the yeare 1490. and 1491. was by the Portingales brought vnto the Christian faith: also howe shamefully the countrey was left when golde beganne to faile, I meane not by the decaying or dimi∣nishing of the golde, but because the King of Congo was persuaded by a Portingale, not to discouer the mine, as also not men∣tioning the euill gouernement of the Bi∣shoppes, Priestes, Moonkes, and Friers, that were sent thither, as beeing sufficient∣ly declared by Odoardus Lopez in his de∣scription thereof, shewing that they desi∣red not the health and saluations of mens soules, but rather glory and rule, and to sa∣tisfie their insatiable lustes and gréedinesse after golde.) Yet not long since the King of Congo now liuing, hath twice sent his em∣bassadors to the King of Spaine & the Pope of Rome, friendly & hartily desiring them, to send certaine preachers and teachers of the word of God, to instruct his subiects, withall, offering to discouer the rich mines of gold that are within his countrey, there∣by to winne them to bring preachers to in∣struct his country: but christendome hath other matters in hand, as to hang, suppres, pursue, and destroy their christen brethren, which being beyond my profession, is not for me to deale in.

But returning to the further description of the coast of Angola, to the great cape de Bona Speranza: first as touching Angola, it is by report) very populous, and abun∣dant in siluer, copper, and other mettall, rich of al kinds of beasts and victualles, spe∣cially kine, yet the people rather eate dogs flesh, which they buy and pay dearer for it, than for any other flesh: their mony is schul∣pens like theirs in Congo, and are like in speech, yet different in some words, as Spa¦nish and Portingale: their king is an ido∣later or a Heathen. They haue as many wiues as they will, whereby they haue such aboundaunce of people, that Angola alone can make a million of armed men, all rea∣dy to serue theyr gouernours in the warrs. They vse many glasse beades brought out of Venice, beeing of diuerse colours, which they weare for an ornament about their neckes and armes, in their speech they doe call them Anzoles, and being hanged on strings, Mizanga.

Hauing passed the kingdome of Ango∣la, and the shoare of Kine called Seno delle Vache, southward to the black cape, or Out hooke, the coast stretcheth about 220. Itali∣an miles. This coast is all one land, like Angola, and is vnder the gouernement of many lordes: and from this blacke cape reacheth a line Eastward, parting the hills called the colde hilles, which also in some high places néerer to the Equinoctiall line, are by the Portingales called the Snowe hilles, which end at the foote of the Cristall hill, taking her name from the great abun∣dance of cristall found therein: out of those Snow hilles the waters that make the lake haue their beginning, by the Portingales called Dumbea, Zocche, and this cristall hil stretcheth further into the north toward the siluer hilles, as farre as Malomba, where the kingdome of C••ngo endeth, bee∣ing diuided by the riuer of Coari. Coast∣ing along the shoare from the kingdome of Angola, to the cape de Bona Speranza, you must passe by the kingdome of Climbeb••, wherein raineth king Matama: this coun∣try reacheth to the riuer of Bauaghul spring¦ing out of the hill called Luna or the Moone, and both together running into the riuer Magnice, which floweth out of the lake a∣foresaide: behind this lieth Tropicus Can∣cri, and betweene this Tropicus Cancri and the cape de Bona Speranza, there raigneth no king, but diuerse seuerall Lords. This land is compassed by high, sharpe, and colde unhabited hilles: the people that are there liue in the fields, like labourers in cotages, apparelled in beasts skins, wild rough peo∣ple, and not to be credited, not induring or permitting anie traffike with straungers. Their weapons are dartes and arrowes: their meate fruites of the earth, and flesh of

beasts. The ancient Writers thought the riuer Ni••u•• to haue her off spring in the hils of the Moone, so that many to this day are likewise of the same opinion. In this hil to∣wardes the weast lieth a small lake called Gale, out of the which lake floweth the Ri∣uer Camilla, by the Portingales called the fresh riuer, which about the end of the falce cape de Bona Speranza runnes into the sea. This Hooke is called the false or vnright Cape, because the ships that saile from In∣dia to Portingale, doe first discouer a great corner or hook of land called De••li Agu••••ie, and after that this smaller hooke, and there∣fore call it the Faise Cape, beeing seperated from the right and great Cape. The space betweene these two Hookes or Capes is 20 Dutch miles, which bearing out like twoo hornes, make an intercourse or gulfe where the Portingales at times take in water out of the fresh riuer aforesaide: and the people dwelling about this riuer are blacke (al∣though the pole antartike is there at 35 de∣grees as also those that dwell in the colde hilles of the Moone, so that it is not the heat of the Sunne, but the nature of the Coun∣trey that maketh them blacke. And bicause this is the greatest hooke or cape, and that reacheth furthest into the sea of any Cape whatsoeuer in al the world, and very daun∣gerous to passe (as al other Capes are) as also because that in this place the sea makes a most fearful noyse, & that the land windes comming downe, make the sea thereabouts most rough and troublesome, whereby so many Portingale ships haue there bin cast away: and because by ancient Historiogra∣phers so litle hath bin said therof, before and since the Portingales discouered the same, & thinke it good in this place to set downe, the measure and certaine knowledge of the greatnesse of the Portingales voyage to∣wards the Indies▪ for that there are about 6000. Italian miles to saile before you com to compas this great cape, for that from the riuer of Fernando Poo where the head first beginneth to iut into the sea, to the furthest point, which (as I said) is called Delli A∣guglie, that is, the néedles, the coast from north to south is accounted 2200. Italian miles, and on the other side of the same hooke or corner, to the point or cape Guarda fu••, lying ouer against the Iland Socotora, the coast from south to north is accounted 3300. Italian miles, whereof 1000. Itali∣an miles make 200. Dutch miles, and is 660. Dutch miles, so that from Lisbon sai∣ling about the coast of Affrica, & the cape de Bona Speranza to the kingdome of Goa, are about 15000. Italian miles, and thence to Malacca, & China, is as much againe: so that not any people in the world did euer make so dangerous a voyage, as the Portingales haue done, except within these few yeares, certain English gentlemen, that not onelie haue performed this voyage, but haue say∣led round about the worlde. This head is called the cape de Bona Speranza, that is, head of good Hope, for that al the ships that saile to India. or from India to Portingale, do feare the passing of this cape, thinking if they passe it, to haue passed al danger.

Now to returne to our matter touching the coast of Affrica, hauing passed the cape delli Aguglie, there are diuers good hauens for ships to harbor in, first Seno Formoso, & il Seno del Lago, because in that place the sea makes a gulfe or entrance, wherein are certaine Ilands and hauens: alitle further the riuer called S. Christofer runs into the sea, in the mouth whereof lieth iii. Ilands: and somewhat further there comes a riuer out of the land (which the Portinga••e•• call ••eria della Natiuita, that is, the land of Christs birth, bicause it was discouered on the same day) downe to the cape de la Pes∣cheria, between this cape & the riuer M••g∣nice, lieth the kingdome of Burtua, which reacheth to the hils of the Moone, and so to this riuer towardes the north, where the country of Monomo••ap•• lieth, and on the west side to the riuer Bauagul. In this coun¦try are many gold veines, the people being altogether like the men of Monometapa: & passing in this maner by the coast, you sée y^e riuer of Magnice, by the which begins the kingdome of Sofala, & the country of Meno¦motapa. This riuer springeth out of the same lake where Nilus issueth forth, & run∣neth into y^e sea, in the middle of the entrance betwéene two corners of land, one called Della Pescheria, the other Delli Correnti, liyng vnder 23. degrees ½ on the south side of the pole, vnder Tropicus Caneri. Into this riuer not far from the sea, run three o∣ther riuers, whereof one is called S. Christo∣pher, and by the inhabitants of the country called Nagoa: the second hath her name of a particular man called Lorenzo Marcho••, (because he found it first) and in that coun∣try Toroa: these two issue out of the hils of the Moone: the third is called A••r••e spring∣ing out of the other side of the hills, by the golde mines of Mone motapa: in some pla∣ces of this riuer they finde golde as small as sand. These three riuers, together with the riuer of Magnice running into the sea, cast foorth great abundance of water, and from the mouth of these three Riuers stretcheth the kingdome of Sosala, to the riuer of

Cuania, which hath receiued hir name from a Castle of the same name, inhabited by Mahometanes. This riuer of Cuama di∣uideth it selfe into seuen partes, besides the channel that floweth vpwardes, al inhabi∣ted and very populous, and floweth out of the same riuer from whence Nylus doeth is∣sue: so the kingdome of Sofala lieth betwéen these two riuers Magnice and Cuama on the sea side, yet very small, hauing but fewe townes or villages, whereof the principall cittie is Sofala, lying in an Island of the same riuer, giuing the name to the whole country inhabited by Mahometanes, their King being of that sect, but subiect to the King of Portingale, onely because they wil not be vnder the obedience of Monomo¦tapa.

In the mouth of this riuer Cuama, the Portingales haue a fort, where there is much traffike for golde, iuorie and amber, which is found by the slaues vpon the coast, bartering the same for linnen made of cot∣ten, and for silke, brought from Cambaia. The people as nowe inhabiting therein, were not borne in that country, but before the Portingales discouered the land, they came out of Arabia Felix, with small barkes to traffike there: and being once brought in subiection by the Portingales, doe nowe inhabite and dwell there, being neither Turkes nor heathens.

In the inward parte of the countrey be∣tween those two riuers beginneth the king∣dome of Monomotapa, wherein are manie golde mines, which is carried into all the places round about, as well to Sofala, as throughout Affrica, some being of opini∣on, that out of this country Solomon cau∣sed golde and iuorie to be brought into Ie∣rusalem, which seemeth not vnlikely, for that in this Kingdome of Monomotapa, were found many olde and princely build∣ings, very costly, both for timber, stone, chalke, and wood, which in the countries about it are not found. The gouernement of Monomotapa is very great, and reach∣eth ouer many warrelike people, all Hea∣thens and Pagans, blacke, of a middle sta∣ture, and very swift: in the which gouern∣ment are many kings that are subiect to the same, and doe often rebell: their weapons are dartes and light targets. This Empe∣rour holdeth many armies in seuerall pro∣uinces, diuided into legions, after the ma∣ner of the Romanes, thereby to defend hys great countrey, and to maintaine his e∣state: amongst his men of warre the legi∣on of women is the best, which are greatly esteemed of by the King, wherein consist∣eth his greatest power. These women do burne theyr breastes, because they shoulde not hinder them in shooting, like the A∣mazons, whereof the auncient Historio∣graphers make mention: these women are very swift, expert, and cunning in shooting out of their bowes. In theyr fight they vse a certayne subtiltie, which is, that seeming to runne away and flee from their ennemies, as being scattered, vpon the sodayne returne agayne, and do their ennemy great mischiefe, especially when they thinke to haue gotten the victo∣ry, and by that subtiltie are ouerthrowne. These women haue places appointed them to dwell in by themselues, and at certayne times haue the company of men, that they may haue children, which if they be boyes, they send vnto their fathers, if daughters, they keepe them.

The countrey of Monomotapa is in ma∣ner of an Island, formed in that order by the sea, the riuer of Magnice, and a parte of the lake from whence the riuer spring∣eth, together with the riuer Cuam••, bordu∣ring on the south vppon the Lordes of the cape de Buona Spera••za, and on the north vpon the kingdome of Monemugi.

Sayling along the coast by the riuer of Cuama, you come to a small kingdome li∣ing vppon the sea side called Angoscia, ta∣king the name from certaine Islandes that beare the same name, lying right against it, inhabited by Mahometanes and Hea∣thens, which in small shippes doe traffike, and deale in such wares as those of Sofala vse. And sayling further, you discouer the kingdome of Mosambique, lying vnder fouretéene degrees and a halfe, whereof I haue sufficient spoken heretofore, as also of the Island lying behinde it called Quiloa, and the great Island of S. Laurence, making the chanell, which in the entrance towards the west is three hundred and forty Italian miles broad, and in the middle towardes Mosambique, where it is narrowest a hun∣dred and seauentie miles, kéeping that breadth all along the coasts towards India, containing many Islandes. The shippes that saile from Spaine into India, and from India into Spaine, do commonly keepe their course through this channell, vnlesse they be otherwise compelled by the winde: and surely this Island deserueth to haue better people than it hath inhabiting therein, be∣cause of the situation, hauing many good and safe hauens, togither with fayre riuers, & sweet fresh waters, which cause the land to bring forth diuers kinds of fruits and spi∣ces, as beans, pease, rice and corn, oranges,

lemons and citrons, and all sortes of flesh, tame and wilde hennes, swine and harts of very good and sweete flesh, by reason of the fertilitie, and excellent good fish. The inha∣bitants are heathens, and some of Maho∣mets sect, of a fayre colour, much giuen to war, and to their weapons, specially bowes and woodden holberts. This Island is di∣uided into foure gouernments, ech fighting against other. Therein are many mines of gold, siluer, copper, yron, and other metals: but the wilde people vse not to traffike out of their owne countrey, but onely sayle in small scutes (cut out of trées) from one place of the Island to the other, for the most parte not suffering any traffike in their Island with strangers: yet the Portingales at this time traffike in some of their hauens, but go not on land, and from thence bring am∣bergreece, ware, siluer, copper, rice, and di∣uers other wares. In this chanel betwéen the firme land of Affrica and this Island, there lieth many both great and small I∣slands, al inhabited by Mahometanes, a∣mong the which the chiefe is S. Christofer, then the Holyghost, another called Magli∣aglie, as also Comoro, Anzoame, Maiotto and such like. Returning againe vnto the coast, and hauing passed Quiloa, you sée the kingdome of Mombaza, lying vnder thrée degrées and a halfe on the south side, tak∣ing the name from a certaine Island, so cal∣led, wherein lieth a faire towne, with ma∣ny goodly buildings, beautiffied with diuers Images and figures, the king being a Ma∣hometane, who withstanding the Portin∣gales, spéede like those of Quiloa, taking it by force, where they found much golde, sil∣uer, pearles, cotten, linnen, silkes and cloth of golde, with other sortes of merchandises. This Island bordureth on Quiloa, and Melinde, inhabited by heathens and Ma∣hometanes, and subiect to the king of Mo∣nemugi.

Sayling further, you come to the king∣dome of Melinde, which is likewise verie small, stretching along the sea coast till you come to the riuer Chimamchi lying vnder two degrees and a halfe, and vpwardes by the riuer it runneth to a lake called Calice, about a hundred Italian miles, or twentie Dutch miles: In this countrey about the sea side there is a very great towne, most inhabited by white people, al heathens and Mahometanes: their houses are built al∣most like the houses in Portingale: theyr sheepe are almost as bigge againe as those in Portingale, with tailes, which are ac∣counted for a quarter of mutton, weighing at the lest fiue and twenty or thirtie pound. The women are white, and dresse them∣selues after the manner of Arabia, very prowdly, and in great pompe, al in silkes, wearing about their neckes, armes, and legges, iewels, rings, and bracelets of gold, going with their faces couered, like the E∣gyptian women, not being seene or known, but when it pleaseth them: in this towne there is a good hauen for ships to lie in, and for the most parte, the people are friendly, vpright in worde and déede, holding good friendshippe with strangers, specially with the Portingales, giuing them much credit, and neuer hurting them. Betweene the ii. heads of Mombaza, and Melinde there lieth three Islands, the first called Momsie, the second Zanzibar, and the third P••mba, all inhabited by Mahometanes, white of co∣lour, very rich and abundant in wealth, but not vsed to the warres, only to til thearth. In those Islands is much sugar, which is by them brought in boates vnto the firme land, with other fruites of those Islandes within the firme land.

Beyond those three kingdomes of Qui∣loa, Melinde, and Mumbaza, lieth the great and large kingdome of Monemugi, which on the south lieth vppon the kingdome of Molambique, by the riuer of Co••uo, and on the west vpon the riuer Nylus, between the two lakes, on the north vppon the Land of P••es••e•• lolin it liueth peaceably with the 3. kingdomes aforesaid, traffiking with them for cotten, linnen, which is brought thither out of Cambaia, w^t such like wares, brought out of India, which they barter for gold, sil∣uer, copper, and iuory, but on the other side towards Monomotapa, it hath continuall warres, and that so cruel and bloody, that it can hardly be knowne who hath the victo∣ry, because in that place there méeteth two mighty people, and those that are most ex∣pert in armes throughout all Affrica, for those of Monomotapa, the women called Amazon, whereof I spake before: and for Monemugi, the people (by those of Men∣congi) called Giachi, but in their owne spéech Agagi, which in time past vsed much to inuade the kingdome of Congo, nothing incomparable for strength, and agillitie to the Amazons.

This people haue a custome, with hote yrons to burne their faces, especially their vpper lippes., and so make strikes and lines in them: also they turne their eye lids vpwards and round about. They are blacke with shining skinnes. The white of their eies being of so swart a colour, that by their faces they seeme to be stange and cruel mōsters: they are il fauored, & great bodies,

liuing in the fields like beasts, & eate mans flesh. In war they are most couragious, set∣ting most fiercely vpon their enemie: their arms are darts, wherin they are most cun∣ning. Comming again vnto the Coast, & ha∣uing past the kingdome of Melinde, to the Cape de Guarda fuy, there are many other places inhabited by white Mahome∣tanes, where there are some good hauens, whither diuers strange shippes and Mar∣chants with their wares doe ordinarily re∣sort, wherof the chéefe is Pate, the second Braua, the third Magadoxo, the fourth Amffion, and behinde that reacheth the broade and wide head or Cape of Guarda Fuy, which because of the greatnes, issueth farre into the sea, is knowne by many ships comming out of India, Arabia, Or∣mus, & other places. And about this Cape the Portingales do yearely watch for the Turkish ships, which saile with many cost∣ly wares, not hauing licence of them, & they are boorded and spoyled of their wares by the Portingales, presuming themselues to be lords of al the traffike in those coūtries, not permitting any other to traffike therin but onely themselues, or by theyr licence.

Hauing sailed about this Cape de Guar∣da Fuy, and setting your course towardes the redde Sea, there are other townes and hauens, inhabited by the Mahome∣tanes, the first called Meth, the other being somewhat further Barbora, and there are the last white people: from thence you finde al blacke people, and beyond that you come to Ceila, Dalaca, Malaca, & Carachin, which coast in their spéech is called Baragi∣am being al Moores, and expert in armes, their apparrell from the middle vpwarde being of cotten linnen. The chéefe gouer∣nours or nobles weare Cappoten, which they cal Bermissi, this countrey is rich of gold, Iuory, mettal, and al kind of victuals. From thence you come to the mouth of the red sea, wherein lyeth an Island called Ba∣belmandel, on both sides wherof there run∣neth a channel into the red sea, whereof the West side is almost fiftéene Italian, that is, three Duch miles broade, through the which al the shippes doe passe both in and out: the channel lying on the other side, is shallow, and ful of sandes and cliffes, so that in al it is about sixe Duch miles broade, whereof the one poynt lying in the Affrican shore, is called Raibel, and the other lying in the countrey of Arabia Felix, is called Ara, whereabouts also is the hauen of the rich towne of Aden in Arabia, alreadie spoken of in this booke. This water runneth in∣ward vnto Swes, being about 1200. Italian miles in lēgth, on both sides altogether dry and verie shallow, ful of Islandes, déep only in the middle, where the shippes do ordina∣rily saile, which is onely by the great & swift course of the water, which scouring the channel, kéepeth it cleane and déepe, casting vp the sande on both sides.

Now to say something of Prester Iohn, being the greatest and the mightiest prince in all Affrica, his countrey beginneth from the enterance into the red sea, and reacheth to the Island of Siene, lying vnder Tropicus Cancri, excepting the coast of the same sea, which the Turke within these fiftie yeares hath taken from him, so that his gouern∣ment towards the Northwest and East, li∣eth most part by the red sea, and Northeast, vpon Egypt, and the desarts of Nubia, and on the South side vpon Monomugi, so that to set downe the greatnesse of all the coun∣tries which this Christian king hath vnder his commandement, they are in compasse 4000. Italian miles. The cheefe Cittie whereof, and wherein he is most resident is called Belmalechi, his gouernment is ouer many countries and kingdomes that are rich and aboundant, in gold, siluer, and pre∣cious stones, and al sorts of mettals, his peo∣ple are of diuers colours, white, blacke, and betwéene both, of a good stature and pro∣portion. The noblemen and gentlemen of the countrey, apparrel themselues in silke, Imbrodered with gold and other such like. In this countrey they obserue lawes for wearing of apparrel by degrées, as they do in Portingale, for that some are not permit∣ted to weare any other apparrel but Lea∣ther: the people are Christians, but hold cer∣taine ceremonies of the Iewish lawe, and vpon the day of the conception of the virgin Mary, al the kings and Princes vnder his obedience, do come vnto the saide towne of Belmalechi, there to celebrate the feast, eue∣rie man bringing with him such treasor or yearely tribute as he is bound to pay, and at the same feast the people come thither in pilgrimage to honour it, wherevppon that day there is a great procession, and out of the church from whence they come, they bring an Image of the virgin Mary, in form like a man, of Massie gold, and where the eyes should be, it hath two great rubies, the rest of the whole Image beeing wrought with excellent workmanship, and set with many precious stones, laying it on a beere of gold very cunningly wrought. At this procession Prester Iohn himselfe is perso∣nally present, either sitting in a Chariot of golde, or riding on an Elephant, most rich∣ly trapped, himselfe apparrelled in most

strange and costly cloth of golde, al embro∣dered and set with pearles and stones most sumptuous to beholde: to see this feast and Image the people runne in so great troupes, that by reason of the prease, ma∣ny are thrust to death.

This Emperour Prestor Iohn is not rightly named, for that his name is Belgi∣an, Bel signifying the highest, perfectest, and excellentest of all things, and Gian Lorde, or Prince, which is proper to all that com∣maund or gouerne ouer others: so then Bel∣gian signifieth the chiefe or highest Prince, which name being so ioyned, is proper to none but to the king, hauing also a surname of Dauid, as our Emperours the name of Caesar or Augustus.

Here I must alittle discourse of the riuer Nylus, which hath not her issue in Belgians land, neither from the hilles of the Moone, nor as Ptolomeus saith, from the two lakes which he placeth in the midle between east and weast, with the distance of almost foure hundred and fiftie Italian miles one from the other, for that vnder the same pole wher in Ptolomeus placeth the saide two lakes, lieth the two kingdoms of Congo and An∣gola, towardes the weast, and on the other side towards the east the kingdome of Mo∣nomotapa and Sofala, with distance from the one sea to the other of about twelue hun¦dred Italian miles: and Odoardus saieth, that in these countries there is but one lake, which lieth on the bordures of Angola, and Monomotapa, which is in bignesse about a hundred ninety fiue Italian miles: of the which lake wee are well assured, and truely certified by those of Angola, but on the east side of Sofala and Monomotapa, there is no mention made of any other lake, where∣by it may be saide, that vnder the same de∣grees there is no other lake. True it is that there are yet two other lakes, but they lie clean contrary to those whereof Ptolomeus writeth, for hee (as I saide before) placeth his lakes right in the middle betweene east and weast, and those whereof I speake, lie right by direct line betweene north and south, distant about foure hundred miles. Some men in those countries are of opini∣on, that Nilus springeth out of the first lake, and then againe hideth it selfe vnder the earth, and issue out againe in another place, which some men deny, and Odoardus saith that right the opinion therein is, that Ny∣lus passeth not vnder the earth, but that it runneth through certayne fearefull and de∣sart valleis, where no man commeth or inhabiteth, (without anye certaine chan∣nell) and so it is sayd that it runneth vnder the earth.

Therefore it is most certaine that Nyl•• floweth out of the first sake, which lieth vnder twelue degrees, by the pole antar∣tike, which lake is almost compassed a∣bout with hils, whereof those that lie east∣ward, are called Ca••ates, with rockes of Saltpeeter, and of siluer on the one side, and on the other side hilles, through the which Nylus descendeth about foure hun∣dred miles right north, and then runneth into an other lake that is greater, which the inhabitantes doe call a Sea or Meere, because it is greater than the other, being in breadth about twoo hundred and twen∣tie miles, lying right vnder the equinocti∣all line. Of this second lake we are true∣ly aduertised by the people of Arzich•• the which bordure vppon Congo, who traf¦fiking in that country reporte, that in that lake there are people that do saile in great shippes, that can write, vsing weights and measures, which they haue not in the bordures of Congo, which also build their houses of stone and chalke as it gro∣weth in the earth, much like the peo∣ple of Portingale, whereby it may be saide, that Prestor Iohns land is not farre from thence. Out of this second lake aforesaide, the riuer Nylus runneth to the Island of Meroe, being distant from the lake 240. Dutch miles (whereunto other Riuers haue their course, as the riuer of Colues, &c. lying on the bordures of Melinde,) and comming to the saide Island of Meroe, it diuideth it selfe in two partes, compassing about a high land called Meroe: on the right side of Meroe towardes the east run∣neth an other riuer called Abagni, spring∣ing out of the lake Bracina, which riuer runneth through Prestor Iohns land to the saide Island: and on the other side to∣wardes the west runneth other riuers, a∣mong the which is Saraboe. This riuer entring into Nilus, and running about the Island of Meroe, runne together in a bro∣der streame through Ethiopia, which is called Ethiopia, lying aboue Egypt, and reacheth to the descending thereof, where the riuer Nylus, meeteth againe with both the streames, together, in a high valley, and so with a great fall runs to the Island of Siene, with so horrible a noyse, that the people thereabouts by that means are most part deafe, and thence running through E∣gypt, it watereth al the countrey, and ma∣keth it fruitfull, and from thence runneth into the Mediterranean sea, right ouer a∣gainst Cipres, and that with two notable streames, besides others, whereof one at

Rossetto a dayes iourny from Alexandria runneth into the sea, the other at Pelusio, now called Damiata: so that hereby I con∣clude, that the riuer Nylus in Egypt, the ri∣uer Zaire in Congo, and the riuer Nigri in E••••iopia▪ are the causes of the fruitfulnesse of those countries: al at one time increasing and ouerflowing, by meanes of the exceed∣ing great raines, that for the space of fiue moneths do continually fall in the countrie of Congo, and the places borduring on the same. Touching the coast of Aden, the coast of Arabia Felix, and the country run∣ning along by the gulfe of Persia, vntil you come to Goa, it is sufficiently already de∣clared in this booke, whereunto I refer you.

The description of America, and the seuerall partes thereof,

as, Noua Francia, Florida, the Islandes called Antillas, Iucaya, Cuba, Iamaica, &c. with the situations, degrees, and length, how farre they are distant one from the other: likewise the fruitfulnes and ab••undance of beasts, birdes, fishes, and fruits of the same countreyes, with the manners fashions, apparrels, and religions, together with the principall actions of the people inhabiting therein.

When the authour of this booke, as also the Printer, had bestowed and vsed great labor and charges herein, to set forth some perfect Cardes of America, because that often times the Indian shippes in their sailing out, or returning home, do fall vpon those coasts, specially Brasilia, which herein is most disco∣uered, they thought it expedient therewith to place a briefe discription of the same countries, thereby to shew the readers the principall places therein, whereunto at this day most ships do traffike, hoping they wil take it in good part.

THe fourth parte of the world, which at this day we cal A∣merica, or west In∣dia, was because of the great distance vnknowne to the ancient Cosmogra∣phers til the yeare of our Lord 1492. that Christopherus Columbus a Geneuois dis∣couered the same, and fiue yeeres after that one Americus Vespacio, by the King of Castilliaes commandement, sailed thither, and called al the countrey America after his owne name, and for the greatnes ther∣of, is also called, the new world, reaching as Postillus is of opinion, from the one pole to the other, beeing diuided by the straigths of Magellana, where it endeth vnder 52. degrees on the south side of the Equinoctial line. This countrie by diuers men is diuersly parted, some making it a parte of the whole worlde, and cal it the fourth part by the name of America: o∣thers make out of that countrey in gene∣rall, two other parts of the world, diuiding the world in sixe parts, as Asia, Affrica, Europe, Mexicana, or the new Spaine, Peruana, and Magellanica, as the sixt part which as yet is but litle discouered: others diuide it into three parts, in Peru, newe Spain, others Mexico, & new France. They that first found it, accounted it but for one part, after that, the Spaniardes discoue∣ring more land, diuided it into two parts, into Mexico, (or new Spaine) and Peru: after that the Frenchmen discouering more countreyes, called that which they discouered Noua Frauncia, which in time beeing by the Spanniardes, woonne from the Frenchmen, was accounted for a péece of newe Spaine: at the last the straights of Magellana being founde out, was by Petrus Plantius, a minister of the worde of God, added as a sixt parte, but because our Card extendeth no further then to certaine limits of Noua Frauncia, name∣ly to the prouince or countrey of Florida, we wil not speake much of the rest, and pro∣ceede with the other partes, with certaine Ilandes in our Carde, called Antillas or foure landes, because they lie before the firme lande, defending and couering the same, as a henne with her wings couereth her chickens.

The land then which stretcheth towards

the pole Arcticum, or northward is called new Fraunce, for that in Anno 1524.* 1.2 Io∣hannes Verrazanus of Florence, being sent by the King and Queene mother of France into the new world, did almost discouer al that coast, beginning from Propicus Can∣cri, about 24. degrees, til he came to 50. de∣grees, and somewhat further into the north, where he erected the French standard, so that from thenceforth that countrey was called by the name of Noua Frauncia, and Villagagno Frauncia Antarctica. The breadth of this countrey is from 24. degrees to 54. degrees towardes the North. The length from 280. to 330. miles, whereof the East part by the writers in these dayes, is called Norumbega, reaching to the gulfe Gamus, where it is seperated from Canada. About this land, which is not lesse in com∣passe then Europa, or whole Christendome, lie diuers Islands, & among the rest Terra di Laborador, stretching towards Groen∣land, whether diuers ships, both Spani∣ards, French, and English, do often times resort, seeking some passage through the same to enter into the East Indies, but al in vaine, for the most part consuming and de∣stroying themselues therein, & found much ice and snow. The people of this Island are wel proportioned of bodie and limbes, wel made, and fitte to labour: they paint their bodyes, thereby to seeme faire, and weare siluer and Copper rings in their eares, their apparrel is speckled furres and marternes, and such like, in winter they weare the furs inward, and in summer outward, like the Lapelanders and Vinnen: they gird them∣selues with cottē girdles or with fish skins, and such like things: their cheefe foode is fish, specially Salmon, although they haue both birdes and fruit inough: their houses are made of w••od, whereof they haue great quantities, and couered with the skinnes of beastes or fishes. In this land are griffons, white beares, and birdes. There is a countrey vnder 44. degrees and a halfe, cal∣led Baccalao, taking the name of some kind of fishes, which thereabouts are so aboun∣dant, that they let the shippes from sailing. This countrey of Baccalaos reacheth nine hundred miles, that is, from the Cape de Baccala•••• to F••orida, which is accounted in this sort, from the point of Baccalao to the bay of the riuer, are 70. miles, frō the bay of the Riuer, to the bay de los Islos, 70. miles, from thence to Rio Fundo 70. miles, from thence to Cabo Baxo 160. miles, and again to the riuer of Saint Anthony. 100. miles, from thence to the furthest Cape 180. miles, and againe to the Cape of saint Elena, 110. miles, and from Saint Elena to the poynt of Canauerall, or the Reedlyooke 100. miles, then to Florida 40. miles, which is in all nine hundred miles, which is the greatnes of this land, whereof the least latitude from the Equinoctial line is 48. degrees and a halfe: this country both on the sea coast and otherwise, is verie populous, and like the low countries, because it lyeth in a corner. This Land hath many Islandes lying a∣bout it, as Curia, Regia, Baya Bica Stella, the Cape of Hope, and the Brittons Cape. Before you come to Florida, the prouince Cichora, lyeth by the Riuer Iordan, and another hard by it, called Guada Lupa. The west side of Noua Frauncia hath diuers pro∣uinces now discouered, as Quiui a, ••euola, Astaclan, Tethchichimichi. The south side of Florida is called by the Spaniards Flo∣ridum Pascha, because Iohannes Pontio Legionensi founde it out on Easter day, in Anno 1512. and not because of the green∣nesse and budding of the trees in the same land, as Theue•• writeth. The north side of noua Frauncia is as yet not discouered, and because our Carde discouereth no further then to Florida, we wil begin therwith, and describe some part of the situation thereof, because it is worthie memorie, as beeing a place wherein many Spaniards & French∣men haue lost their liues, as also because it is the first, & best knowne of al new France, whereunto the Frenchmen haue vsed to saile, and therein in the time of Charles the ninth, had a certaine fort, which was called by his name, Charles burg••, but was after taken by the Spaniards, and al the French∣men slaine, contrary to their fayth and pro∣mise, specially such as yeelded themselues into their hands. But because my meaning is not to recite histories, I remit the reader to the bookes which make mention thereof. Florida hath a Cape lying far into the sea stretching Southward, in maner of a tong reaching an hundred miles, the measure be¦ing taken from the lowest northerne cor∣ner, to the south poynt. This Cape or hooke as I sayde, is long and narrow, like Italy: in length an hundred miles, and in breadth twentie or fiftie miles, where it is broadest. On the East side it hath the Islands of C••∣ehora Banama, and Lucaya, on the west side towardes Spaine and the gulfe of Mexico, it is diuided from new Spaine, by the land of Anauaca. On the north side it bordureth on the firme land, it lieth right against the point towards the south: 25. miles into the sea, lieth the famous Island Cuba, other∣wise called Isabell••: the sea that runneth between this poynt of Florida and Iuc••tan,

is called Mare Catayum, by other, the gulfe of Ferdinando Cortosi, or the gulfe of Flori∣da, or of Mexico. It is a flat lande, wherein are many riuers, which moysture the land, and make it fertile, the sea side being sandie, whereon there groweth diuers pine trees, without nuts or shels, also many acornes, wild cherries, mulberies, chesnuts, but ran∣ker of taste then oures in these countreyes, many Mastike, Cedars, Cipres, Bayes, & Palme trees, Nuls, and wild vines, which grow vppon the trees that are next them, bringing forth grapes that are good to be ea∣ten, also a certain fruit of Medlars, greater and better then ours, there are also plums verie faire to behold, but not good of taste: there are also Framboisen or Hinnebesien, and some verie small round berries, of a pleasant taste, not much vnlike our Clappe beries: there groweth rootes which in their speech they cal Hatle, whereof in time of dearth they make bread. Fourefooted beasts are there likewise in great aboundance, as Harts, Hinds, rain Deare, Goats, Beares, Leopards, Fores, & many kind of Wolues, wild Dogs, Hares, Conies &c. Their birds are Peacocks, Partriges, Parrats, Pige∣ons, ring Doues, Turtledoues, Meerelens, Crowes, Hauks, Falcōs, Marlens, hearns, Cranes, Storkes, wild Geese, Ducks, wa∣ter Rauens, white, red, & blacke, and ash co∣loured, Reighures and many other water foules, & Crocadiles in so great aboundance, that it is incredible, which oftē times do eat and deuoure men swimming in the water: there are likewise many kindes of snakes, and a certain kind of beast not much vnlike the lion in Affrica.

Golde and siluer wherewith they traf∣fike, they haue it (as they say) out of the ships which fal on ground vpon the Cape, which is not vnlikely, because most of the ships are cast away vpon that Cape so that there is more money thereabout, then in the north parts. They said likewise that in the hils Apalatcyaeris, there is gold to bee found: in this countrie also groweth the roote China, which by meanes of the Em∣perour Charles, hath gotten a great report, and is much vsed by phisitions, which some also vse to heale the French pocks. Besides al these things aforesaid, there are diuers sortes of seedes and hearbes, whereof many kindes of collours are made, very profitable for painters: the inhabitants knowe well how to vse them, therewith to die al kindes of leather. The people are in a manner a black yellow, and euil fauoured, yet strong, of good proportion of bodie. They couer their members with verie faire drest hart skins: most part of them paint their bodies, and also their armes and thighes, with many figures, which colour wil not off, vnlesse it bee washed, it is so printed and sunke into the flesh: they haue black haire downe to theyr hippes, being long, which they verie cunningly bind vp: in their dea∣lings they are wholly light, and not to bee credited, but verie bolde and valiant in armes, and in the warres, wherein they vse bowes and arrowes, whereof the shafts are made of hartes, goates, or skinnes fine∣ly painted, and so cunningly wrought, that in these countries they cannot be mended, and in steede of heades, they take fishes teeth, or sharp peeces of wood: they exercise their boyes in leaping, shooting in bowes, and playing with balles: they haue great delight in hunting and fishing: their kings holde continuall warres, not sparing any of theyr enemies, if they ouercome them, but presently cutte off theyr heades to bee no more troubled with them: which comming home, they set vp in certaine pla∣ces for a triumph and victory. Women and children they will not hurt, but keepe and nourish them among them: and returning from theyr warres, they call all theyr sub∣iects together, where for the space of three dayes, they doo nothing but banket and make good cheere, with singing and daun∣cing.

To the olde women that are among them, they giue the skinne and the haire of the heades of their enemies that are cutte off, compelling them to daunce, and sing songs in prayse and thanksgiuing to the Sunne, as hauing by his meanes obtained victorie. They haue no Religion, nor a∣ny knowledge of the true and liuing God, but in steede of him, (as other Americans) they honour the Sunne and the Moone. They feare theyr Priestes, and put great credite in them, because they are great coniurers, southsayers, and inuocaters of Diuelles, which by most feareful meanes they cause to appeare.

Their priestes are likewise theyr phisiti∣ons and surgeons, for the which cause they vse continually to beare a sacke full of hearbes and salues to heale theyr sicke people with, for the most parte haue the pocks, as beeing verie hot of nature, and much addicted to lecherie, whereby often times they vse women, maydes, children and Boyes. Euerie man hath but one wife, onely the king, to whome it is permitted to haue twoo or three, but with this condition, that the first hee marrieth shall bee honoured before

the rest, and onely holden for Quéene, and her children to inherite his goods, and to be heires of the crowne. The women doo al the worke about their houses, and when they are once with child, their husbands ne∣uer deale with them vntill they be deliue∣red, and eate no meate of their dressing, at such time as they haue their flowers. Be∣sides this, al the countrey is ful of Flermo∣phroditers, which of nature are both man and woman, those are kept to labour, and to carrie their munition and weapons when they go to warres: they paint their faces, and put certaine birds feathers into their haires, thereby to seeme the fairer and more fearful. Their prouision of virtuals is bread and Meele of wheate and hony: they rost their Meele of Maiz, because it may conti∣nue the longer, & cause some broiled fish dri∣ed to be carried with thē. In time of dearth they eate many bad things, putting sande and coales among their meale. When they go to warres the king goeth first, hauing in one hand a staffe, in the other a bow, with arrowes in a case hanging on his shoulder: the rest follow him with bowes and ar∣rowes, either in cases or else stucke in their haire: at their meeting with the enemie, and also in fight, they vse great and fearefull cries, like other Barbarians, Turkes, and Tartarians. They neuer beginne war be∣fore they haue taken counsell together, mee∣ting about it in the morning: in which their assemblies they vse a very strange custome, which is to be noted, for that being assem∣bled, they lette themselues downe on both sides of the king, in maner of a half Moone, the king sitting alone in the middle of them vppon a stoore made of nine peeces of round wood, higher then the rest, that hee may bee knowne, which done, they come and do him honour, saluting him, the oldest beginning first, and lifting their handes aboue theyr heades, speake and say, Ha, He. Ya, Ha, Ha: the rest answering Ha. Ha which done, each man sitteth downe. And if there be any mat∣ter of great importance to bee handled, the king causeth the priests (by them called la∣uas and the auncients to be sent for, asking their aduice, meane time he causeth certain women to seethe Cacinam, which is a cer∣tain drink prest out of leaues, which being sodden and clarified, the king being set with his Lords & others, each man in his place, there commeth one in presence of them all, and lifting vp his hands, and blessing, and wishing them al good lucke, filleth a cuppe of mother of pearle, ful of that hot drinke, which he first presenteth to the king, which hauing drunke, he willeth him giue it to the rest. This drinke they make great a••c••at of, and giue it not to any man that sitteth in councell, before he hath shewed some va∣liant act in the fielde against the enemie: which drinke is of such force, that presently after they haue drunke it, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 maketh them sweate, and such as drinke it 〈◊〉〈◊〉 it vp againe, are not imployed in an great af∣faires, nor may not serue as Captaine or o∣ther officer in the fielde, as being vnfit for such a place, for that when they are in the field they must of force often times fast two or three dayes together, to the which ende this drinke is verie good, for that whosoeuer drinketh it, may wel fast foure and twentie houres after, and neither eate nor drinke: wherefore when they go to warre, they cause the Hern o•• hrediter to carry diuers bottles of that drinke with them, which su∣staineth, feedeth, and strengthneth the bo∣dy, not once making their heades••le nor light. They sow their wheate twice euerie yeare, that is, in the moneths of March and Iune, & all vpon our land, in three moneths being ripe and readie to reape. The other sixe moneths they let the earth he vntitled: they haue very great Pumptans, melons, & very good beanes: they neuer dung their ground, but burne off the Stubble, which in the sixe monethes consumeth, and with those ashes fatten the ground, as they do us some places of Italy, they plow and dig vp their ground with a woodden spit or shouel, and throw two or three graines of wheate into one hole, as wee vse to set beanes or pease: when their corne is to be sowed, the king sendeth one of his seruants to assem∣ble the people, that they may plow and dig the earth, and then causeth much of the a∣foresaide drinke to be made, to giue it to the labourers. The wheate being reaped, they carrie it into a common barne, or place made for the purpose, whereof euerie man according to his desert hath a parte. They sow no more then necessarily wil serue, kee∣ping the rest to serue thē for the six months wherein they sow not, and for longer time they prouide not: also euerie yeare in win∣ter time they withdraw themselues into the woods for three or foure moneths toge∣ther, continuing there in certaine places made of Palme tree branches, meane time feeding vpon Acornes, flesh of Darts, fish, and oysters, peacocks, and other foules. All their meate is broyled vpon coales, ma∣king it somewhat hard, by reason of the smoke and extreame heate: among other meate, they are verie desirous of Croco∣diles flesh, which sheweth very white and faire like veale, but tasteth like rotten Mos∣chus:

if any man be sicke, in stéed of letting bloud, their priests do suck the place where their paine lyeth, vntil the bloud doth issue forth.

The women in Florida are great and ve∣rie wise, and coloured like men, and pinked on their bodies, legges, and armes, putting such colour into the places, that will not ea∣sily come forth: but the women kind when they come first into the world, are not so blacke, but verie white: the blacke yellow∣ish colour is made vpon them by a certaine oyntment, as the Tartarians and other heathens vse to do, which oyntment they vse to make of a certaine ceremoniall oyle by them vsed. Their colour likewise chan∣geth because they go naked, and with the burning heate of the sunne. The women likewise are verie quicke and subtile, like the women of Egypt, and can swim ouer great riuers, holding their children fast vn∣der one of their armes, and will likewise climbe vppe the highest trees that are in all those countries.

The chiefe prouinces in Florida, which the Spaniards, both in the beginning, and since at other times haue founde out, are these: first Panuca, lying on the borders of Noua Spaigna, discouered by Franco de Gray, in An. 1518.* 1.3 who left many spaniards bohind him, being slaine, eaten and deuou∣red by the wild people, whose skinnes being dryed, they hung for a memorie and euerla∣sting triumph in their Iools Temples. Those people are verie vnchaste, and helde open stewes, where by night they meete and lie together. They bore holes in their noses, and also in their eares, to hang rings at thē: they scrape their teeth to make them cleane, and marrie not before they be fortie yeares of age, although their daughters are deflow∣red at the age of ten or twelue yeeres. There are in Florida other prouinces, as Anauares, Albardaosia, Iaguasia, Apalachia, Autia, Sa∣mouia, and diuers others, al obseruing one kinde of religion & customes, wholly with∣out any feare of God, pollicie, manlinesse, or reason. The best and fruitfullest part of Flo∣rida bordereth on Noua Spaigna, to the ri∣uer and prouince of Panuca, which riuer runneth with so great a streame into the sea, that it is a verie good hauen for ships.

Here followeth the description of the coast of Florida, forasmuch as is contained in the Carde hereunto annexed.

THe length of the furthest poynt of Terra di Laborador, vnto the Cape of Saint Elena, lying in Florida, is before declared, nowe shall follow that which is furder sette downe in the Carde, beginning from Saint Elena, which lyeth vnder 32. degrees: This is a verie faire and broade riuer, surpassing al others whatsoeuer in the north coastes: wherefore by the Frenchmen it is called Porto Real or kingly hauen, hauing found it to be tenne seadom water: about this ri∣uer there are many woods of Dakes and Ceder trées, wherein are many Harts and other wilde beastes, and Peacocks. The mouth of the riuer is three miles broade, and hath two Capes or hookes of land, one stretching West, the other North: vppon this riuer the Frenchmen haue built a fort, called Charles fort: some say this riuer run∣neth vnto the riuer Iordan, and so into the other sea. Betwéene both these hookes of lande, in the mouth of the Riuer, there lieth a fayre Island full of trees: from Saint E∣lena to Rio Secco, is fortie Spanish miles, whereof seuentéene and a halfe make a de∣gree, and this Riuer lieth vnder 31. degrees: from Rio Secco to Santa Cioce, and from thence to the point of Cannaueral, which ly∣eth vnder 20. degrées, are forty miles. Here I must pause a while, & follow the French∣mens rule, because this countrey was like∣wise discouered and also described by them. So then the Frenchmen recon from Saint Elena, sayling southward along the coast foure French miles, where you come to the Riuer Magnus, or Grandis that is the great Riuer: then Guade or as it is in our Carde Guate, and further Bellum or Bellus, from thence to Gironda, then to Garumna, and so to Charenta, from Charenta, to Ligetim, or the Loire, sixe miles, from Loire to Axona in the mouth whereof lyeth an Island, in our Carde called Rio di S. Pero, from Axo∣na to Sequana or Seine, because it was like the riuer that runneth throgh Paris vnto Roan, lieth sixe miles, and all these nine ri∣uers lie within the space of sixtie French miles, leauing the Seine, and sailing south∣ward by the shore, you passe certaine small Riuers, as Ay & Serrauahi, then you come to the great Riuer Maius (so called by the Frenchmen) that is the Riuer of May, be∣cause it was found by one Landometo vp∣on the first day of May, and is distant from Sequana or Seine 14. miles: thereabout grew certaine redde and white mulberie trées, vppon the highest branches whereof, hung great numbers of silke wormes: from this riuer you come to a gulfe that reacheth somewhat inward into the land, beeing the place where Landonerius first arriued, when hee sayled out of France into those countreyes, and there hee saw in the mouth

of a certaine riuer, many sea Swine or Dol∣phins, wherevpon he called the same Riuer by the name of those Dolphins: on the South side of the gulfe lyeth the French Cape, about thirtie degrees from the line, so called because the Frenchmen did first land there. This Cape is not high, but a flatte strand, al ful of high trees and thick woods. From the French Cape you come to Can∣naueral, another Cape, fiue & thirtie miles distant, taking the name form the reeds that grow thereon. The Spaniards and also our Carde doo not set downe many of these Riuers, and the greatest parte of them that are described, are altered in their names, for the Riuer of May by them is called Maran∣ca, the Seine Saint Augustin, the Ga••••mna S. Matheo, & the great riuer S. Pero. From Cannauer••l to the cape of Florida are fortie miles, and betweene these two Capes lie many flats. The cape of Florida lyeth vnder fiue and twentie degrees, and before it lie many cliffes, which they name Martires or Ma••ti••s, and on the other sides litle Islands, called Testudines, that is Torteaux, be∣cause they are in forme like those kindes of beasts. The Cape of Florida is in breadth twentie miles, and from thence to Ancon B••xo are 100. miles, and lieth fifty miles east and west from Rio Secco, which is the breadth of Florida.

The description of some Islands that lie o∣uer against the coast of Florida.

FIrst you most note that the whole coast of Florida is ful of Islands, cliffes, banks, flattes, and such like dangerous places, and as touching the Islandes, they are at the least foure hundreth in number, be∣sides the great Island called Luca••ae, that giueth the name to al the rest, and Baha∣ma, which lie al north from C••ba, and saint Do••inic••. The common opinion is, that these Islandes were all one land, and ioy∣ned to the great Island, and by the force of the sea seperated one from the other, as it is thought of I••aly and Cici••ia. They lie vnder seuenteene and eighteene degrees: the peo∣ple of those Islands are whiter, and better proportioned then those of Cuba, and Spai∣gnuola specially the women that are verie faire, for the which cause many of the firme land went thither to dwel, as from Florida, Cachora, and Iucatan, because there they founde more pleasure among the people, then in other Islands, and great difference in their speech, whereupon hath risen the common opinion, that in those Islands the Amazons did dwell (beeing women that burnt their right breasts, the better to shoote in bowes, when they went to fight against their enemies) and that there was a foun∣taine that made olde women yong. The men go naked, onely when they go to wars, and when they keepe any feastes, or vse to dance, then they put on a certaine cotten garment, and other garments of diuers coloured feathers, finely wrought, with a great plume of feathers on their heades. Touching the women, they haue verie strange customes, for the married women, or such as haue had the company of a man: they couer their priuie members from the Nauel downe to the knees, with certaine mantils of cotten, made in manner of nets, wherein they sticke certaine leaues, other∣wise they go naked, vntil such time as they first perceiue their flowers, and then they inuite al their friendes, and make a great feast or banket, as if they were married, with great signes of ioy, and then they be∣ginne to hang that kinde of mantle before them, wearing the same as long as they are vnmarried. They are in great subiection to their maisters, in such maner, as that if they should command them to throw them∣selues headlong from off a hil, or to do any o∣ther thing whatsoeuer, they wil not refuse to do it, what danger soeuer consisteth therin, not once asking wherefore they should doo it, but only, because the master commandeth it. Here also you must note wherein their kings gouernment consisteth, which rea∣cheth no further then only concerning sow∣ing or planting the ground, hunting, & fi∣shing, for that whatsoeuer is sowed or plan∣ted, hunted, or fished in any respect, is onelie in the kings power, and done by his com∣mandement, which diuideth those kindes of labours among the people, directing euerie man what he should do. The fruit that is reaped and gathered, is brought all into a place appointed, and from thence it is yeare∣ly deliuered vnto euerie man according as his houshold and necessarie vse requireth, so that their Lords are nothing else but kings of Bees, stuards, & distributers of the com∣mon goods of the countrey: thinke then (I beseech you,) what a golden time those peo∣ple had, where neither this is mine, or this is thine, was euer heard among them. The only wel spring of strife & contentiō. Those in the east parts vsing nothing els but play∣ing at the ball, fishing, and hunting, where neither law nor processe was vsed nor deci∣ded, where onely the kings will was a lawe, and in all things were content to obey it. They found certaine red stones in

shels of fishes much esteemed and accoun∣ted of among thē, which they weare at their cares, and others more esteemed, of which they took out of snakes Hersenen or snailes, (whereof the flesh is very good to eate) of a fire red colour, cleare, and so like rubies, that they could hardly be discerned from them, whereof the Snakes in their speech are cal∣led Coho••o, and the stones Cohibici. They gather likewise in the sande vppon the sea side, certaine cleare shining stones, yellow, blacke, and other colours, whereof they make necklaces and such like Iewels, to weare about their necks, armes, and legs: in many places of those Islands they haue no flesh, nor eate it not, their meate is fish, breda of wheate, rootes, and some fruites. The people of these Islands being carried to saint Dominico or Cuba, died there with eating flesh, it beeing giuen them by the Spaniards. In some of those Islands there are so many pigeons & other birues, which build their nestes in the Trees, that many out of the firme land, and also from the o∣ther Islands, come thither and load whole scutes ful, and take them with them: the trees wherein they breed are like Youngar∣net trees, the barke hauing a certaine taste like Cinamon, and somwhat better, and hot like ginger, smelling like cloues, yet are they not accounted for spices: among other fruites they haue a certaine kind by them called Ia••••ma, both sauorie and holsome, a∣bout a span and a halfe long, like a fig when it is greene: the leafe likewise not much dif∣fering from the fig leafe, and of the bignesse of a willow tree: not close like other trees, nor hollow like reedes, but fast like Elders, the leaues beeing excellent good to heale wounds, as the Spaniards haue wel tryed. To speake more hereof is needelesse: those Islandes of Lucaya are more desolate and not inhabited, for because they haue no gold. The Spaniards carried many thou∣sandes of them into other places, and in see∣king for Golde spoyled and destroyed them.

Hereafter followeth other Islands lying a∣bout that coast, and first Cuba, being one of the principal Islands vn∣der the Antillas.

CVba another verie great Islande, ac∣counted among the Antillas, was by Columbus first foundout, and discouered in An. 1492.* 1.4 which he called Fernandinam and I••hannam, as also Alpha and Omega, as Peter Martin saith, and by others the Island is called saint Iacob, after the name of the cheefest towne therein, which by reason of the great hauen as also the situati∣on therof, hath a verie great traffike, as ha∣uing on the East side the Islande of Saint Domingo, on the West Iucatan, on the North the great Cape of Florida, and on the South the Island Iamaica, all set downe in this Carde. It is in forme like vnto a willow leafe, because it is longer thē broad, being in length from east to west three hun∣dred miles, and from north to south seuenty miles, in breadth in some places but fifteene and in some nineteene miles. The middle of the Island lieth in longitude 19. degrees, and in latitude or height twentie degrees. It was long time accounted for firme land, because of the greatnesse, which is no mar∣uaile, for the inhabitants themselues knew no other, but that it had no ende (and also long after the Spaniards comming thither) because the people are poore and naked, contented with a little, and with their own, not seeking any further, neither caring what their neighbours did, and therefore knew not if there were any other lande vn∣der the heauens, then that wherein they dwelt. The ground is high, rough, and sharpe of hils, the sea in many places being white, and the riuers small, and good wa∣ter, rich of golde and good copper, the aire temperate, yet somewhat colde: therein is found much Mather, seruing to die wooll, cloath, and leather: it is also ful of thicke woods, fishponds, and faire Riuers of fresh water, also of ponds that naturally are salt water: In the woods are many hogges and oxen, the riuers do oftentimes cast foorth gold: in this Island are sixe townes inhabi∣ted by Spaniards, whereof the first & prin∣cipal is Saint Iacobs, the residence and sea of the Bishop, but Hauana is the cheefe towne of marchandize, and where all their Shippes are made. Twoo principal and notable things are by Gonsalo Onetano written of this Island, the first, that there∣in is a valley situate betweene two hils, in length about two or three Spanish miles, wherein nature of it selfe bringeth foorth certaine round balles, such as by art can∣not possibly bee made rounder, and in so great aboundance, that they may ballist or loade whole Shippes therewith, and are vsed in the shippes in steede of Iron or Leaden bulltes. The other is a certaine hil not farre from the sea, from whence there floweth pitch in great aboundance, and runneth unto the sea, where it driueth vppon the shore from place to place, as the winde and weather serueth. This pitch

is vsed by the inhabitants and Spaniards, to pitch their shippes. The people of the Is∣land are like those of Hispaniola, onely dif∣fering in speech: both men and women go naked, and kéepe their bridalles in verie strange manner: for that he which is mar∣ried lieth not the first night with his wife, be if it be a Lord, he biddeth all the Lordes, and one of them doth it for him, and if it be a Marchant, then Marchants take the paines to helpe him, but if it be a countrey∣man, either one of the Lordes or the priest doth ease him of a labour. They leaue their wiues for verie smal occasions, but the wo∣men may not forsake their husbands for a∣ny cause whatsoeuer. The men are very vn∣chaste, and wicked liuers: there are great wormes and snakes in the Island, and not venimous, but easie to be taken, the flesh whereof they eate, and are neuer hurt ther∣with, which snakes do liue by eating cer∣taine beastes, called Guabiniquinazes, whereof many times there are seauen or eight found within their mawes: they are in greatnesse like Hares, in form like fores, onely that their feete are like Conies feete: the head like a Wesell, a Fores taile, long haire like a Badger, of colour somwhat red, the flesh sauorie and holsome. This Islande was verie populous, but nowe hath verie few, onely certain Spaniards, the rest bee∣ing almost cleane rooted out, and dead for want of meate.

Iamaica.

RIght against Cuba lyeth another Is∣land, which stil holdeth the name, it al∣waies had, and is called Iamaica and of the Spaniards saint Iacob, it lieth betwéene se∣uentéene and eightéene degrées, on this side the Equinoctiall line, on the East side it hath Saint Dominico, about fiue and twentie miles distant, on the West side the Cape or corner of Iucatana, on the north Cubam, also fiue and twentie miles distant and some∣what more, and on the South another smal Island, called Lacerana, of fiue and twentie miles distant as the rest. This Is∣lande was discouered by Christopherus Columbus, in his seconde nauigation into those countreyes, and was taken by his son Don Diego, gouerning the Island Saint Dominico, by one Iohan de Squibel, a cap∣taine.

The breadth of the Islande surpasseth the length, for it is from East to West a∣bout fiftie miles, and from north to south twentie miles, it is most inhabited by Spa∣niards, the inhabitants also being burnt and destroyed by them, like those of Lucaya. The middle of the Island hath the longi∣tude of 191. degrees, and latitude or height eighteene degrees, and is distant from the line seuenteene degrees, on the north side. It hath a hill that raiseth it on al sides, in∣ward to the middle of the land, and so pro∣portionably and euen, that it can hardly bee descerned: it is verie fruitfull both on the sea side, and within the land, and in times past verie populous, such as were very wit∣tie and subtile, more then other of the Is∣landers thereabouts, both in wars and o∣ther labours. There is likewise gold, and verie fine cotten wooll, and at this present it is ful of beasts brought thither by the Spa∣niards, and there haue increased. The swines flesh is better in that Island, then in any other place. The cheefe towne in this Island is called Hispalis of Siuilia, because of the abby which therein is erected, the first abbot being Peter Marti•• borne in Milan, an excellent learned man, and hee that wrote most concerning this Hystorie.

Hispaniola or Haiti.

THe seconde great Islande accounted a∣mong the Antillas, was by the first inha∣bitants called Quisqueia, or Quisquesia, and after that Haiti, and then Cipanga: Haiti is as much to say, as roughnesse or sharp∣nesse, and Quisqueia great land, Christo∣pherus Columbus called it Hispaniola, and now it is called Saint Dominico, after the cheefe Towne in the same Island: it was discouered in Anno 1493.* 1.5 on the east side thereof lyeth the Island of Saint Iohn, and many others, on the West Cuba and Iama∣ica▪ on the north the Island of the Canibals, and on the south the firme land, which is the Cape of Vela by Venezuela, or little Venice. The cōpasse of this Island is 350. miles, Benzo saith 400. French miles, which is in a manner al one, and it is broa∣der then long, for in length it is from East to west 150. miles, and from north to south 40. miles, the middle of the Island lyeth in the longitude of 300. degrees, in latitude 19: in it there are verie many and great ha∣uens, as Hatibanico, Iuua, Ozoma, Neyua Nizao, Nigua, Hayna, and Iaques, which do, al runne into the sea. There are others that are smaller, as Macorix, Ciba••, & Co∣tui, wherof Macorix is verie ful of fish, the o∣ther two abounding in gold. In this Island are two very strange lakes, the one because of the goodnes and profitablenes therof, the

other, by reason of the strangenesse, the one comming out of the hilles, from whence the Riuer Puizao hath her issue: it profi∣teth no man, onely it giueth a feare, and a little sinder sulkes.

The other of Xaragua is salt, although many sweete riuers runne into it, and hath many fishes, among the which are verie great Tortuxes and Tiburones or Hayen: it is hard by the sea, and is eleuen miles in compasse: the riuer sides and shores were much inhabted, except the Saline a verie faire hauen, and the Riuer Iaques, where there is a great salt hil: There groweth in this Island great store of very fine blew co∣lour, and much brasill wood, cotten wooll, (but they know not how to make any thing of it) amber, rich mines of gold, and is also fished out of lakes and riuers, and like∣wise siluer and other mettals, great abun∣dance of sugar: it is verie fruitful ground, Reddish, Lettice, and Coleworts beeing sowed therein, are within sixteene dayes after ripe, and to bee eaten: Melons, Cu∣cumbers, and Gourdes, within sixe and thirtie dayes are also ripe and verie sauory, aboue al others whatsoeuer. The forme of the Island is like a chesnut tree leafe, in the middle of the Island there passeth a stony or rough hil, in forme of a mans backe, which is called Cibam or Cipangi, where in times past much gold was founde: out of this hil runneth foure great riuers, diuiding the Is∣land into foure partes, wherof the one is in the East, and is called Iunna: the second in the west, called Attibunicus, the third in the north, called Iachem, and the fourth in the South, called Naxban, whereabouts there is much brasile wood, and woods of di∣uers spices, but not like our spices, which they barter for other wares, specially for stooles and dishes of blacke ebanny. Vppon the hil of Cibano, lyeth the Castle of Saint Thomas. There are likewise many townes within this Islande, the principall called Saint Dominico, made by Bartholomeo, Columbo▪ and by him so named, because they arriued in that Island vpon saint Do∣minicks day: it lyeth on a plaine ground, vpon the sea side, and hath aboue fiue hun∣dred houses, built after the spanish maner, on the West side therof runneth the riuer Ozama, or Ozonca, into the sea, where there is a good hauen, in the which manie shippes may anker: about this Riuer ly∣eth verie great and thicke woodes: the greatest traffike next their golde is sugar, and hides, for that al sorts of foure footed beasts being brought thither out of Spaine, haue so much increased therein, that there are some spaniards in the Isle, that haue sixe thousand or eight thousand beastes.

Isabella and another towne lying on the other side of the same Islande in a valley, concerning the situation, the people, their Religion and customes, you may sufficient∣ly reade in the spanish Histories thereof set forth, yet will I note some that are verie strange: in this Island are certain wormes verie common among them, and by the in∣habitants called Cuuero, in greatnesse as bigge as a ioynt of a mans finger, with foure wings, two verie little, the other two somewhat greater, and harder, and are as couers to the smaller, these wormes shine by night as the sloe wormes here with vs, which light doth not onely appeare like a starre, casting forth streames and shining out of their eies, but also in the whole body, so that when they flie and spreade their wings, they giue much more light out of their bodyes, then when they sitte still: in which wormes men may well beholde the great workes and blessings of God, by his strange gifts bestowed vpon his creatures: for by the light of this little worme, the dar∣kest chamber that is in the night time, may be made cleare and bright, whereby a man may reade, write, or do any thing, not née∣ding any other light: and likewise if a man beare that worme in his hand, he shall haue as great a light as if he bore a torch or lan∣terne, and many light others therewith, and the more wormes there are, the greater will be the light.

Not farre from Hyspaniola lyeth an∣other small Islande, called Mona, be∣tweene Hispaniola and Boriquena, or Saint Iohns vnder seuenteene degrées on the North side of the line. This Islande is small and flatte, and euen lande, in big∣nesse about three miles, and inhabited by a fewe Indians, and Christians, it hath verie good water, and is ful of fish, specially of verie good creuishes.

Boriquen.

FRom this Island you come vnto Bori∣quen, now named S. Iohn a rich hauen: on the East side it hath the Island of Sancta Croce, on the West other small Islandes, Northwarde the Islande of Saint Domi∣nico, which is fiue and twentie miles distant, and on the South, the Cape of Paria, distant aboue three hundreth thir∣tie and sixe miles. The length of this Is∣lande is more then the breadth, for from East to West it is fiftie miles, from north to South eighteene miles, and

is diuided into twoo partes, that is, the North and the South quarter: the middle of the Island lyeth vnder 303. degrees lon∣gitude, and 18. degrees latitude: in forme almost square, populous and wel hou∣sed, hauing many good hauens and woods. The inhabitants haue continual warres a∣gainst the Canibals, or such as eate mens flesh. This Island was rich of gold on the north side, and towardes the south, fruitfull of bread, fruit, grasse, and fish: it is said these people vsed not to eate any flesh, which is to be vnderstood of wilde flesh, but they eate many birdes, as Pigeons, and such like: in other things they are like those of Hispani∣ola, onely that they are better souldiers, and vse bowes and arrowes: in this Islande there is a certaine gumme, by them called Ta••unuo, vnholsome and fatty like tallow, wherewith and with oyle they dresse their shippes, and because it is bitter, it preserueth the ships from wormes. There is likewise much por wood, which is vsed to heale the pore and other diseases. This Is∣land was discouered by Chrostopherus Co••umbu••, in his second voyage into India: There is a verie strange and notable Histo∣rie written of the inhabitants hereof, which is, that at the first arriual of the Spaniards in that Island, they thought the Spaniards to be immortal and neuer died, whereof to be assured, vppon a time, one of their Cari∣quen or Lords, called Vraioa de Yaguara, caused one of the Spaniards to be taken, and to prooue if he were immortal, caused him to be put into a Riuer vnder the water, and there holden, to see if hee would come foorth aliue, but being dead, and brought before the king, he was thereby assured of their mortalitie, whereupon he rose against them, and slew 150. of them, that were bu∣sie in seeking of gold.

Saint Crus, Hay, Hay

FRom Borequien you come to the Island S. C••us, in time past by the inhabitants called Hay, Hay, being inhabited by Cani∣bals, or eaters of men, as also the next vnto it, called Guadalupea, by them called Qui••∣ra, or Quera, which Caribes or Canibales had in short time deuoured at the least 5000. men, which they stole and tooke out of the Islandes rounde about them: from thence you come to diuers other Islandes, which lie like an Archipelago, hauing the same name, but many of them are likewise called after the forme or fashion that they beare, as Anguilla, which is an eele, as be∣ing long and smal▪ Redonda Maria because it is like a spheare, & verie round Mon••∣ratu••, that is, a closed hil, because the Island hath high hils round about it, ful of people and victuals, some of saints, as S. Mi〈…〉〈…〉, S. Bartholmew, S. Barbara, Beata ••i••g•• Antigua, till you come to the olde Virgin Maryes, which lie together in a rowe, verie pleasant to beholde, some greene, others red▪ blew, yellow, and violet, most wonderful to such as saile by them, wherof many colours are made.

Guadalupea.

BY Antigua lieth Guadal••pe••▪ the cheefe and greatest Islande of Canibals foure degrees distant from the Equinoctiall line▪ it is round aboue 130. miles, and diuided by two streames, like Engl••n•• and 〈…〉〈…〉 so that it seemeth almost to be two Islands it hath many goodly hauens the na•••• 〈◊〉〈◊〉; giuen it of our Lady of Guadalupe it is ••ul of villages, each of twentie or thirtie hou∣ses, all wood, and rounde, made of certaine great okes which they thrust into the earth, and those serue for the doores of their houses, then they place smaller, which hold the rest from falling. Their branches on the toppe being bound together like tents, which they couer with Palme tree leaues, to keep them from the raine, within they fasten ropes made of cotten wool, or of B••esen▪ wherupon they lay cotten mattresses, and hanging beddes therein to sleepe. This Island hath seuen faire riuers, the inhabitants were cal∣led Ca••uc••erum, it hath verie great Par∣rots, much differing from others, being red both before and behind, with long feathers the wings speckled with red, some yellow, some blew, al mixed together whereof there are as great abundance, as of Spree〈…〉〈…〉er in our countryes: there groweth in this Island a certaine gumme called A〈…〉〈…〉m: not much vnlike Amber: the smoke or aire of this gumme being let vp into the head, driueth out the colde: the tree bringeth foorth a fruit like dates, but of a spanne and a halfe long, which beeing opened, hath a certaine white and sweete meale. This fruit they keepe for winter, as we do chesnuts, the trees are like figge trees: they haue likewise in this Is∣land al kind of orchard fruit, and some are of opinion that al kindes of sweete fruites were first brought out of this Islande into the other Islandes round about it, for they are hunters of men, which hauing taken, they eate them, and for the same cause they trauaile abroade many hundreth miles, both farre and neare, and in their trauell whatsoeuer they finde, they bring it home and plant it. They are not friendly, but

fierce and cruell. They indure no strangers among them, both the men and the women are verie subtile, and expert in shooting with their bowes, and their arrowes being poy∣soned: when the men are gone abroad, the women keepe their places and countreyes, most stoutly defending them from al inua∣sion: to conclude, al parts of that Islande both hils and dales, are verie fruitfull, and in the hollow trees and clifts of hilles, and rocks, they find home.

Desiada, or Desiderata••

ABout eighteene miles from Guadalupa towards the East, lieth Desiada, another Island, being twentie miles great. Desiada▪ or Desiderata, that is desire, so called by rea∣son of the fairenesse of the Island: ten miles from Guadalupa towards the south, lyeth Galanta, being in compasse aboue thirtie miles, it is an euen and faire country, wher∣of the Island hath taken the name, for Ga∣lanta in Spanish betokeneth faire. Therein are diuers sweete smelling trees, both in barks, rootes, & leaues. There are likewise many great Horsleaches. Nine miles from Guadalupa towards the East, there lieth six smal Ilands, called Todos los Sanctos▪ or al Saints, and Barbara spokē of before. Those Islandes are verie full of cliffes, stonie, and vnfruitful, which the Pilots are to looke vn∣to to auoyde the danger that may ensue. A little further, lyeth Dominica, taking the name from the day, because it was discoue∣red vpon a sunday, and also an Islande of Caniballes, so ful and thicke of Trees, that there is scant an elle of free land. Therea∣bouts also is another Island called Madan∣nina, or the womens Islande, where it is thought that women onely inhabited in maner of Amazons, whither the Canibales often times resorted to lie with them, and if they had daughters, they kept them, but boyes, they sent vnto their fathers: it lyeth fortie miles from Mons Serratu▪ After that lyeth yet thrée Islands, (besides other little Islands and diuers cliffes) called S. Vin∣cent, Granada, and S. Lucia. Comming further towards the coast of Florida, where we left▪ right against it there lyeth certaine smal cliffes, called Martires, and the little Ilands called Tortugas, because they are like a Torteauxes. From this poynt of Flo∣rida to Ancon Baxo are 100. miles, and ly∣eth fiftie miles distant East and West from Rio Secco, which is the breadth of Florida, from Ancon Baxo 100. miles to Rio di Nieues, from thence to the riuer Flores 20. miles and somewhat more, from the riuer of Flores to the bay called Bahya del Spirito Sancto, which is likewise called La Culata, being in the entrance thereof thirtie miles broade: from this Bahya which lyeth vnder 29. degrées, are 70. miles to the riuer called Rio del Pescadores, from Rio del Pescado∣res (which lyeth vnder 28. degrees and halfe, there is 100. miles to the Riuer called Rio de las Palmas, from whence Tropicus Cancri beginnneth: from Rio de las Pal∣mas to the Riuer Panuco are 30. miles, and from thence to Villa Rica, or Vera Crus, are seuentie miles, in which space lyeth Al∣meria: from Vera Crus, that lyeth vnder 19. degrees▪ to the riuer of Aluarado, (by the Island called Papa Doapan, are thirtie miles: from the riuer Aluarado to the ri∣uer Co••z••coalco are fiftie miles: from thence to the riuer Grital••a are fortie miles. The said two riuers lying about eighteene degrées: from the riuer Gritalua, to Cabo Redondo, are eightie miles, as the coast stretcheth along wherein are contained Champoton and Lazaro: from Cabo Re∣dondo to Cabo di Catoche, or Iucatan are 90. miles, and lyeth about 21. degrées, so that there are in al nine hundred miles in the length of the coast of Florida to Iucatan, which is another Cape or hooke, which stretcheth from off the land northward, and the further it reacheth into the sea, the more it crooketh or windeth about, and is sixtie miles from Cuba. The Island whereof we haue alreadie spoken, which doth almost in∣close the sea that runneth betwéene Florida and Iucatan, which sea by some men is cal∣led Golfo de Mexico, of others Golfo de Florida, and of some others Cortes: the sea that runneth into this gulfe, entreth be∣twéene Iucatan and Cuba with a mightie streame, and runneth out againe betweene Florida and Cuba, and hath no other course.

A breefe description of Noua Hispania, or new Spaine.

THe second part of America is called No∣ua Spaigna▪ or new Spaine, it beginneth towards the North, about the Riuer of Pa∣nuco, vppon the borders of Florida, on the South side it reacheth to the prouince Da∣rien••, where it is diuided from Peru on the East it hath the maine Sea, and on the west the South sea called Mare Australe: this whole Prouince was in times past by the Inhabitants called Cichemecan Cathua∣can, or Co••acan, which peple came out of the land of Culhua, which lieth aboue Xalisco, & made their habitation about the Moores

of Tenuchtitlan, where at this present ly∣eth the towne of Mexico, which people ha∣uing neither countrey nor dwelling place, chose that for the best and most profitable, therein building diuers houses and habita∣tions, and in that manner placed both their new and old villages vnder the commaun∣dement of Culhuacan, giuing the same name to all that countrey.

This land is great and hath many peo∣ple and countries vnder it, but the princi∣pall and chiefe prouince which the Spany∣ardes holde therein is Mexicana, also ••e∣nustiran or Culhuacan, as I saide before, the other prouinces are Guatimala, Xalis∣cus, Hondura, Cha'cos, Taic••, Chamo••la, Claortomaca, Hu••cacholla, and the king∣domes of Michuacan, Tescuco, Utazcalia, Tenuacan, Maxcalcinco, and Mix••e••apan. Mexico or Culhuacan was brought vnder the subiection of the kings of Spaine, by Fer∣nando Cortes Merches deila Valo in the yeere of our Lorde, one thousand fiue hundred and eighteene,* 1.6 which countrey is very rich of golde and siluer, for that ma∣ny riuers haue golde in the sand. The Sea shore in those Countries yeeldeth manye pearles, mustles, or oysters, wherein they finde the pearles, whereof there is a great fishing, and much traffike for them. There are likewise in this countrey many lakes or meeres that are stil and haue no issue, which by the heate of the Sunne tourne into salt. There is likewise no lesse aboundance of Cassia Fistul•• then in Egypt, growing on trees, with leaues like walnuts, and yel∣low blossoms, from whence the pipes or cases of Cassia do issue forth, which are v∣sed to purge in hote feuers, to coole and cleanse the gall and heart blood, as also very good against the stone in the bladder and kidneys, and other diseases. There is like∣wise in that countrie a kinde of fruit that groweth in great abundance called Cacao, altogether like an almond, which is taken out of the huske, and couered with a thinne skinne, whereof the kernel is diuided into three or foure partes, of a darke yellow with blacke veines, being harsh in the mouth, and of an euill taste, but with them is much esteemed, whereof, being beaten with some of their countrey pepper, they make a cer∣taine drinke, which they esteeme of great price, giuing it vnto great Lordes, and such as are their especiall friends, as we esteeme of muscadel or maluesie. The sea bordering vpon this countrey, as also the riuers run∣ning through it are ful of fish, wherein also they finde diuers Crocodiles, as in Egypt, the flesh whereof is so much esteemed before al other meates, that they account it for a princely dish, whereof some are aboue 20. foote long. The country is full of hilles, and stony rockes, and great difference in their speeche, so that they hardly vnderstand each other without Interpreters. The places wherein the Spaniardes first placed their men were Compostella, where the Bishop and the Kings counsell are resident, and Colima, which they call the Purification: in new Galicia is the chiefe Guadalahara. and the head or principall part of the king∣dome. Mecheocan also a Bishops sea, Ca∣catula the towne of Angels, a chiefe towne and bishopricke, M••x•• a kingly citie, and Queene of al cities in the new world, lyeth vpon the border or side of a lake: the market place of the Towne lying ful vpon the lake, whereby they can not come at it but they must passe ouer bridges. This lake is l••••t, and is in length sixe lucas, or twelue miles, and is in breadth tenne miles, without fish, onely a smal kind that may rather be called wormes than fishes, from the which lake in summer time there ariseth such a sti••ke, and infecteth the ayre in such manner, that it is vnwholesome to dwel there, notwith∣standing it is inhabited by as many mar∣chants, as any towne in Europe, the cittie is great, at the least three miles in compasse, wherein are so many temples that it is in∣credible: the particularitte whereof, before it be long shalbe translated out of Spanish into our mother tongue, by the author ther∣of, whereunto I referre you.

Not farre from this cittie lieth an other fresh lake very ful of fish, whereon, as also vpon the shore, lie many townes. When this towne was first taken by the Spani∣ards, there raigned a king called M••nte∣z••m••, being the ninth in degree, and as then the towne was but 140. yeares old, which is to bee wondered at, howe it is possible that so great a citie in so few yeers should be so famous. The marchandises that are most carried out of this countrey, are golde, siluer, pearle balsam, cochenilia, the white roote Macheocan, which is good to purge, Salla Pariglia, and an other roote which maketh men sweate, brimstone, beasts skinnes, and fish. And thus much for new Spaine in generall, and of Mexico in particular.

Not minding at this present time to make any longer discourse, because that our Carde sheweth little thereof, and now returning to our owne Carde, you must vnderstand that the lower ende of Cuba hath an out Hooke, called P. de Santa Anthonio, which is very fitte for to

take in fresh water, and to calke and mend the shippes.

Sailing from this hooke sixtie fiue miles, to the firme land, you come to the hooke of Iucatan, which runneth into the sea like a halfe Island. Iectetan is in Indian speech, I vnderstand you not, for that vpon a time when certaine Spaniards put out of the ha∣uen of Saint Anthony, to discouer newe countries, and arriued in that Island, they made signes vnto the people to knowe the name of the country, whereuppon the In∣dians answered them and saide, O Tecte∣tan, Tectetan, that is, We vnderstand ye not: and so the Spaniards corrupting the name Tectetan call that land Iucatan, yet the furthest point therof in their spéech was called ••ecampi. This point of Iucatan ly∣eth vnder 21. degrees, vnder the which name a great countrey is comprehended, by some called Peinsula, that is, a place al∣most compassed about with water, for that the further this point reacheth into the sea, the broader it is, being in the narrowest part 80. or 90. Spanish miles broad, for so farre it is from Xicalanco.

Therefore the sea Cardes that place this land nearer or smaller, do erre much, for that it is in length from East to West twoo hundred miles, being discouered by Fran∣cisco Hernandez of Cordua, in the yeare of our Lord 1517.* 1.7 but not al of it, for that sai∣ling from out of Cuba from Saint Iacobs, to discouer new countries, or (as some say) to fetch labourers to trauell in his mines, he came about the Island Guanaxos, (here∣in called Caguan x•• to the cape di Hon∣duras, where good, honest, ciuill, and simple people dwelt, being fishermen, hauing no weapons, nor vsed to the warres: and pro∣ceeding further, sayled to an vnknowne point of land, where hee found certaine salt pannes, whereunto he gaue the name of Donne, that is, women, for that there were certaine stone towers with staires & chap∣pels couered with wood and straw, wherein were placed diuerse Idols that shewed like women, whereat the Spaniardes maruel∣led, to finde stone houses, which till then they had not seene, and that the inhabitants were rich and well apparelled, with shirtes and mantles of cotten white, and coloured, with plumes of feathers, and iewels of pre∣cious stones sette in golde and siluer: their women likewise appareled from the middle downewardes, as also on the head and breast, which hauing seene, hee stayed not there, but went vnto an other poynt, which hee named Cotehe, where hee met with certayne Fishermen, who with feare fled from him into the countrey aunswering or calling vnto him, Cotehe, Cotehe, that is to say, home, home, thinking hee asked them the way into the land, whereby this poynt hath holden the name of Cotehe. There vpon the sea side they found a great towne, which for the greatnesse thereof, they called Alkair, after a Towne of the same name, lying in Egypt (yet I thinke it not to be halfe so great as they affirme it to be) where by the Inhabitantes they were friendly receiued, and being entered into the town, they meruelled to see houses with high towers, goodly churches, paued streets, and great trade of marchandise. The hou∣ses were of hewen and carued stones wo••k∣manlike made and built with chalke, but couered with strawe and leaues, the cham∣bers within them of tenne or twelue steps high: they were likewise apparelled, but not with wollen cloth, because they had no sheepe, but with cotten wouen in diuerse sortes, very finely coloured: the women likewise apparelled from the middle downe to the foot, couering their heads and breasts in diuers sorts, very carefully seeking to co∣uer their feete that they might not be seene: going diligētly to church, to which end such as were rich & of authoritie had their owne paued stréet from their dores to the church, but were Idolaters, & although they offred men vnto their Idolles, yet they did not eate mans flesh. They were likewise cir∣cumcised, but it is not knowne why they v∣sed it, vnlesse it were the diuell that ruled ouer them willed them so to do: in their dea∣lings they were vpright, and kept their promises: they traffiked without mony, by bartering, specially for cotten and apparell, or gownes made therof, all without sleeues, which is the greatest riches they bring vn∣to their Lordes, and which they carry to Mexico, Capo di Hondura•• and Cuba they haue likewise many Bees, hony and ware, but they knew not how to vse ware before the Spaniardes came thither: golde and siluer mines they had none, although the Countrey was a rough, sharpe, and stonie land, yet it is fruitlesse, ful of Ma••z or Tur∣kish wheate, and aboundant in fish: there was in those Countries before the Spani∣ardes arriuall, at the least foure hundred thousand Inhabiters, whereof there are scarce eight thousand left, they haue beene so rooted out by the Spaniards, some slaine, some solde for slaues, and carried into wild vnhabited places, to see for golde, and o∣thers by hiding themselues from the cruell Spani∣ardes.

Guatimala.

BY Iucatan inward to the land, lieth the prouince of Guatimala, wherein there was a towne, hauing the name of the Pro∣uince, which vppon the eight day of Sep∣tember An. 1541.* 1.8 by meanes of continuall stormes and raine was wholy ouerthrown and destroyed, wherein were killed about a hundred and twenty Spaniardes. The day before it hapned, some of the Indians went vnto the Bishop of Guatimala, whose name was Franciscus Masoquin, teling him that at the foote of the hill whereon the towne stoode, they had heard a most horrible and fearefull noyse: whereunto the Bishop an∣swering them saide, haue I not often times willed and instructed you not to thinke vp∣pon such thinges, and presently after about two houres after midnight, there fell an vn∣mesurable water downe out of the hill, that ranne with so great a force, that it carried stones and all thinges with it, diuers feare∣full sightes and horrible cries beeing heard and séene in the aire: after the which the Towne was new built, & placed in a plaine field about 3. miles distant from the place, wherein it stood, hauing about 80. or 90. houses in it all of free stone, & couered with tiles. In this Prouince are many Earth∣quakes, as Benzo writeth, who continued long in those countries, otherwise the coun∣trie is of a good and temperate aire, fruitful of corne, and of trées that were brought out of Spaine thether, yet fewe of them pros∣per, onlie Figge trées and Apricockes, but the fruit is not very sauorie. There are like∣wise many Cacauaren: as touching the Re∣ligion and manner of those people, they are much like those of Mexico, and of Nicara∣gua, whereof I wil speake, they likewise deale together, but because this Prouince standeth not in our Carde, I haue spoken sufficiently thereof.

Fonduras.

NExt to Guatimala, is the great countrie of Fonduras, wherein before it was in∣habited by Spaniards, there were at the least, 410000. Indians, whereof there are not at this present (nor many yeares since) aboue 8000. left aliue, part of them slaine by the Spaniards, part led Captiues and consumed in their golden mines, and part ranne away to hide themselues in de∣sert places and holes vnder the earth, so to auoide the Spanish tirranie. In this Pro∣uince the spaniards haue erected 5. townes, which are not in all aboue 120. or 130. houses, most part built of reedes and st••aw, and at this present not much inhabited, be∣cause the gold which is their onlie desire be∣ginneth to faile. The chiefe of these townes in our Card is named Truxillo, of others, Trugillum, or Turtis Iulia, wherein there is a Bishop, this Towne is situate vpon a litle hil, on the sea side in the north part the rest of the townes shall likewise bee spoken of in the description of the coast. And retur¦ning againe to the Cape of Iucatan, right a∣gainst it there lieth a most sweete and plea¦sant Iland, by a king named Cozumela••, whose ancestors dwelt therein, called Co∣sumell, which from the further corner of Cuba Porto di Sa••nt Anthoni••, is seuenty miles, and from Iucatan fiue miles, it is round 45. miles, being a flat and euen coū∣trie, very fruitfull they haue gold, but it is brought from other places, and great a∣bundance of honie and war, and all kind of fruits, hearbs, birds, and foure footed beasts, for other thinges, as Churches, Houses, streets, traffique, apparrell, and customes, altogether like Iucatan, some of the houses are couered with straw, because they want stones, yet there are many stonie places, & in some places pillers of Marble as they haue in Spaine.

At the first entrie of the Spaniards into that Iland they were not receaued, but af∣ter the ruler thereof entertained them very curteouslie, and brought them vp into a tower, where they erected a Crosse, because that they arriued there vpon the 5. of May, being as then holie roode day, and called the Iland S. C••••s, but in our Carde it keept••h the old name. In this Tower they found certaine chambers, wherin they saw many Idols, lying among other Images, which they with great noyse called vpon & prated vnto, offering certaine sweet sauours and incense vnto them, as other Idolaters and Heathens vse to doe, therein fulfilling their Heathenish Ceremonies, they are likewise circumcised.

From this cape to Rio Grando are 100. miles, wherein are contained La Punta de las Mugeres, and the Baliya de la Ascenti∣on. Rio Grando lieth vnder 16. degrees, and from thence are 150. miles to C••uo di Camaron, which are accounted in this man∣ner: first, from the great riuer to the hauen of Higueras are 30. miles, from Puerto Hi∣gueras to the hauen et Puerto di Cauallo••, other thirtie miles. This is the second place by the Spaniards diuided into a colonie: a dayes iournie from thence lieth Saint Pe∣dro in a plaine field close to certaine hilles,

being the third Colonie of the Spaniardes, not farre from thence runneth the riuer Vi∣lua, and the lake in the middle: from whence he certaine hard groundes like Ilandes co∣uered ouer with weedes, which as the wind bloweth, fleet from place to place.

From Puerto de Cauallas to Puerto del triumpho de la Crus are thirtie miles be∣tweene, the which lieth next to Guamareta, Saint Iacob, and Truxillo. From Puerto del triumpho de la Crus to Capo de Hon∣duras are 30. miles, and from thence to Ca∣bo del Camaron 20. miles, from thence to Cabo de Gatias a dios lying vnder 14. de∣grées, are accounted 70. miles: this is like∣wise a Spanish colonie or towne builded by them, and betweene them on the same coast lieth Carthago, also a Spanish towne from Gracias a dios are 70. miles to del Aguade∣ra, which springeth out of the lake or sea of Nicaragua, and is heere called Aguadaco: now againe for a time we will leaue speak∣ing of the coast, to declare the Prouince and Countrie of Nicaragua.

Nicaragua.

DEparting from Fondura, and passing the borders of Chiulutecca, you come to the Prouince Nicaragua, stretching towardes the south sea, which is not verie great, but rich, fruitfull and pleasant, but of so vnreasonable a heate, that in Sommer time the heate cannot be indured in the day time, but only in the night, it raineth there for the space of 6. whole monthes together beginning in Maie. The other sixe mo∣neths are exceeding drie: the day and night being all of a length, honny, waxe, cotton, wool, and balsam growe there in great a∣boundaunce, and many kindes of fruites, which are not found in other prouinces, nei∣ther yet in Hispaniola, nor any other place: and among the rest a kind of apple, in forme much like a peare, within it there is a round nut, almost twice as bigge againe as one of our common nuttes, very swéete and plea∣sant of taste, the tree is great, with small leaues. There are few kine, but many hogges, which were brought out of Spaine to bréede therein. The country is ful of In∣dian villages, all with smal houses made of reedes, and couered with strawe: they haue no mettall: yet at the first entraunce of the Spaniards, the inhabitants had certaine common and base gold among them, which was brought out of other places thither: there are many parrats, which doe great hurt vnto the seedes, and would doe more, were it not that they are driuen away by slings and other meanes. The Spaniards at their arriuall in those countries, by rea∣son of the great abundance of al things, cal∣led them the Paradise of Mahomet. There are many Ginny hennes, and a certaine fruit called Cacauate, which they vse insteed of mony, it groweth on an indifferent great tree, and onely in warme and shadowe pla∣ces, as soone as the Sunne commeth vpon it it withereth, and therefore it is sowed in woodes vnder trées, and in moyst places, and al little enough, but the trées whereby it is planted must be higher than it, and bound close together, that they may defend and couer them from the heate of the sunne: the fruit is like almonds, and being taken out of their shels, are couered with a thinne blacke skinne, and the piths being taken out it may be diuided into two or thrée partes, hauing browne and gray veines, but of a hard taste. When they make drinke there∣of, they drie it in a pot by the fire, and then bruise it with stones, which done, they put it in a cullender, or potte made with holes, mixing it with water, and putting thereto a litle of their pepper, and so drinke it. This drinke is somewhat bitter, it cooleth the bo∣dy, not making them drunke, and by them throughout all the country, it is estéemed for a most pretious thing, which they present to men of great account, as we do maluesey or hypocrase. The maners of this people are not different from those of Mexico, they eate mans flesh, their clokes and garments are without sléeues: they kindle their fire by rubbing two péeces of wood one against an other, which is their common custome throughout al India: and although they haue great store of waxe, yet they knew not how to vse it, for that in steede of candles they vsed lights made of pine trée boughes: their speech is diuerse, but the Mexican spéech is the best, and that is furthest kno∣wen, for that therewith men may trauell through the country aboue fiftéene hundred miles, and is very easie to learne: when they daunce, they vse a very strange man∣ner, for they are at least three or foure thou∣sand together, sometimes more, according to the number of inhabitants, in the fielde where they wil daunce, being all together, they make the place very cleane, then one of them goeth before leading the daunce, commonly going backeward, turning in and out, all the rest following by three and foure together, vsing the like apish toyes, their minstrels and drummes, singing and playing certaine songs, whereunto hee that leadeth the daunce aunswereth, and after him all the rest, some bearing Wayerkens

in their hands, & some rattles ful of stones, wherewith they rattle, others haue theyr heades al slucke with feathers, some their legs and armes bound about with stringes full of shels, some ouerthwart, and some crooked, turning their bodies, some opening their legs, some their armes, some counter∣feiting the deafe man, and others the blind man, some laughing, others grinning, with many strange deuises, they keep their feasts al that day till night drinking nothing but Cocauate.

The ships that saile ouer the south sea to Nicaragua, passe thorow the narow stream about fiue and twenty miles inwards, to∣wards the land, til they come to a dorp cal∣led Re••l••gio, where there are certaine reed houses, inhabited by Spaniardes, where the ships anker by reason of the good hauen, and because of the wood. A dayes iourney from this place eastward lieth Legio or Le¦o•• the Bishops sea of Nicaragaa, standing vpon the border of the lake of Francisco Fer¦nandez, as also Granaten and other Spa∣nish townes lying vpon the same lake, fifty miles from each other almost, at the other ende where the lake issueth into the northerne sea. Those two townes are both scarce fourescore houses, part made of lime and stone, and parte of reedes and strawe. Fiue and thirtie miles from Leon lieth a hill, that casteth out fire, in such abundance, that by night they may beholde at the least 100000. sparks of fire flying into the aire: many Spaniards are of this opinion, that therin must be gold, which giueth the fire a continual essence, wherby they haue sought many meanes to trie it, but al in vaine, and therefore needelesse to rehearse.

Returning againe to the lake of Nicara∣gua. therein are great fishes, and amongest the rest a certaine kinde of fish, in Spanish called Man••, hauing finnes hard by their heades, like two hands, this fish is almost like an otter of 35. foote long, and twelue foote thicke, the head and tayle like an oxe, small eies, hard and hairie skinne, of colour light blew, with two feete like elophantes feete: the sinnes standing out like Kopen, feeding their yong ones with their dugges. This fish feedeth both on land and in the water, they are very familiar with men, whereof the Indians tell a most wonderful thing, which is, that there was a king cal∣led Ca••a••amavuis, that had taken a yoong M••nate which for the space of six and twen∣ty yeres he kept and broght vp with bread, in a lake called Guamabo, that bordered vpon his house, which fish in time became so tame, that he surpassed the dolphin, wher∣of we reade so many histories, for that at what time soeuer the kings seruants called him Matto, Matto, which in Indian spéech is Manisecale or curteous, hee would pre∣sently come out of the lake, and eate meate out of their handes, and woulde likewise come out of the water, and goe into the house, to fetch his meate, and there woulde play with the children: and when any man was desirous to go ouer the lake, he would oftentimes take eight or tenne of them to∣gether, and swimming beare them lightly on his backe ouer the water, in which man∣ner playing with him, the Indians kept this fish long time, til by some iniury done vnto him he became angry, for that vppon a time as a Spaniard would prooue if his skinne were as hard as they reported it to be, threw an arrow or dart at him, and al∣though it hurt him not, yet he felt the sharp point of the arrow, and from that time per∣ceiuing that men with beards and in appa∣rel were there, they might wel call him, but al in vaine, for he would neuer come vp a∣gaine, but in the end, when the riuer A••∣bunicus chaunced to flowe so high, that it ranne ouer the bankes, and so into the lake Guaniabo, the fish folowed the streame, and swamme into the sea, these kindes of fishes are much seene and taken in that countrey, for that their flesh is of a very good taste, like hogs flesh, which being salted is carried to Nombre de Dios, and other places. The lake of Nicaragua lyeth not farre from the south sea, and about a hundred miles from the north sea, running through a riuer that is ful of ships, which the Spaniardes cal∣led Desaguadera that is, falling of water therein. Thereabouts, & in that riuer there are many crocadiles, that lay their egges vpon the sands on the riuers sides, as bigge as geese egs, which being throwne against a stone wil bruised, but not breake, and in time of hunger, are eaten by the spaniards, their taste is like a Moschu•• halfe rotten, and by the Indians is accounted for an ex∣cellent kinde of meate: by Nicaragua the country is rough and sharpe, because of the thicke woodes, and vneuen hilles, where not onely horses, but men can hardly passe ouer, vnlesse it be with great paine and la∣bour: about this countrey for the space of foure months, there are certaine Torte••ux that doe continue in the sea, as also vppon the shoare, which lay their egges as the cro∣cadiles doe, in the sand vppon the shoare, whereof presently by reason of the great heate of the sunne, there commeth yoong Torteaux the flesh of this beast being fresh, is wholesome and pleasant to eate.

From Cabo de Gratias a dios, to the Rio Grande, or Desaguadera (as I said before) are seuenty miles, from Desaguadera to Co¦robaro are fortie miles, from Corobaro to Nombre de Dios fiftie miles, betwéene Co¦robaro and Nombre de dios lieth Veragua, and the riuer Swerus: these 90. miles lie vnder nine degrees and ½, so that from the poynt of Iucatan to Nombre de Dios are 500. miles.

As touching the maners of the Indians of Sweren that are about the riuer Swerus, & dwelling by Veragua they are not much different from the rest, onely that they eate no mans flesh: in their countrey are many beares, tigers, and lions, that are very fear∣full, and flee when they see a man: there are likewise very great snakes, but not veno∣mous, and many sea cats: there is likewise an other kinde of beast called Cascui, in a manner like a blacke pigge, hairie, with a hard skinne, smal eies, open eares like an e∣lephant, but not ful so open, nor hanging down, clouen feet, and a litle snowt, armed like an elephant, and of so shril a voyce, that it maketh men deafe, and is of a good and sauory flesh. There is likewise an other wonderful and straunge beast, of Gesnerus called a Foxe ap••, on the belly whereof Na∣ture hath formed an other belly, wherein when it goeth into any place, it hideth her young ones, and so beareth them about her. This beast hath a body and member like a foxe, feete like mens hands, or like sea cattes feete, eares like a batte, it is neuer seene that this beast letteth her yong ones come foorth but when they sucke, or ease themselues, but are alwayes therein, vntil they can gette their own meate: also there is another kind of beast called Iguanna or Iuanna, not much vnlike our eftes, hauing a thing hanging at his chinne like vnto a beard, and on her head a combe like a cockes combe, vpon his backe certaine sharpe quilles, sticking vp∣right like thornes, and amongest the rest, some hauing teeth like a sawe, with a sharp taile, and stretching out, sometimes wind∣ing like the adder. This beast is accounted among the vnhurtfull snakes, euery time it layeth it hath fortie or fiftie egs, round, and as big as a nut, whereof the yellow is sepe∣rated from the white, like hennes egs: they are good to eate, and very sauory flesh, but not roasted either in oyle or butter, onely in water: this beast feedeth both on land, and in the water, it climeth trees, and is fearful to behold, specially to those that knowe not the nature thereof, yet it is so gentle & quiet that it maketh not any noyse, and being ta∣ken and bound, it liueth at the least tenne or twelue dayes without meate, it is of a good and sauoury flesh, and is kept for likorish∣nesse, specially the women, onely such as haue had the pox, if they eate it, their paine reneweth.

Nombre de Dios.

NOmbre de Dios, is a towne of traffike lying on the north sea, so named by Di∣ego de Niquesa. a Spaniard, that had indured some hard fortune, and landing in that hauen with the rest of his men saide, ••n Nombre de Dios, that is, in the name of God, and so began his worke againe which before he did pretend, and there erected cer∣taine houses, giuing the place the name a∣foresaid: this towne lieth east and west vp∣on the sea side, in the middle of a very great wood, in a very vnwholesome place, special∣ly in winter time, by reason of the greate heate and moystnesse of the earth, as also, because of the moorish ground that lieth on the west side of the towne, whereby many of the Indians die: the houses are built af∣ter the Spanish maner, as also those of Pa∣nama, wherein many Merchants dwel that sell their wares by the great: the rest of the houses are for strangers, like Innes, as also for Grocers, handicraftsmen, and such like, most part of the merchants of Nombre de Dios, haue houses likewise in Panama, for that the traffique out of Peru commeth to Panama, and out of Spaine to Nombre de Dios, and there they are continually resi∣dent, vntill they become rich, and then they goe to other places, or else returne into Spaine. On the north side of this towne li∣eth the hauen wherein many ships may a••∣ker: touching such fruits as they bring 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Spaine into those countries, there g••••••∣eth some in that vntemperate and vn••∣some ayre, as lemons, oranges, re〈…〉〈…〉hes, coleworts, and lettuce, but very small, few, & not very good, other victuals are brought thither out of Hispaniola, Cuba, and the prouince of Nicaragua, as India wheat or maiz, bread called Cazab••, salt fish, hogges, batatas, and from Panama kine, and flesh vnsalted, all other kind of wares are broght out of Spaine thither, for that euery yeere there commeth shippes out of Spaine laden with wine, meale, bread, bisket, oliues, oile, figs, reasins, silks, woollen and linnen cloth, and such wares necessary for the sustenance of man: which wares being arriued in that country, are carried in little scutes through the riuer Chiara, to a place called Ciu••ce, fifteene miles distant from Panama, where it is deliuered to a Spanish Factor, which

registreth all the wares, and kéepeth them, vntill they be carried by beasts vnto Pana∣ma, a Towne lying on the other side of the Lake, from whence by ships they are con∣ueyed into other places, thorow the whole country of Pe••••, C••a••c••s, and Chila. as also northward in the out places of the Spani∣ards. The breadth of the country betweene N••mbre de Dio••, and Panama, from the one side to the other, is not aboue seuenteene miles, whereby Peru is no Island. The Spaniards compare this towne to Venice, but I think they nere saw it, for if they had, doubtles they would be of another opinion.

But letting Panam•• rest til another time I will proceede with the description of the coast, from Nombre de Dios to Farallones del Darien, lying vnder eight degrées, are seuentie miles: touching the towne of Da∣riene. til you come to the old virgine Mary, it heth in an vnwholesome place, therefore all the inhabitants are of a pale yellow col∣lour like those that haue the yellow iandise, yet it proceedeth not from the nature of the land, for that in places of the same height there is wholsome dwelling, that is, where they haue fresh water, and cleere fountains and where vnder the same height they dwel vpon hilles, and not as Dariene which lieth in a valley: the sides of the riuer being com∣passed with high hilles, and by that means they haue the sunne but at noone time, only right ouer them, and on both sides, both be∣fore and behinde they are no lesse troubled with the reflexion of the sunne beams, cau∣sing a most vnsupportable heat, in such sort that the dwelling in Dariene is not hurtful, by reason of the nature of the land, but be∣cause of the situation thereof: it is likewise deadly, by reason of the moorishnesse of the ground, beeing wholly compassed about with moorish stincking water, the Towne it selfe being a very pitte or moorish plotte of ground: and when they throwe water vpon the floores of their houses, it doth pre∣sently ingender toades, and when they do digge but a spanne and a halfe deepe in the earth, presently there appeareth Adders out of the poysoned water, that are with∣in the filthy earth of the riuer, which flo∣weth with filth, and full of durt. Out of this deepe valley, euen vnto the sea, in Da∣riene are Tygars, Lions, and Crocadiles, Oxen, Hogges and Horses, in great abun∣daunce, and greater than those that are brought thither out of Spaine, many great trees and fruit, and all kindes of fruits and hearbs that are to be eaten: the people are of colour betweene darke and red yellow, of good proportion, with little haire, or beardes, onely vpon the head and the eie∣browes, specially the women, which with a certaine hearb make it fall off, they goe all naked, specially vpon their heades, they haue their members hidden, eyther in a shell, or in a case, or else they couer it with a cotten linnen, the women are couered from the middle to the knees, all the rest is naked and bare: in that countrey there is no win∣ter, for that the mouth of the riuer Dariene lieth lesse than eight degrees from the equi∣noctiall, so that day and night is there of a length: from the furthest point that reach∣eth into the sea, lieth a village in the Pro∣uince of Caribana, nine miles from Dariene called Futeraca and from thence about three miles lieth Vraba, wherof the whole stream hath her name, and in time past was the chiefe Towne of the kingdome: sixe miles off lieth Fe••, from thence to Zereme are 9. miles, from Zereme to Sorache, are twelue miles. These places were all full of Cam∣balles, and when they had no ennemies to fight withall, they fought one against the o∣ther, that they might deuoure the men.

The gulfe of Vraba is 14. miles long, and in the entrie sixe miles broade, and the nea∣rer it runneth to the firme land, the narrow∣er it is, into this riuer runne many waters, and one that is muche more prosperous then the Riuer Nilus, whatsoeuer is sowed or planted in Vraba, it springeth very spee∣dily, for that within 28. daies they haue ripe Cucumbers, Goardes, Melons, &c. In Da∣riene and Vraba there groweth much fruit that is verie pleasant and sweete of taste, & much aboue our fruits, whereof whosoeuer is desirous to know more, let him reade the histories thereof, as Peter Martir in his ninth book of the descriptiō of the firme land.

In the mouth of the gulfe of Vraba lyeth a small Island called Tortuga, that is, the Is∣land of Torteaux, because it is formed like a Torteaux, or because there are many Tor∣teauxes therein, and further on the same coast lyeth the Island l. Fuerte, which is in the middle betweene Vraba and Carthago, wherein also are Canibals, most cruell vil∣laines, and from thence you come to Puerto de Caribana, the hauen of Caribana, or of Cambals, whereof the Caribes haue recei∣ued their name. From thence you come to the riuer de Guerra, and then to the riuer of Zenu, which is a great hauen, the town be∣ing about seuen or eight spanish miles and a half from the sea, wherin is great traffike of fish, fine gold & siluer works. They gather gold out of the riuers in great floods & rains placing great nettes in the water, wherein they stay the gold, which is in great grains:

it was discouered by Roderigo de Bastidas, in the yeere of our Lord 1502.* 1.9 And within two yeares after by Giouanni de la Cosa: And then againe in the yeare of our Lorde 1509.* 1.10 by Don Ancisus: and after him fol∣lowed Alonso de Hoieda, who desiring to discouer their sands, or barter with the in∣habitants, as also to learne their speech, and to know the riches of the country, sought to come acquainted with them, but the Indi∣ans withstoode them, and determined to fight: wherewith the Spaniardes shewed signes of peace, causing an interpreter (that Franciscus Pizairo had brought from Vra∣ua) to speake vnto them, saying that hée and his companions the Spaniards were chri∣stians, peaceable and quiet people, and such as hauing by long voyages passed the great Ocean seas, had as then need of all necessa∣ry prouisions, and of golde, desiring them to barter the same with them, for other costly wares, which they had neuer seene. Where∣vnto the Cariben of Zenu answered them, that it might well be they were such quiet people, but yet they shewed not the signs of peace, and therefore they willed them pre∣sently to departe out of their countrey, for they saide they were not minded to be moc∣ked by them, neither meant they to indure an enemies or straungers weapon within their country. Wherevpon D. Ancisus re∣plying answered them and saide, that he could not with honour depart from thence, before he hadde deliuered his message vnto them for the which he was sent thither, ma∣king a long oration, thereby to perswade them to the christian faith, grounded onely vpon one God maker of heauen and earth, and of all creatures therein: in the end tel∣ling them that the holy Father the Pope of Rome Christs lieutenant throughout al the world, hauing absolute power ouer mens soules, & religion, had giuen their countrey to the mighty king of Spaine his master, & that he was purposely sent thither, to take possession thereof, wishing them therefore not to oppose themselues agenst him, if they meant to become christians and subiects to so great a Prince, onelie paying a small yeerely tribute of golde. Whereunto they in iesting manner, and smiling, aunswered much after the same manner, as it is writ∣ten of Attabalipa, that they liked well of his proposition touching one only God, but as then they were not minded to argue ther¦of, neyther yet to leaue their religion, & that the Pope might well bee liberall of other mens goods, that belonged not to him, or at least that he should giue that which was in his power to deliuer, as also that the king of Spaine was either very poore, to desire that which was none of his, or very bold to seeke that which he knew not, and that if he came to inuade their countrey, they would set his head vpon a stake, as they had done manie other enemies his like: but the Spaniardes not esteeming their words, entred vpon the land and ouercame them.

From the gulfe Vraba to Carthagena are 70. miles, betweene the which two places the hauens and riuers aforesaide do lie, the partition being passed ouer, as also Puerto de Naos, that is, the hauen of Ships, it is from Carthagena to S. Martha fiftie miles.

Carthagena.

CArthagena was so named, because that in the mouth of the hauen there lieth an Island in Indian speech called Codego, as also new Carthago, in Spaine Scombria, or els bicause al the Spaniards dwelling ther∣in, came out of the Cittie of Carthago in Spaine: the Island is about two miles long and a mile broad. When the Spanyardes came first into that countrey, they found it ful of Fishermen, whereof at this time they can hardly find any remnant, which is not to be wondered at, for that not onely in this prouince, but in al the other Islands, wher∣in the Spaniards haue béene, there is hard∣ly any Indians left, because, the Indians as long as possibl they might wold neuer haue any dealings with the Spaniardes, because of their tyranny. This Countrey is rich of fish, fruites, and all kinde of victualles ne∣cessary for men: they couer their priuy mem¦bers with clothes of cotten wooll: both men and women go to the wars, for in the yeere of our Lorde 1509. as a Spaniard called Martinus Amisus made warre vppon those of Zenu, bordering vpon Carthegena, hee tooke an Indian woman of the age of twen∣ty yeeres, that with her owne hands hadde slaine 28. Christians: their arrowes are poysoned, and they eate their ••nue••••tes flesh, and spoiled many Spanyards: at their feasts which in times past they vsed to hold they beautifie their bodies in the best ma∣ner they can deuise, with iewells, and gol∣den bracelets, mingled with pearles, and stones called smaragdes, wearing them a∣bout their faces, armes, legges, and other parts of their bodies: their chiefe merchan∣dises are salt, fish, and pepper, which grow∣eth in great abundance all along the coast, it is of forme long, and sharper than the ••st Indian pepper, and much sweeter and plea∣santer of smell than the common Bra••ilia pepper, which wares they carrie into such

places as want it, where they barter for o∣ther things, before they were vnder the sub∣iection of the Spaniards: they had many kindes of fruites and trees, cotten wooll, fea∣thers, golde bracelets, gold, many pearles, smaragdes, slaues, and diuers rootes, wher∣with they traffiked, bartering them with∣out any respect, desire or couetousnes, vsing these wordes, Take this, and giue me some other ware for it, but no ware was more e∣steemed with them than victualles, but now they likewise beginne to couet after golde and other thinges, whiche they haue lear∣ned of the Spaniards. Benzo in his second booke of the Indian historie and fift chapter sheweth a notable example, saying, that vp∣on a time he being very hungry, went into an Indians house, praying him to sel him a chickin, and the Indian askt him what hee would giue him, he pulling foorth a spanish riall of siluer, gaue it him, which the Indian taking, helde betweene his teeth, and saide, Then I perceue you would haue my victu∣alles, and giue mee that which no man can eate, neither is it of any account, therefore take you your peece of siluer, and I wil keep my victualls.

Betweene Carthagena and saint Mar∣tha, there runneth a great swift riuer called Rio Grande, which standeth in our Carde, which issueth with such force into the Sea, specially in winter, that it beats the stream of the sea backe againe, whereby the shipps that passe by it, may easily take in water. Sayling vpwardes into this riuer to the kingdome of Bogota, by the Spaniards cal∣led Granada, there are certaine mines of emeraldes found in the valley of Tunia, in this Carde called Tomana, whereabouts the spaniards haue builded new Carthage. The inhabitantes of the valley of Tunia, and the people bordering on the same doe worship the sunne for their chife god, with such reuerence, that they dare not stare or once looke stedfastly vpon it: they likewise worship the Moone, but not so much as the sun: in their wars, insteed of Ancients they tie the bones of certaine men (who in their liues were valiaunt in armes) vppon long staues, and so carry them before them to in∣corage others to be the like, and make them the readier to fight. Their weapons are ar∣rowes, pikes made of palme tree wood, and stone swordes. They bury their kings with golden neckelaces, sette with emerauldes, and with bread and wine, wherof the Spa∣niards haue foūd many such graues, which they haue opened. The people that dwell vpon the aforesaid great riuer, are all Ca∣niballs or Caribes, as also those that dwell about saint Martha, and in time past were Caribes. The inhabitants of the Islandes of Boriquen, Dominico, Matitini, Cibuchi∣ne (now called saint Croce) and Guadalu∣pe, as it is already declared, which rowe on the water with scutes made of a certayn wood called Canois, and that fought against those of Hispaniola, and the people of the firme land, whome they spoyled and eate.

The common opinion is, that they came first out of the firme land of Caribana, by Vraba, and from Nombre de Dios, in In∣dian speech called Caribes, and all strong and valiaunt menne, are nowe by them called Caribes, which are very expert in bowes and arrowes. The Brasilians name them Prophets, or Soothsayers, and Cari∣bes Priests.

The people inhabiting in the valley of Tunia, poison their arrowes, and before the Spaniards ouercame them they hadde continuall warres against the people of Ba∣gota, or Bogota, they are good souldiers, cru∣el, and very reuengeatiue: when they goe to warres, they carry their Idoll Chiappen with them, as a iudge of the victorie, vnto whome before they enter into the field, they offer many sacrifices and offerings of cer∣taine liuing men, béeing the children of slaues, or of their ennemies, painting all the Image with bloud, which doone, they doe eate the flesh: when they retourned vi∣ctorious, they helde great feasts with daun∣cings, leapings, and singings, some drin∣king themselues druncke, and agayne be∣smeering their Image with blood, and be∣ing ouercome, they were sorrowfull, and heauy, seeking by new sacrifices to intreats theyr Chiappen, that hée woulde helpe and assist them, and send them victory a∣gainst theyr enemies.

S. Martha.

SAint Martha is also a Towne and Ha∣uen of the Spaniardes lying on the firme land vnder eleuen degrees, on the north side of the Equinoctial line about fiftie Spanish miles, from Carthagena, it lieth at the foote of certayne hills, so monstrous high, that it is, incredible, howe in so great extreame heate, so great quantitie of snowe should lie vpon the toppes of those hills which is seene a great way off, and whereby the ha∣uen is knowne.

This country was discouered and taken by Roderigo de Bastidas in 1524.* 1.11 where it cost him his life, not by the enemy, but by

his owne men, that when he was asleepe, killed him, and gaue him fiue woundes in his body. The people of this country are so cruell and fierce, that they haue oftentimes driuen the Spaniards from their countrey, not caring for the shippes, but running into the sea, till the water mounted as high as their breasts, shooting with thousandes of poysoned arrowes, and neuer would giue ouer, were it not by meanes of the great shot, together with the cries of such as were afraid, and ran away, thinking them to be thunder claps, which oft times happen in those countries, by reason of the euennesse of the countrey, with the height of the hills. The compasse of this hauen is three Span∣nish miles, and so cleere that they may see stones lying on the ground within the wa∣ter, although it is at the least twentie elles deepe: into this hauen there floweth twoo running waters, but not fit for great ships, but onely for little boates, cut out of peeces of wood: it is a great pleasure to heare what they report of the great numbers, and good∣nes of the fishes that are taken thereabouts both in fresh and salt water, for the which cause they found many Fishermen therea∣bouts, with many nettes made of packe∣threede, hanging on cotten ropes, which was their greatest liuing, for that for fish they had whatsoeuer they desired of their neighbours. In this country they found sa∣phires, emerauldes, calcedonies, iaspers, amber, brasil wood, golde and pearles, that is, in the two prouinces Caramaira and Sa∣curma, wherein the two hauens Carthage∣na and S. Martha do lie. Caramaira is a very fruitfull and pleasant countrey, wherein there falleth neither hard winter, nor ouer hote summer, day and night being there al∣most of a length. The Spaniardes hauing taken in this country, found gardeins rea∣dy planted, moystned with strange waters like the gardeins in Italie: their common meate is Ages, luca, Maiz, Batatas, and some fruites of trees, such as other Indians ther∣abouts do vse, they eate fish also, and mans flesh, but not often. Ages are rootes, of the greatnesse of long turnopes in Italie, plea∣sant of taste, not much vnlike chesnuttes, which they vse in banquets insteede of fruit. Iuca is also a kinde of roote whereof they do make bread: the Iuca that groweth in Cu∣ba. Hayti, & other Ilands, is very hurtful be∣ing eaten raw: and to the contrary that of S. Martha is very wholsome, being otherwise eaten, it is very good of taste: these roots are planted & not sowne, which being ripe, are as great as a mans arme, or the smal of his leg, & ripeneth in halfe a yere, but if it stand two yéeres in the ground, it maketh better bread, being ripe, they are prest betweene 2 stones, wherby the sap runneth forth, which is very hurtful in the Islands, vnlesse it be sodden, as we doe milke: otherwise being drunke of men or beasts, it kills them as be∣ing a strong poison, but sod till it consumeth to the half, & so let stand til it be cold, it may be vsed insteede of vineger, & being sod til it be thick, it becoms sweet like hony, & so they vse it in the firm land, being raw, for drink, and sodden, for vineger & hony. I said in the firme land, for that in the Islands it is very dangerous & venomous: of the material sub¦stance of the roote being prest, which is like almonds that are stampt, they make round cakes as big as dollars, which they bake, & is their Cacaui or bread, wherewith they so long haue norished themselues: this bread is somwhat harsh in the throat, if it be not tempered with water, or mixed with other meate. Yet I had rather eate bread made of Maiz, that is, Brasilia wheate, for that it gi∣ueth no lesse sustenance than our wheate, & is very wholsome, agreeing with y^e stomak, wherof they make bread, as we do of wheat Batatas are also common, & in great aboun∣dance in this country, which are roots of the thicknesse of a mans arme, & some smaller, pleasant of taste, and procuring good norish∣ment, yet they cause wind, vnlesse you rost thē, then they loose that effect, specialy when they are eaten with any good wine: of these rootes they also make conserues, not much vnlike that which is made of Quinces, and cakes, with other such kinds of deuises. At this time there are many of them in Spaine, whence they are likewise brought into our countries: Those that are desirous to reade more hereof, let them peruse the Writers of the new World, or the bookes of the lear∣ned doctor Carolus Clusius, which writeth therof at large, from whence this is taken.

In S. Martha is great traffike for fish, cotten, & feathers, their houses are of earth, hanged with mattes made of ••esen, and of diuers colours, they haue many couerlets of cotten, wherin are wouen the figures of Tigers, Lions, Eagles, and such like. From Saint Martha to the Cape de la Ve∣la, that is, the cape of the saile, are 50. miles: this cape lieth vnder 12. degrees, & is 100. miles from S. Dominico: betweene S. Mar∣tha and the cape de la Vela, lie these places, Cape de la Guia, the point of the needle or of the compasse, Ancon de Gacha, an open ha¦uen of Gacha, Rio de Palominas, the riuer of Palominas: Rio de la Hacha, the riuer of the Tocrtse: Rio de P••edras, the riuer of Stones: Laguna de S. Iuan, the lake of S.

Iohn. From the Cape de la Vela to Co∣qui••ocoa are fortie miles, in our Carde it is placed with twoo words diuided, which should be but one. Th••s is another point ly∣ing on the same corner, behinde the which beginneth the gulte of Ven••z••el••, which in compasse and breadth is from the cape of S. Roman eightie miles.

Porete Venezuela, little Venice.

THe whole coast from the Cape de la Ve∣la, to the gulfe of ••ar•••• was discouered by Christophero Co••an••o, in An. 149••.* 1.12 and the first gouernour of Venezuela, was a h••gh Duchman, called And•••• sius A••m∣g•• who in the name of Wel••ren traua••••ed into those countries, the Emperour hauing besieged their towne, in the yeare of our Lorde 1518. and died of a wound giuen him by a poysoned arrow,* 1.13 and most of his men dyed for hunger, after they had eaten dogs and some Indians flesh: it is a B••∣shopr••cite the towne being called Venezue∣la because it is binlded in the water vpon an euen rocke, which water and lake is called M••••aca••••o, and by the Spaniards Lag•• di Nostra D••nna: the women of this place are preuder & better mannered then others of the prou••ces thereabouts, they painte their brests and armes, al the rest of their bodies are naked only their priuities which they couer with certain deaths, which to leaue off were great shame vnto thē, & like∣wise if any man should lift it vp, he shuld do them great 〈◊〉〈◊〉 & dishouor. The maides are knowne by their colour, & the greatnes of their girdles that they weare, which is a certaine signe o•• their maidenhead. The men carrte theyr members in a shell, they pr•••• to Idols, and to the diuel, whom they paint in such a ••riue as he instructeth them: or as hee the ••••d himselfe vnto them. In warres they vse poysoned arrowes, & pikes of fiue and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••••••ful long, kniues of reedes, great t••••••••s made of barks of trees, and also of 〈◊〉〈◊〉. Their priests which al∣so are Ph••••••tions, aske the sicke person (by whom they are sent for if they certainly be∣leeue that they 〈◊〉〈◊〉 help them, and then lay their hands vpon the place where they say theyr paines, ••••postumes, or swellings are, crying or calling out, and if it fortune that they heale not, they put the fault either in the sicke person, or in their gods, and in th••s sort their Ph••••tions deale with them, In the ••••••ht time they mourne for theyr Lords, which is singing certaine songs in their commendations, that done they roast them, and beate them to smal pouder, which them, drink in wine, which among them is a great honour. From Venezuela to C•••• S. Roman is eighty miles, and from S. Ro••••n to Golfo Triste, are fiftie miles, wherein ly∣eth Curiana.

Curiana.

CVriana hath a hauen like that of Cal∣lice in Spaine, where on the shore there are about eight houses, but not farre from thence within the land there was a v••llage, full of people, that went naked, but very friendly, for ple, innocent, and familar, and receiued the Spaniards w••th great ioy, and for pinnes, néedles, Lels glasses, and beads, they gaue them many strings of pearles: receiuing them into their houses, seruing them with al kinds of meates, and for foure pinnes gaue them a peacocke, for two pins a phesant, for one pinne a turtle doue, or house pigeon, for a stone, g••••sse, or a pin or two, a goo••••: & they asking them what they would do with the pinnes, seeing they were naked, they said they were good to pick their teeth, and for the belles they tooke great de∣light to heare them ring: the country is ve∣ry ful of the birdes before rehearsed: also of hartes, wilde swine, and cennies, of colour and greatnesse like our hares, which birdes and deeres flesh is their meate, as also the pearle oysters, whereof thereabouts are great aboundance, and much eaten: they are al very s••••ful in shooting at wild beasts and birds, their beates are hewed out of a peece of hard wood, but not so well propor∣tioned as those of the Canniballes, and in H••spani••l••, which they call Gall••••s, their houses are made of wood, and couered with palme 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••ues, wherein, when they are at res••, th•••• may easily heare the fearefull cries of wilde beasts, which hurt not any man, for 〈◊〉〈◊〉 inhabitants go al naked, and without campany into the wooddes, onely with their be••••s and arrowes, and not it was neuer heard that any of them was e∣uer slaine or deuoured by wild beasts. They likewise brought the Spaniardes as many hartes and wilde swine as they desired, all killed with theyr arrowes, their breade is of rootes or Maiz like other Indians: the people haue blacke and halfe curled hayre, and somewhat long: they make their teeth white with an hearb which all the day they chawe in their mouthes, which hauing cha∣wed, they sp••tte out againe, washing their mouthes. The women are better for keep∣ing of a house, than to labour in the fieldes, and the men vse to worke in the groundes, and to hunt: also to goe to warres, to dance and to play. In their houses they haue ma∣ny earthen vessels, as cups, pots, & such like, which are brought them from other places.

They keepe certayne yéerely fayres, eue∣ry one carrying to ech other, such things as they want. They weare strings of pearles about their necks, as common as the coun∣trey women in Italie weare cristall beades, whereon hangeth many beastes and birdes made of base gold, like Rheins gold, which is brought vnto them from Carichieta, sixe dayes iourney from thence, towardes the south: and when the Spaniardes asked of them where they had the golde, they made signes which way, shewing them it was in an other countrey beyond them, but coun∣selled them not to go thither, saying they were Canniballes, and such as eate mans flesh. The men bore a goard which they weare for a codpeece, and tie about their middles with a string, hiding their mem∣bers therein, or in a Snakes shel, the rest of theyr bodies are al naked. Thus much for the customes and manners of Curiana. Betweene the Cape of Saint Roman, and Golfo Triste lieth Core Taratara, and P. Secco. From Golfo Triste to Cariari are a hundred miles, the coast lying vnder tenne degrees: betweene them lieth manie hauens and riuers, specialy Puerto di Can∣na Fistola, P. Fle••chado, that is, the point where they were shotte at with arrowes. Punto Muerte, the dead hauen. Cabo de Ioan Blanco, the cape of Iohn White, Cabo la Colhera, Rio Dunari, Illa de Pirico, Ma∣racapana, Chelheribiche, St. Fee, that is, holy Faith, Rio de Cumana, Punta D'ara••a C••m•••• and Maracapana: along by the coasts aforesaid lie many Islands, as Mo∣ines, that is, the Isle of Moonks, Quiracao, Buenaire, Good Ayre, Rocques, or Roca, Stone Rockes, de Aues, the Birds, Tor∣tuga, Torteaux, and then Cubagna, or Margaritha, the Isle of Pearles.

A certaine description of Maracapana, and Cumana.

CVmana signifieth a Prouince and a Ri∣uer, wherin there is a towne and a cloi∣ster of grey Friers, because of the great numbers of pearles that are found therea∣bouts. The people of this countrey went naked, onely that they couered their mem∣bers, eyther in a gorde, or Snakes shels, or else with bandes of reedes or cotton wooll: in wars they weare mantles, and decke them∣selues with feathers: at feasts and bankets they paint themselues, or else stroke them∣selues ouer with certaine gum, and salues that be clammy, wherein they sticke fea∣thers of all colours, which is no ill sight: they cut their haire aboue their eares, and if any haire grow vpon their knees, or on their faces, they pul them out, and will haue no haire vpon any place of their body, although they are by nature most of them without beards or haire, and such as let their haire grow after the Spanish manner, they call them beasts: these people make great meanes to make their teeth blacke, and such as haue them white, they esteeme them to be women, because they take no paines to make them blacke, which they do with the powder or sap of a certaine hearbe, by them called Hay, or Gay, which leaues are very soft like turpentine leaues, and in fashion like Mortella, being of the age of 15. yeers, and that their courages began to rise: they begin to beare those leaues in their mouths, and to chaw them, vntil their teeth become as blacke as coles, which blacknesse conti∣nueth vntill they die, which likewise pre∣serueth the teeth from rotting, spoyling, or any paine, they mire the powder of that leafe with another sort of powder of a kinde of wood, and with chalk of white shells bur∣ned, in which sort those of the East Indies vse their betele and Arrecca, with chalke of oysters, which is already declared in the description of the East Indies: the pow∣der of these leaues, woodde and chalke they beare continually in their mouthes, still chawing it, which they keepe in basketts and boxes made of reedes, to sel and barter the same in the markets round about them, for gold, slaues, and cotten, and for other wares: al the maides goe naked, only they weare certaine bandes about their knees, which they binde very hard, that their hips and thighes may seeme thicke, which they estéeme for a beauty: the married women weare shooes, and liue very honestly: and if they commit adultery, they are forsaken by their husbands, & punished. The lords and rich men of the country haue as many wiues as they list: and if any man come to their houses to lodge, they giue them one of the fairest to lie by them: the rest haue but one, and some none: the women till the land, and looke to the house, and the men not being in the warres, doe fish and hunt: they are highminded, reuengeatiue, and hastie: their chiefe weapons are poysoned arrowes, which they prepare in diuers ma∣ners, as with the blood of snakes, the iuice of hearbes, and mixtures of many other things, whereby there is no means to heale such as are once wounded therewith. The children, women, and men from their youth vpwards learne to shoote in bowes: their meate is horsleaches, battes, grashoppers, creuishes, spiders, bees, and rawe, sodden,

and rosted lice, they spare no liuing crea∣ture whatsoeuer, but they eat it, which is to be wondered at considering their country is so wel replenished with good bread, wine, fruite, fish, and all kinde of flesh in great a∣boundance whereby it commeth that these people haue alwaies spots in their eyes, or else are dimme of sight, which some notwithstanding impute to the pro∣pertie of the water in the riuer of Cumana: they close their gardens or lands with cottē yarne, by them called Bexuco, placing it a∣bout the height of a man, and among them it is accoūted for a great offence, if any man should venter either to climbe ouer, or creep vnder that cotten, holding for certaine that whosoeuer doth teare it, shal die presently after it. The men of Cumana, as I said be∣fore, are much giuen to hunting, wherein they are verie skilful. They hunt and kil Li∣ons, Tigers, Goates, Ileren, Hogs, and al other kinde of foure footed beasts, which they kil with bowes, or take with nettes. There are likewise in these prouinces ma∣ny verie strange beasts, part whereof are al∣readie described, and part not: he therefore that desireth further instruction heerein, let him reade the Spanish historiografers, that write larger. The women as I said, til the ground, sow Maiz, and all kinde of corne, plant Batates, and other trees, watering them, specially the Hay, wherewith they make their teeth blacke: they plant trées, which being cutte, there issueth a white li∣quour like milke, which changeth into a sweete gumme, verie good to smell vnto. They plant likewise other trees called Gua∣re••ma, whereof the fruit is like a Mulberie, but somewhat harder, whereof they make a certaine kinde of sodden Must, which hea∣leth colde, and out of the wood of the same tree they make fire. They haue another kind of high and sweete smelling trée, which seemeth to be Cedar, whereof the wood is verie good to make chests & cases, & by rea∣son of the sweetnesse of the wood, good to keep things in: but putting bread into them, it becommeth so bitter, that it is not to be ea∣ten: the wood is likewise good to make ships, for that it neuer consumeth in the water, by wormes, or any other meanes. There are other trees from whence they haue lime, wherewith they gette birdes, and annoint their bodyes therewith, wherein they stick feathers. The land of it selfe bringeth forth Cassia, but they eate it not, neither knowe how to vse it. There are so many Roses and sweete flowers in that countrey, that the smel thereof maketh mens heades to ake, in smel exceeding muske: wormes, as grashop∣pers, Caterpillers, and such like, there are verie manie, which destroy the seed. There are likewise vains of sea coles burning like pitch, whereof they make great profite. Thus much concerning the fruitfulnesse of the countrey, their manners and customes in planting, hunting, &c. Besides this, these people take great pleasure in twoo things, that is, dancing and drinking, often times spending eight dayes together in banquet∣ting, dancing, and drinking themselues drunke: besides their ordinarie dancings and meeting together, at the feasts and coro∣nations of their Kings and Lordes, or in common assemblies and publike bankets: many of them meete together, euerie one drest in a seueral maner, some with crowns of feathers, others with shelles or fruits a∣bout their legges, like Iuglers heere in our countrey, vsing al kinds of toyes and deui∣ces, some straight, others crooked, some back∣wards, some forwards, grinning, laughing, counterfetting the deafe, blind, and lame man: fishing, weauing, and doing al kinde of workes, and that for the space of fiue or sixe howres together, for that hee which continueth longest in that manner is the best man, and he that drinketh wel is a lu∣stie fellow: hauing danced, they sitte down crosse legged like a Taylor, and make good cheare, drinking themselues drunke at the kings charges, of which their dancing I haue spoken in another place, so that to speake any more thereof it were needlesse. They are great Idolaters, praying to the Sunne and the Moone, thinking them to bee man and wife, and to be great Gods: They feare the Sunne verie much when it thundereth or lightneth, saying that it is angry with them: they fast when there is a∣ny eclipse of the Moone, specially the wo∣men, for the married women plucke theyr haires, and scratch their faces with theyr nailes, th•• maides thrust thornes of fishes into their armes, and therwith draw bloud, thinking that when the Moone is in the full, they thinke it is to be shot or hurt by the sunne, by reason of some anger or greefe he hath conceiued against it: when any bla∣zing star appeereth, they make a great noise with Drummes, and hallowing, thinking by that meanes it will bee gone, for they thinke a blazing starre signifieth some great hurt or euill fortune. Among many Idols and figures which they honour and inuoke for Gods, they haue a certaine thing like a Burguinion Crosse, which they hang vpon their new borne children, thinking thereby they are preserued in the night from all e∣uill things. Their priests are called P••aces,

who in those countries haue the maiden∣heades of their Daughters when they marrie. Their office likewise is to heale the sicke, and to say truth, to call vppon the the diuel, and to conclude, they are skilful in the blacke art and coniurers. They heale with hearbes and rootes, both sodden and raw, beaten, and mi••••ed with fat of birdes, fish, or beasts, with wood and other things vnknowne to the simple men, vsing certain darke wordes and sentences, which they themselues do not vnderstand. They sucke and sicke the place where the paine••s, ther∣by to draw out the euil humours, and if the paine or feuer increaseth, the priests say that their patients are possessed with euil spirits, wherewith they rubbe their bodyes all ouer with their handes, vsing certaine wordes of coniuracion and charmes, sucking after that very hard, often making them beleeue that by that meanes they cal the spirit, which done, they take a certaine wood, wherof no man knoweth the vertue but onely them∣selues, wherewith they rub their mouthes and throats, so long vntil they cast al what∣so••u••r they haue within their stomackes, and with so great force, that oftē times they cast forth bloud, mean time stamping, stam∣mering, calling▪ and knocking with theyr feete against the earth, with a thousande other toyes needlesse to rehearse.

Cub••gua, or Margaritha.

CVbagua or Margaritha is the Island of pearles, and is in compasse three miles, lying vnder twelue degrees and a halfe, vp∣on the north side of the Equinoctiall line, foure miles from the point 〈◊〉〈◊〉, a coun∣t•••• wherein there is much salt, & although the grounde is both flat and euen, yet it is vnfruitfull and drie, both without water and trees, and wherein there is little els found, then onely Comes, and some Sea foules. The inhabitants paint theyr bodies, they eate the oysters wherein the Pearles are founde, and fetch all their fresh water from the firme land, giuing pearles for it: there is not any Island in the world so smal as it is, that hath raised so much profit, and made both the inhabitants and strangers rich, as this hath doone, for that the pearles which in few yeares hath bin brought from thence, doe amount vnto aboue two milli∣ons of gold, although thereby many Spani∣ards and slaues haue lost their liues.

From the point •• Arya to the Cape de Salines, that is, to the poynte of the Salt pans, are seuentie miles, & between them ly∣eth Ca••be, and the Cape de tres Puntas, which is the Cape of three poynts: from the Cape de Salines to Punto Auegado, that is, the drowned hauen, are more then seuentie miles, and the ceast running along by the gulfe of Pa••a, the lande maketh with the Island Trinidad.

Paria.

IN the mouth of the gulfe of Paria, lyeth the Island la Trinidad, taking the name from a certaine promise made by Columbus in his second voyage, in An. 1497. being in danger, or because he first perceiued three hilles, seeking for fresh water, his people in a maner dying with thirst. The mouth of this gulf was called os Draconis, y^t is, the Dra∣gons mouth, because of the great streame that runneth therein. The whole countrey and shore of Paria stretching towardes the South, is the goodliest country in all India, and the fruitfullest, as Benzo and Colum∣bus both doe witnesse, so that by some it is called the earthly Paradice: it is a great, flatte, and euen land, ouerflowing and a∣boundant of all things, alwaies bring forth flowers of sweete and vnsweete sauour. The trees continually greene, as it were in May or lent, but not many fruitfull or wholsome trees, and in some places thereof is great aboundance of Cassia Fistula, the whole countrey is generally hot and moist, whereby there are diuers wormes, among the which are many Mytes, which by night fall verie heauily vpon the people, and ma∣ny grashoppers, that doo much hurt, the in∣habitants beare there members in a goord or reede, as it were in a sheath, letting their stones hang out, before the Spaniards came into the countrey, they wore such kind of codpeeces bordered with gold & pearles, and such like things, which custome the Spaniards made them to leaue: the marrt∣ed women couer their secret parts with an apron, by them called Pampanillas, and the maides tie a peece of cotten before their bellies, their kings haue as many wiues as they will▪ yet one of them is accounted for the right Queene, and hath commandement ouer all the rest: the common people haue three or foure, as they think good, and when they are olde they put them away, and take yong for them. They likewise let theyr Pi∣acchos or priests he with their gentlewo∣men and their maids the first night of the marriage. This people, as also most part of the Indians, maintaine themselues with fish, and wine made of Ma••z which is with them in ••eede of corne, and also with other fruits and rootes, as all the rest of the Ca∣ribes do, and some eate Lice, Apes, Meere∣cats,

Frogs, Wormes, and such vnprofita∣ble things as those of Cumana, they vse a kinde of salue, to make their teeth black like those of Cumana, which is made in this ma∣ner: they take shels wherein the pearles are sound, with the leaues of the trée called Axis, (the fruit of the which tree they eate continually al the yeare like sauce or pep∣per) which they burne together, and beeing burnt, they put a little water vnto it, wher∣with the white looketh like chalke, with the which salue they make their teeth as black as coles, and therewith preserue them from ach, their bodyes are painted red and blacke, with colours made of the iuice of Hearbes, and the filthier it sheweth, the fairer they estéeme it to bee. Their beddes are like nettes made of cotten, which they make fast to twoo bordes, and therein they sleepe. Sleeping in the fields they haue on the one side of their beddes a fire, to warme them in the night: their weapons are ar∣cowes, made either of reeds or palme wood, whereon they putte sharpe stones or bones in place of iron, which they smeere with pitch, which is a most cruel poyson, made of rootes, hearbs, Antes, fruites, and certaine stinking iuice, which the olde women do ve∣rie diligently seethe with snakes bloud, with the venimous aire whereof many of them die while they seethe it, if any man be struc∣ken with an arrow that is new dipt there∣in, theyr bodye presently swelleth, and they die with al speede, in a manner rauing, and when the poyson is olde, it looseth the grea∣test parte of the strength: the remedie a∣gainst such poyson, is to thrust a hot bur∣ning iron into the wound: all the slaues that the Spaniards take out of this coun∣try, they carrie them into the countrey of Cubag••a, burning them in the foreheades with a letter C. whom they keepe for fishers or pearles, by which meanes many of them are carried out of the Island, whereby at this present it is almost desolate, for that the fishing for pearle is there almost clean done, and the gold consumed, which maketh the Spaniards not to esteeme of that place.

Hereafter followeth the description of the coast of Paria, to the straights of Magellanes.

FRom Punto Anegado which lyeth vn∣der eight degrees, are fiftie miles, to Rio Dulce, which lieth vnder sixe degrees: from Rio Dulce, that is, the sweet riuer, to R••ode O••ellana, which is called Rio de la Ama∣zones is 110. miles, so that there is accoun∣ted eight hundred Spanish miles, or 3200. Italian: from Nombre de Dios along to the coast of the Riuer Orellana, which cun∣neth into the sea, (as it is saide) hauing fif∣téene miles in the breadth of the entrie, and most vnder the Equinoctial line. From this Riuer I will shew the coast as it lieth, yet first I must tel you the riuers, & their names that lie betweene it and Pun••o Anegado, first Rio Grando, the great Riuer, then Rio Dulce, the sweete riuer, Rio de Canoas, the Riuer of Canos. Canoas are scutes, by the Indians made out of peeces of wood, which they make hollow, and therewith they fish in the riuers, Capo de Corrientes, the point of the streame, Aldea the village, Capo de los Farillon••z, the point of the cliffes, Rio de Ancones, the riuer of the open hauens, Rio de Laga••tos, the riuer of y^e Crocadiles, Rio de vincente P••••zon, Rio de Cacique, the K. riuer: for Cacici in Indian speech is Kings. Costa Braua the wild poynt, Capo de Cor∣rientes, Rio de Caribes, the riuer of Caribes, or eaters of men. Rio de Canoas, Rio de Arboledas, the riuer of bowes, Rio de Mon∣tanna, the riuer of the hill, Rio Apercella∣do, the riuer of the Bankes, Bayha de Ca∣noas, the bay of Canaos, or Scutes, Atalaya sentinel or watch, Rio dos Fumos, y^e riuer of Smoke, Rio de Pracellet, y^e riuer of banks, Capo de North, the North point. And there being past that point, the great riuer Oreg∣liana (in Spanish Orellana▪) runneth forth which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the greatest riuer in India or in all the world, some called this riuer the sweete sea, it is at the mouth or entrie fifteene Spa∣nish miles broade, there are some that said this riuer and the Riuer of Maragnon, which hereafter shall follow, haue all one head or spring from Quito by Mullubamba, & then this riuer runneth vnder the Equi∣noctial line at the least 1500. spanish miles, as Orellian & his companions recite, that came out of Peru from the south sea, cleane ouerwhart the countrey through this riuer, with great hunger & much trouble, and so entred into the north sea, not that it runneth straight outright, but crooking and compas∣sing in and out, which maketh it so long a iourney, for that from the head of this riuer to the sea it is but seuen hundred Spanish miles, to trauaile right forth ouer the coun∣try. This Riuer within the land is in some places foure and some fiue miles broade, making many Islands. The common opi∣nion is, that vpon this riuer there dwelleth women that burne off their right breasts, that they be not hundred therby to shoote in bowes, which they vse in the warres: by the ancient writers they were called Amazons, and had a great parte of Asia vnder theyr

subiection: from the riuer Orellana, to the Riuer Marannon, or Maragnon, are 100. miles, which in the mouth or entry is 15. miles broad, & lyeth vnder 3, degrees, on the southside of the Equinoctial line, in it also are many Island: thereabouts likewise there groweth good Frankensence, which is estee∣med better then that of Arabia, & there also were founde certain Emeralds, and tokens of gold, with other riches. They make wine of diuers kinds of fruit, specially of great dates, in quantity as big as spanish Quin∣ces, which is verie good & may be kept, the men weare iewels at their eares, and thrée or foure rings through their lips, which they likewise s••t, as a beautifying vnto them, they sleep in beds stretched abroad and made fast to trees, a good height from the ground, without any couerlets, as all the Indians from Nombre de Dios, & so to the straights of Magellana vse to do. There are in this ri∣uer filthy flies which make men lame, being bitten or stinged by them, vnlesse they doo presently pul out the stings: there are ma∣ny of opinion that this Riuer M••ragnon, and the aforesaide Riuer of Orellana, doo both spring out of the countrey of Peru, but no man knoweth the certaintie thereof. From Maranhon to tetra de Humos, or Fu∣mous, that is, the country of Smoke, where the line parteth is 100. miles, & from thence to Angla di S. Lucar, are 100. miles, and from thence to Cabo de S. Augustin, lying vnder 8. degrées and a halfe, on the South side of the Equinoctial line are 70. miles, the length of the coast from the riuer of Marag∣non to Cabo de S. Augustin, is as followeth, first an Island called Isla de S. Sebastian. A∣cenc••o Ascension: P. de Pracell, the hauen of Bankes: P. de Corrientes, the hauen of the Streame, Rio de Il••ieo, the riuer of y^e Is∣lands, Costa Branca, the white coast, Rio de Coroa the riuer of the Crowne, Cabo del este, the Easter coast, Rio des Lixos, the ri∣uer of filth, Rio dos Reciffes, the riuer of cliffes, Rio S. Miguel, the riuer of saint Mi∣chael, Bahya dos ••ortugos, the Riuer of Torteeux, Grand Bahya, the great Bay, Cabo de S. Roque, the point of S. Roche, Cabo de S. Raphael, the poynt of S. Rapha∣el, Baya de Traicam, the Bay of Treason, Paraiba os Petiguares, Pernambuco, the Cape of S. Augustin was discouered in An. 1500.* 1.14 by Vincentio, Ianes Pinzon, in the first month of the yeare.

Brasilia.

NOw followeth the East prouince of A∣merica, or of Peruana commonly called Brasil the which was most discouered by the Portingales, and by them subdued and brought vnder subiection, they had therein from North to south, 40. miles, and from East to West 160. miles, which stretching along by the coast, is more then 700. miles. This country hath the name of Brasilia, by reason of the great aboundance of red brasil wood which from thence is brought into these countryes: in this countrey are manie prouinces and sundrie people, some subiect to the Portingales, & some to the French∣men, as Marga••atan, Taba••arren, Oueta••a∣ten, Tououpi••ambaultiem, and Morpions, all cruel Indians, and most of them Cani∣bals, whereof in the description of the coast we make mention: not far from the Cape S. Augustin, lyeth Pernambuco, a place where the Portingales haue great traffike for su∣gar and Brasil wood. This cape lyeth vnder eight degrees and a halfe, on the south side of the Equinoctiall line, and was discouered by Vincente Ianes Pinzon, in the yeare of our Lord, 1500. in the moneth of Ianuary, and is the neerest place to Affrica or Spain, of al the country of America, for y^t it is ac∣counted but 500. miles from this pointe to Cabo Verde in Affrica, the common recko∣ning of the sea Cards, yet some esteeme it to be lesse. From this cape to Baia de todos Sanctos, lying vnder 13. degrees, are 100. miles: between the which two places, I let passe S. Alexio, S. Miguel, Rio de Aguada, that is, the riuer of watering, Rio di Fran∣cisco, Rio de cana Fistola, because in that place there groweth much Cassia, such as is in Egypt, Rio Real the kings riuer, Rio de Tapuan A. Pouoacam, the village or commom assemblie, &c. after the which fol∣loweth the Baya de todos Sanctos, From this bay to the Cape dos Abrollios, or dos Baixos, that is, the Cape of the droughts, which lieth vnder 18. degrees, are 100. miles, and between them lieth these places, Rio de S. Giano, that is the riuer of S. Iulian, os Ilhos, the Islands, Rio de S. Antonio, Rio de S. Crus, P. Seguro, the sure hauen, Rio de Brasil, Rio de Caruelas, &c.

Margaiates.

MArgaiates are certaine people mingled with the Portingales, & are Canibals, the country wherin they dwel is gran both in winter and summer, as it is with vs in May and Iune, both men and women go naked, as they come out of their mothers wombes, painting themselues with blacke strikes, like the Tartarians. The men shaue themselues like Friers, they make

holes in their nether lippes, wherein they weare certaine greene polished Iasper stones, wherewith they shutte and open the holes: which stones they weare for a great ornament, which notwithstanding being taken out of the holes, maketh them shew most vgly, as it they had two mouthes one ouer the other: the women lette their haires grow long like our women, and bore not their lippes, but make holes in theyr eares, wherein they hang certaine white bones, which hang as low as their shoul∣ders. This countrey yeeldeth much Brasill wood, from the Cape dos Baixos, to Cape Frio, which lyeth like an Island, are an hundred miles: betweene these two places lye many riuers and hauens, specially these, P. del Agnado, Rio Dulce, Re••os Magos Spirito Sancto, where the Portingales haue a Castle, which the Margarites or Barbarians call Moab: from Moab you come to Tapenury, where there lieth cer∣taine Islands friends vnto the Frenchmen, from thence you come to Paraiba people that dwell in cottages made like ouens. From thence passing along the coast, you come to certaine running sandes, wherea∣bouts also are certaine cliffes, that iutte in∣to the sea, whereunto the sailors are to take great regard. Right against those shalowes or flattes, there lyeth an euen or flat land, about twentie miles great, inhabited by the Ouetacaters most cruel Barbarians.

Ouetacates.

THis people make warres, not onely a∣gainst their neighbours, but also one a∣gainst the other, as likewise aga••nst al stran∣gers. They suffer no man to deale or traf∣fike with them, and being hardly besette by the enemies (although neuer ouercome) they can runne so fast away, that they seeme in a manner to surpasse the wild Hart, as it is seene by their hunting of wild beasts. They go naked like other Brasilians, and let their haire grow long, downe to the middle of their bodies, cōtrary to al other Brasilians: yet they cut it away on the fore part of their heades, and behinde in their neckes, as the rest doo. These cruel Canibals dwel in a smal, but an inuincible countrey: they eate raw flesh like dogs and wolues, they haue a seueral speech different from their neigh∣bours, and because of their cruelty they haue but little of our wares brought vnto them, and that they haue, they get it in exchange, for certaine gréene feathers. This exchange is done one standing distant from the other at the least an hundred paces, shewing each other their wares without speaking one word, and each of them laying their wares in a certaine place appointed: they take it away, giuing no longer credite one to the other, then for the time that they haue ex∣changed their wares: after that beeing re∣turned to their places, they to then best to rob each other of his marchandise, wherein the Ouetacaters, running faster then the o∣ther, and faster then hounds, do oftentimes win the prise. Being past this countrey of the Ouetacaters, you come to another pro∣uince called Maq-He, which is likewise in∣habited by cruel Barbarians, which neuer∣thelesse cannot sleepe nor rest in peace, for their bad neighbours the Ouetacater••. Vp∣on this coast lyeth a great high sienie rocke made like a tower, whereon when the sun shineth, it glisters like Sinarag••u•• whereby many haue thought it to be a recke of Sina∣ragdus stones, and therefore by the French∣men and Spaniards it is called M••nsis, that is, Sinaragdu••. It is not possible neither by ship nor on foote, to get vnto that reck, be∣cause of the cliffes wherewith it is compas∣sed, and being by it, there is no wayes or meanes to get vpon it. About this country lyeth three small vnhabited Islandes, cal∣led Maghensis full of birdes, which are so tame, that mē take them with their hands, and kil them with staues. From thence you go to Cape Frio, a verie good hauen, & well knowne by meanes of the French traffike, whereabouts the ••ou••up••nambau••••, friendes to the Frenchmen doo inhabite: a∣bout this Cape are many great whales, in Latine called Prestis, and in Duch Sword∣fishes, yet they are no sword fishes, for that their Iawes are full of teeth like Sawes. There are likewise on this Cape manie Parrats, in as great aboundance as crowes with vs: about this Cape lyeth the creeke by the Barbarians called Ganabara, and by the Portingales Rio de Gane••r•• because it was discouered in the first moneth of the yeare, and the Bayase••moza: this creeke is wel knowne to the Frenchmen, because they traffike thither, and therin had made a fort, it lyeth vnder three & twentie degrees, on the South side of the Equinoctial line. right vnder Tropicus Capricor•• it is in the entrie sixe Spanish miles broad, and further in but three or foure miles broad, and there lyeth smaller hils then at the en∣trie. The mouth of this creeke is verie dan∣gerous, for that if you leaue the sea, you must saile by three vnhabited Islandes, where it is great fortune but the ships doo strike in peeces vppon the rocks and cliffes: you must likewise passe before a pointe, not

aboue three hundred paces broade, which hangeth from a high hil, hauing the form of a Piramides, which not onely seemeth verie great, but far off shewing as if it were made by mans art, which by reason of the round∣nesse, as also because it is like a tower, is by the Frenchmen called le pot de Buere, that is, the Butter potte: a little further in the creeke is an euen rock, about a hundred and twenty paces great, by the Frenchmen called R••tier or Mouse fall, to which Vil∣lagagno at his first arriuall brought all his necessaries and prouision, thinking thereon to build a fort, but the waues droue him backe againe: about halfe a mile further lieth the Islande wherein the Frenchmen did dwell, which before their arriuall was not inhabited, and is in compasse about a thousand paces, yet the breadth is six times more then the length, all compassed about with cliffes, as also with water, in such sort, that the shippes cannot come at it but with great danger, onely in one place, and that with small boates, whereby it appeareth that this Island by reason of the situation, is very strong: on both sides of this Island there standeth a little hill, whereupon the Gouernour had made his house, and on a Rocke about fiftie or sixtie foote high in the middle of the Islande, hee had placed his Court or Castle called Coligni, in honour of the Admirall of France, that had sent him thither. In other plaine fieldes about the same, were the rest of the Frenchmens hou∣ses made rounde, and couered with leaues or boughes, being in all about eighty men. 10000. paces, or two Spanish miles and ½ further from this Island, lyeth another ve∣rie fruitfull Island, in compasse about thrée French miles, called the great Island, inha∣bited by Tououpinamba••••i••s, great friends to the Frenchmen, to whome they often∣times went to fetch meale and other neces∣saries: there are likewise in this creeke many other small and vnhabited Islandes, where there are many good oysters, the Barbarians diue vnder the water, & with theyr hands bring vp certaine great stones, whereat there hangeth great numbers of Oysters, and so fast cleued to the stone, that they can hardly gette them off, verie good to eate, some of them hauing small Pearles within them: they are by the Barbarians called Leripes. This water is ful of strange fishes, specially Barbels and Sea Swine: there are likewise whales with verie fatte and thicke skinnes: there runneth likewise into this creeke out of the middle part of the land, two fresh riuers, vppon both the sides whereof lyeth many villages of the Bar∣barians: tenne or fiftéene miles further a∣long the coast, towards the riuer de Plata, or the straights of Magellana, there is ano∣ther great creeke, by the Frenchmen called Vasarum, whereunto they vse to saile, as they do to the other which they first took in.

Hereafter followeth the manner and customes of the people.

THe Toupinambaultii are not much vn∣like our people, well proportioned of bo∣die and limbe, but stronger and healthsom∣er then wee, and lesse subiect vnto sicknes: among them are found fewe lame cripples, blinde, or mishapen men, although there are of them that liue to the age of an hundred and twenty yeares, accounting their yeares by the Moones, fewe of them likewise ha∣uing gray haires, which is a certaine signe of the temperatenes of that land, as hauing no extream cold, nor excessiue heate, hauing greene trées, hearbes, and fields al the yeare through, and because they liue without care they shew alwaies of one age, for they haue no hurtful poyson nor foule water to drink, whereby all diseases do grow: they haue likewise no passions or afflictions of minde in their countreyes, which mooue, vexe, and consume both the spirits and bodyes, as not knowing of any fauours, couetous desires, chidings, hate, or enuie, which (but to our shame) consumeth the Christians. As tou∣ching the colour of their bodyes, they are not altogether blacke, but browne like the Spaniards, because of the heate of the sim: they go al naked as they came out of theyr mothers wombes, not once shaming therat, vnlesse it be at bankets, or when they goe to warres: there are some of them that bind two great leaues together, therewith to co∣uer theyr priuie members, not so much for their credite, but because they haue either some deformity, or else disease therin, which oftentimes happeneth among them, they are not rough nor hairie, as some men de∣scribe them, for they suffer no haire to hang vpon theyr bodyes, for that as soone as they perceiue it, they plucke it foorth either with theyr nayles, or sheeres, which they haue ei∣ther of the Frenchmen, or the Portingales, which they pull not onely from their chins, but also from their eye browes, eye liddes, which maketh them for the most part seeme feareful and vgly. The hinder part of theyr heades is couered with haire: the young boyes vntil they come to mans state, we are theyr haire from the crowne of the head, downe to theyr neckes, but al theyr fore∣heades shauen, as if it were a Friers

crowne, on the hinder part of their heades they let the haire grow, after the manner of our auncestors, which were all shorne only in their necks, and that was rounded. They haue likewise for a custome, that they bore holdes in their boyes vnderlippes, wherein they stick sharp bones, as white as Iuorie, which they take out and put in as often as they wil, and being older, they take away the bones, and in steed thereof weare greene Iaspis stones, being a kinde of bastard E∣merauld, inwardly flat, with a thick ende, because they shall not fall out: some weare such stones that are sharpe, and of a finger long, when they take out the stones, they play with their tongues in the hole, which is most vgly to beholde, for that it seemeth they haue twoo mouthes: some of them weare not onely this stone through theyr lips, but also through both their cheekes: touching their noses they are flat, which they cause to grow so by force when they are yong, cōtrary to vs, which desire straite noses, but they esteeme their flat noses for a beauty, they paint their bodies with manie colours, specially aboue al others, their legs with a blacke colour, with the sap of a cer∣taine hearbe by them called Genipat, so that a farre off they seeme to haue blacke bootes, or straight hose, like the priests in our coun∣tries, the blacknesse of this sap cleaueth so fast on, that if they wash themselues for the space of ten or fifteene daies together, yet it will hardly come off. They haue likewise necklaces of eight fingers long, made of bones, as white as Alablaster, which they call Iaci, according to theyr forme, which they putte vppon cotten strings, and weare them about theyr armes, as also other flatte and rounde bones, like sti∣uers, certaine peeces of money in Holland, which beeing bored through the middle, and hanged one by one vpon strings, they weare them in such sort as wee weare chaines of gold, which they call Bouze. Besides this, they make certaine rounde beades of blacke shining wood, which they tie together vpon strings, and weare them likewise about theyr neckes, which shine as blacke and glistering as if they were Iet. They haue likewise many Hennes of our coun∣treyes, which the Portingales brought thither, from the which they pull the small white fethers, which with irons they hacke and make soft, and then colour them redde: which done, they annoint their bodies with gum, and strow the feathers therein, wher∣by they looke like new hatched birds, wher∣of this opinion hath risen by some men that haue first gone into those Countries, and séeing them drest in that manner) that they wereso by nature. They dresse theyr foreheades with feathers of diuers colours, verie cunningly placed together, like the French gentlewomen, that ware periwigs of strange haire: these apparrels and orna∣ments of feathers and stones, as also the rattles wherewith they make a noyse, with their woodden halberdes, and many other things to them belonging, you may see at Doctor Paludanus house: those crownes on theyr heades they call Iempenambi, in theyr eares likewise they weare certaine white bones, not much vnlike those which the children weare in theyr lips.

In Brasilia there are certaine blacke Birdes like Crowes, by them called Tou∣can, which haue certaine rings about theyr neckes, of yellow and red feathers, which they flea, and drie the skinnes, and beeing drie, are likewise called Toucan, which they weare vppon each Cheeke, sticking them on with ware, and when they goe to warres, or to a banket, when they meane to kill a man and to eate him, according to their manner, because they will bee after the finest sort, they putte on that kinde of apparrell made of feathers, with hoodes vppon their heades, and thinges made of greene, redde, blewe, and other colours of feathers, about their armes verie cun∣ningly sette together, which by vs coulde not bee mended, shewing as if they were of wrought Veluet, as Paludanus can shewe you. Such feathers likewise they binde vppon theyr Halberdes, which are likewise almost like a blacke Spitte, Lappe of harde woodde, made redde or blacke.

They wearelikewise on their shoulders certain mantles of Eastrige feathers (which is a signe that they haue Eastriges) that are verie cunningly set together, and hang long about them, by them called A••aroy: such as wil among them be accounted manly and stout, & haue the report to haue killed & ea∣ten many men, they cut great slashes in their breasts, hips, and thighs, wherby they make the flesh to rise, which they couer with a cer∣tain pouder, and make them looke blacke, which colour neuer goeth off during theyr liues, wherby a farre off they seeme to haue cutte leather Ierkins on their bodies, such as the Switsers vse to weare. When they will holde any drunken feast, or daun∣cing, wherunto they are much giuen, to in∣crease their mirth, besides the great noyse and crie which they ordinarily make, they haue a certaine kind of hollow fruit, which Theretus calleth Ahonay, the pith where∣of

being taken out, some of them are filled with stones, and some without, and so are put vpon strings of cotten wooll, which they tie about their legs, dauncing therewith, as our iuglers and morice dauncers in these countreyes dance with belles: likewise they carrie in their hands certaine dryed goords, which they fil with stones, & hauing a sticke in the ende, make a noyse therewith, as our children doo with a blather full of stones: which instrument with them is called Ma∣raca: the women go naked like the men, and pul away their haire from the eyebrowes, and eyelids, but weare it on theyr heades like our women, which they wash and comb derie often, and tie it vp with redde cotten hairelaces, as our country women vse to do, but most parte of them vse to lette it hang downe about theyr shoulders, wherin they take great pleasure: the women neyther bore lips nor cheekes, but onely their eares, with so wide holes, that a man may thrust his finger through, in thē they hang certain long things, which reach vnto their breasts or shoulders, like bloudhoundes or water spanels eares. They paint their faces with all kinds of colours, which their neighbors and other women do for them: in the middle of the cheeke they make a rounde circle, drawing lines from it of diuers colours, vn∣till theyr face is ful, not leauing so much vn∣done as the eye liddes: they weare brace∣lets of white bones, cut thin like plates, ve∣ry cunningly ioyned together with wax and gum, & also white necklaces, which they cal Bonze, & weare them not about their necks like the men, but onely their armes, for the which cause they are verie desirous of the glasse beades of all colours such as we haue here in these countries, by them caled Mau∣robi, it is to be wondered at, that if any ap∣parrel be giuen vnto thē, they wil not weare it, excusing themselues & saying that it is not their custome, but had rather weare stones & other things vppon their bodies, then such cloathes: they haue a custome that in euery riuer where they come, they steepe vnto the water and wash their hands, & many times they duck into the water at y^t least ten times a day, to wash themselues like birds, and if they were apparrelled & should put it off as often as they do so, it would be ouer trouble∣some vnto them: likewise the women slaues being compelled to weare cloathes, many euenings to pleasure themselues, doo put off theyr cloathes, smock, and all, and so runne naked about the countrey: I must speake somewhat of their little children, of the age of foure or fiue yeares old, which be∣ing fat of body, with white bones in theyr lips, their haire shorne, and their bodyes painted, runne playing in great numbers a∣bout the countrey leaping and dauncing, most wonderfull and verie pleasant to be∣hold: & lastly it is to be noted, that many are of opinion, that the nakednesse of their wo∣men should be an occasion to prouoke them vnto lust, which notwithstanding is found contrary, for that by reason of their vnseem∣ly nakednesse, the men rather haue a loa∣thing then a lust, and to the contrarie, the great and costly apparrell, as gownes and peticoates, counterfeit haire, the sumptuous dressing of the head, the chaines and brace∣lets of gold, which our women vse, do more prouoke and intice men vnto lust, then sim∣ple nakednes, although it is against the or∣dinance of God, and therfore not to be com∣mended, as not beeing conuenient, but as therein they goe beyonde the limits of Gods worde, our women also doo passe the boundes of godly matrones, and sinne no lesse then they in such he athenish cu∣stomes.

Of the meate and drinke of the Brasilians.

THe Brasilians haue twoo sorts of rootes, called Aypi and Maniot, which béeing planted, in three or foure Mo∣neths become a foote and a halfe long, and as bigge as a mans thigh, which beeing taken out of the earth, are by the women dryed by the fire vppon a Boucano, and then grated vppon sharpe stones, as wee doo Nutmegs, whereof proceedeth a cer∣taine white meale, and being moyst, is of taste like our newe starch, which to pre∣pare, they haue great earthen Pots, where∣in they seethe it, stirring it continually, vntill it bee as thicke as pappe, yet they make twoo kindes of meale, one sodden till it bee harde, which they call Ouyentan, that is, hard meale, which because it will continue long, is carried with them into the warres, the other is lesse sodden, and somewhat softer, called Ouypou, that is, soft meale, which tasteth like white bread bran, specially when it is eaten fresh, and although both these kindes of meale bee∣ing fresh, are of a verie good taste, and strong meate, yet are they not fit to make bread, they may well knead it as wée doo wheats or rie, and it will bee verie white, but be∣ing baked, it wil on the out side burne and become drie, and inwardly continue meals as it was at the first: with the broth of fat

flesh. They make good pappe thereof, verie pleasant of taste, seeming like sodden ryce, by them called Mingant, with their hands they presse certaine iuice out of this roote, which is as white as milke, which being putte in earthen pots and set in the sunne, it runneth together like curds, which they put into ear∣then dishes, & frie them as we do egs. The roote Aypi is much vsed to be rosted and ea∣ten, as being soft, and tasteth like chesnuts, the other must be made into meale and sod∣den, otherwise it is dangerous to be eaten: both the steeles of the rootes are not much vnlike each other, being as great as a small iuniper tree, and leaues like Poenie, the strangenesse of these rootes consisteth in the great numbers, for that the branches (that are as brickle as the stalkes of hemp) beeing broke into diuers peeces, and so thrust déepe into the earth, without any other vsage, within three or foure months after do bring forth great quantities of those rootes: they haue likewise much Indian wheate, by thē called Anati, and by others Maiz, whereof they make meale, which they bake and eat. Touching their drinke, which they make of those two rootes, and also of Maiz, it is made in this sort by their women, being of opini∣on, that if it should wee done by men, that it would haue no taste. They cut the rootes in smal peeces, as we do turnops, which they seeth in yellow pots vntil they be soft, which done they set them from the fire, and then set themselues round about the pots, chaw∣ing the sodden rootes, which they throw in∣to another pot made ready for the purpose, and set vpon the fire, wherein they are sod∣den once againe, and continually stirred, vntil they thinke them to be inough, which done, they are poured into other fattes made of reedes, not being clarifyed, and a third time sodden and skimmed, they couer the reedes, and keepe it to drinke, as their maner is, and as hereafter I will shew you: in the same manner the women make a drinke of Maiz or Indian wheate, which they call C••ou-in thicke and troubled, in a manner tasteth like milke, and because this Maiz and rootes are there in great aboundance they make as much drinke as they wil, which is by them likewise done, kéeping it til they come altogether to drink, and whē they come to the drunken feasts, and that they meane to kil a man and eate him, thē the women make fiers about the vesseles, wherby the drink becommeth warme, and then it is first drawne, and the women fil∣ling a goord halfe ful, giue it to the men as they are dauncing, which they drink at one draught, and that so often and so long, that they emptie al theyr vessels, as Letio him∣selfe hath seene (from whom I gathered this discourse) that for the space of three dayes they haue done nothing but drinke, and ne∣uer ceased, and being so ful that they coulde beare no more, yet would they not leaue off, but still kéepe companie: at those drin∣kings they are merrie, singing, leaping, dancing, and exhorting each other to be va∣liant in armes, and to kill many of their e∣nemies. That done, they runne one after the other like cranes in their flight, leaping vntill al theyr vesselles are emptie, at the which feasts, especially when they meane to kill and eate a man, they are dressed in fine feathers and w^t necklaces, and bracelets: in theyr daunces there are no women coupled with them, but euery one daunceth by him∣selfe, and these drinkings are obserued whē those of one village meete together, and neighbours drinke one with the other, sit∣ting in theyr hanging beds, but with more good fellowship, wherewith there are twoo things to be considered, first, that the Bra∣silians do neuer drinke when they eate, as we do, nor when they drinke, they neuer eate: secondly, that they eat without word speaking, and if they haue any thing to say each vnto other, they do it after their meat, they vse likewise no certaine houre to eate in, but when they are hungrie they fall to their meate, as well by night as by day, yet they are verie sober in eating, washing hands and mouthes both before and after meate, which I thinke they doo to take the clamines of the meat off from their fingers.

Of certain great beasts and Crocadiles in Brasilia.

FIrst you must vnderstand that in al Bra∣silia there is not any foure footed beasts like these in our countries, they haue great numbers of one kind which they cal Tapi∣rouslou, of a midle stature, between a cow & an asse, this beast hath reddish & long haire, like a cow, but hath no hornes, and a shorter neck, long & hanging eares, smaller and lon∣ger legs, a whole foot like an asse, so that it is not wrong named to be called a cow asse, yet different from both, first because it hath a short taile (as many beasts in America haue no tailes at al) & sharpe téeth; yet with∣out any corage, for it runs from a man: the Brasilians shoot at this beast with their ar∣rowes, or else take them in pits, which they dig for the purpose, & esteeme much of it, be∣cause of the skin: they hauing fleyed it off, they cutte the hide in rounde péeces, which they drie in the Sunne, whereof they make buklers, wherwith they defend them

selues from the enemies arrowes, for that by reason of the heate of the sunne they be∣come so harde, that no arrow will pierce them, be they neuer so fiercely drawne. The flesh of the beast tasteth much like our bores flesh, and by the Brasilians it is rosted vpon the coales, and so kept, for that because they haue no salt, they al broyle theyr meat vpon woodden gardirons, and so kéepe it: in euery village you finde such girdirons, which of∣tentimes he ful of mens flesh. Secondly, they haue a certaine kinde of Hart, by them called Seouaslous, yet lesse then ours, and with shorter hornes, with long haire like goates: and wilde American Swine, by them called ••aroslou, which is as bigge of bodye, eares, head, and feete, as ours are, as also the like teeth, which are verie dange∣rous, but because it is leaner and ranker, and grinneth fearefully, therefore it is mis∣shapen. This beast by nature hath a hole in the backe, as the sea Swine haue in theyr heades, whereat they receiue and cast foorth theyr breath. There is likewise a fine colou∣red beast, called Agouti, which is a kind of hart, with clouen feete, a shorte taile, with a nose and cares much like a hare, very plea∣sant and sauorie of taste: there are also two or thrée kindes of beasts called Tapitis, not much vnlike our hares, red of haire: in the woods are great rats, of body and haire like Ekehornes, in tast not much vnlike our co∣nies, Pag. or Pague, a beast of the height and greater thē an indifferent Grayhound, with an euil fauored head, a faire skin, speckled white and blacke, of taste much like veale. There is likewise another beast called Sa∣rigoy, which because it stinketh, y^e Barbari∣ans wil not eate, yet it is good & sauory flesh, specially when the fat of the kidnies (wherin the stinke lieth) is taken away. There are also Tatous or Armadillen, wherof in other places I haue spoken, which are of very white, good, and sauorie flesh: also there are certaine Crocadiles, which they cal Iacare, as big as a mans leg, and indifferent long, not hurtfull, they come into their houses, where the children play with them without any danger. The Crocadiles in those coun∣tries haue a wider mouth, high feet, y^e taile neither round nor sharp, but very thin at the end: ther are likewise diuers kinds of Easts speckled like our little ones, & of foure or fiue foot long, in thicknes correspondent, feareful to behold, but keepe in riuers & moores like frogs, doing no hurt, they cal them Touous: being sleyed & soddē, they surpasse al meates for taste & goodnes, their flesh being as white as a capons flesh, sweet, short, & excellēt good. They haue great toades, which the Toupi∣nambauiltu eate whole being rosted, so that they are not poyson like our toades, they eat likewise snakes of the bignesse of a mans arme, & fiue foote long, but of no great taste, ther are also many other snakes, specially in the riuers, that are as gréen as grasse, long & thin, whose sting is very dangerous: there are also in some meeres of woods, diuers great and dangerous Easts. Iohanes Lerus writeth, that passing through a wood, he met an East, as bigge as a mans bodye, & of fiue or six foot long, al couered with white scales like oyster shels, which lifted vp one of her forefeete, and casting vp her head, looked vp∣on him with staring eyes, breathing at the mouth most feareful to beholde, and after he and his companie had stayed a quarter of an houre to behold it, it clome vp y^e hil with such a noise ouer and through the trées, that not any Hart running through the wood, could make a greater noyse. There is yet in this countrey another kind of strange beast caled Ian-ouare, feeding only vpon the pray: this beast for length of legs and swiftnes, is like the Grayhound, but vnder the chinne it hath a beard or certain long haire, & a speck∣led skin, like a Linx, and in other parts not vnlike the Linx: this beast is much feared by the Brasilians, for that whatsoeuer it ta∣keth, it teareth it in peeces, and spoyleth it like a Lion, feeding therof: the Indians take this beast in pits, & to reuenge themselues, they cause her therin to pine to death, wher∣by they double her paine. Méerecats are there in great aboundance, that are small & blacke, by them called Cay, and among the rest, one kind of Méerecat called Sagouin. of a verie fayre coloured haire, as big, and of haire as an Ekehorne, but as touching the forme of the chaps, breast, and necke & other parts, altogither like a lion, being one of the airest little beastes in al that country, but for the tendernes therof it cannot be brought ouer sea. There is yet another very strange beast, by the Indians caled Hay. as big as a dog, with a face like a Méerecat, & a hanging belly like a sow that hath new farrowed▪ of haire dark white, al black, with a long taile, with rough feet like a beare, long clawes, when it lieth in y^e woods, it is very wild, but if they take it, it will be tamed, the naked Tououpinambaultiers play not willingly with it, because it hath verie sharpe clawes: no man (as the Indians say) did euer sée this beast wild or tame, to eate any thing, but as they think, it liueth by y^e aire, wherof I haue spokē in other places. Lastly there is yet another strange beast called Coaty, as high as a Hare, with short & speckled haire, smal sharpe eies, a head very smal, & downe

from the eies a snout that riseth vp, of a foote long & more, round like a stick, & somewhat smal at the end, in such maner, that it is al of one bignesse, with so narrow a mouth, that a man can hardly thrust his little finger therein, very strange to behold: and being taken, it pulleth all his foure feete together and falleth either vppon the one side or the other, and wil not rise, vnlesse they giue it mice, whereof it liueth in the wood: this countrey aboundeth with al kinde of foule, whereof some are to be eaten, and some not, as Indian Hens, by them called Arignow Oussou, and common hennes of these coun∣tryes, first brought thither by the Portin∣gales, and among them the white hens are much esteemed, to pull out their feathers, and to die them red, therwith to dresse them∣selues, yet they eat them not, thinking like∣wise that their egs are poyson, which they feare, because they see the Frenchmen eate them: whereby it commeth that in the vil∣lages where no strangers traffike, there are so great numbers of hens, that you may buy one for a penie: besides the hens, they bring vp many duckes, which they cal Vpec but because they are of this minde, that if they should eate such slow birdes, they shuld like∣wise become slow, and so might be taken by theyr enemies, therefore they eate none of them, nor any other beast that goeth softly, nor fishes that swim slowly. There are like∣wise many speckled hens, of three sorts, all blacke, with white spots, verie pleasant of tast, like pheasants: there are also two kinds of faire cocks called Moutor, as great as pecockes, speckled with white spots, and black feathers. Macocaua & Yamboun-O∣uaslou. are two kindes of partriges, as big as ducks, and of taste like pheasants, wood Doues, Turtledoues, and yet another kind of partriges, al of one tast: of foules that are not eaten, there are many, as diuers kindes of parrats, wherof some are so faire, that fai∣rer cannot be found, specially 2. sorts, called Aras & Canide, the feathers wherof they vse for their apparell, hats, & arme bands. They haue verie faire redde, blewe, and gold yel∣low shining feathers, whereof diuers of them sing. Besides those, they haue foure other kindes of Parrots, whereof one kinde is very little brought hither, by them cal∣led Aa••ourous, which haue theyr heades parted in thrée colours, as redde, yellow, and violet, the wings all redde, the taile long and yellow, and the body greene, which learne so perfectly to speake, as if it were men: wee reade of one that when it was bidden, would daunce, skippe, sing, and play all the parts of the wilde Barbari∣ans: being carried with them into the wars & commanded to be stil, it would be as quiet as if it had beene dumbe, neither stirring soot nor tongue: such Parrats as are brought hither, they call Marganas, and estéeme them not, for they are as common there, as pigeons with vs, which although they haue a certaine harde flesh like heathcocks, yet there are many of them eaten in those coun∣tryes: there are likewise little Parrots, which are brought hither, but among the cheefe foules of that countrey, there is a very smal bird called Toucan, as big as a pigeon, blacke like a Rauen, onely the breast, which is yellow, with a round red ring about her necke, as I saide in another place, which they weare vppon theyr cheekes, specially when they go to any feastes or dauncings, whereupon it hath the name of Toucan-Tabourace, that is, the feathers to daunce with: the bil of this bird is greater then all the body, and is one of the strangest things that euer was seene: there is another of the greatnesse and colour like a Merlin, onelie vpon the breast, which is as redde as an ore bloud, it is also by the Indians fleyed, and the skinne dried like the Toucan. which bird they call Panon: there is another like a Li∣ster, as red as scarlet, which they cal Quem∣pian.

I must not forget a wonderfull strange little bird, no bigger then a Scalebiter, or a horse flie, with white shining feathers, which hath so great and pleasant a voyce in singing, y^t it resembleth our nightingale, in such sort, y^e it may be said it wer impossible that out of so smal a body, there could issue so great a voyce, which bird by the Indians is called Gonambuch. There are yet many o∣ther kinds of birds, of colour red, white, vio∣let, & purple, &c. al much differing from ours, & needlesse to rehearse. There is one among the rest which the Indians do much regard, not suffering it to be hurt, or to be taken, as thinking it a bird of some secret diuination, it is as great as a pigeon, of a gray colour, crying verie heauily, which is heard more by night thē by day: the Touepinambaultii are of opinion, that those birdes are sent vnto them by theyr friendes that are dead, to bring them good newes, and prouoke and stirre them to bee of good courage against theyr enemies in the fielde, they thinke also, so they take good regard vnto this Birds song, and fortune to bee slaine in the warres, that after they are dead, they shal goe vnto theyr forefathers, beyond the hilles there for euer to be merry, and conti∣nually to dance: They certainely perswade themselues that those birdes bring newes

from their friendes, and that thereby they should be merrie, and of better courage, so that they take great regard vnto their cries. There are likewise in this countrey many battes as big as crowes, which by night en∣ter into the houses, and finding any man ly∣ing naked, they sucke the bloud out of their toes in great aboundance, whereof in ano∣ther place I wil say more. Their Bees are lesse then ours, like blacke flies, and make theyr honey in hollow Trées: the Indians haue good knowledge howe to gette theyr ware and theyr honey: they vse not the wax to burne, but onely to stoppe their reedes, wherein they keepe their feathers from the wormes. Touching smal wormes like flies or Mytes, as also scorpions and earth creui∣shes, which are hurtful vnto men, it is neede∣lesse to write: they haue diuers fishes, wher∣of many are common here with vs, as twoo sorts of Barbels, the one called Rurema. the other Parati, both beeing sodden or rosted, are of a verie good taste, which because they swimme in companicars, e by them killed with dartes, sometimes two or thrée toge∣ther. The meate or substance of those fishes is verie tender and short, wherefore the In∣dians drie them, and make flower & meale thereof. There are three other kinds of ve∣rie great fishes, wherof one is called Camo∣roupouy Ouassou, the other Ouara, the third Acara Ouassou, al veeie good of taste, & good to be eaten: there is a certaine kinde of flat fish, called Acarapep, which being sodden yeeldeth a certaine yellow fatte, which they keepe for sauce. This fish likewise is verie good meat, Acarabouten is a slymie fish of a redde colour, it is better then the other, but not so sauorie in the mouth, Pira-Ipochi is a long fish like an eele, but not to be eaten: the Rochets which are taken in the Créeke of Ganabara, and thereabouts in the sea, are much greater then ours, with twoo long hornes sticking out before, and fiue or sixe clawes in the belly, which men would think not to be natural, but rather artificiall, with a long thinne venomous taile. In their Ri∣uers are many strangs fishes, specially one called Tamouata, which is a handfull long, with a most great and monstrous head, others called Pana, Pana, which likewise hath a great and monstrous head, yet both good to eate and verie sauorie.

A description of certain trees and fruits in those countries.

FIrst there are many Brasil trées, wherby the country hath taken the name, this tree by them is called Araboutan, because of tha great and thick branches, not much vnlike our oakes, some of them are at the least three fadomes thicke, their leaues are like boxe or palmetrées, but yeelde no fruite, the wood would with great labour and paine be con∣uayed aboord the shippes, if the wild people did not helpe them, for the marchants shuld hardly lade a ship in a whole yeare, because of the hardnesse and troublesomenesse in the cleauing, as also that there are no beasts to draw or carrie it to the shippes, but must be brought downe by men, which for cloathes, shirts, hattes, kniues, and such like things, are hired to cleaue and rounde it, and to bring it out of the woods farre within the lande, vpon their shoulders, to the shippes: it is much burnt in that countrie, and is of nature dry, whereby when it it is burnt, it maketh little smoke, the ashes wherof yeeld a certaine red color: the Tououpinambaul∣tii wondered much what our men doe with all that wood, asking if there were no wood in our countreies for to burne, and answere was made vnto them, that we vsed it to die withall, as they died their ropes or strings: this is shewed in another place.

Beside this Brasill tree, there are fiue kindes of Palme trees, whereof the princi∣pall is called Gerau, the other Iri, of these trées I haue sufficiently declared in the Hi∣stories of the East Indies, as also in the de∣scription of the Affrican coast: there is a tree called Ayri, a kinde of Eban wood, with leaues, not much vnlike the palme trées, the body couered with thicke thornes, the fruite thereof indiffeeent great, wherein there is a pith as white as snow, but not good to eate: the wood is blacke and verie hard, whereof the Barbarians make theyr halbeards, col∣uen & arrowes, it is likewise so heauy, that it sinketh vnder the water: there is also much wood in this countrey, whereof some is yellow like Box, some violet, some white like paper, some pale red, some varnish red, and some darke red, whereof likewise they make Halberds: another wood is founde therein called Copau, whereof the trees are like our wallnut trées, but beare no nuttes, the wood being plained, hath graines like Walnut tree: there are many other kindes of trees, whereof some haue leaues rounde like pence, others great, of a foote and a halfe long, as also a tree which is very plea∣sant to beholde, and so sweete of smell, that it excelleth the rose, specially when it is cut: to the contrarie there groweth another tree called Aou-at, which wood beeing cutte or burnt, stinketh so vnreasonably, that no man can abide it: it hath leaues like our ap∣ple

trée leaues, and a fruit not vnlike the E∣giel, the nut whereof is so venemous, that being eaten, it worketh presently, but be∣cause the Indians make their rattles of this fruit, they esteeme it much: Besides this, there groweth in Brasilia many kindes of fruits, and apples, pleasant to looke on, spe∣cially on the sea side, but not to be eaten, and very daungerous, some are like mispelles, whereof the Indians warned our men, that they should not eate them.

Hiuourae is a barley about halfe a fin∣ger thicke, good of taste, specially being fresh, it is a kinde of pox wood, and by the Indians vsed for a certaine disease called Pians, which is as daungerous with them, as the pox with vs, there is likewise a trée by them called Choyne, of a reasonable height, for leaues, forme, and greenenesse like the Bay trees, the fruit as great as a childes head, as bigge as an Estridge egge, but not to be eaten: the Tonoupinambaul∣tians thereof make certaine rattles, by them caled Muaracas, & of it also they make ves∣sels to drinke, with such like things, cleaue∣ing them in the middle. The tree by them called Sabaneay, beareth fruit bigger than a mans two fists, whereof they make drin∣king cuppes, and is much like a cup: in this nut there are certaine piths, not vnlike for forme and taste to the almon. There is an other tree in bignesse like a Sorben, the fruit wherof is by them called Aca iou, of forme and greatnesse like a hennes egge, which being ripe, is of a golde yellow colour like a quince, very good and sauory to eate, hauing a certayne sharpe taste, and in it a iuice that cooleth heate, but because this fruit is not easie to be gathered, as being high trees, the meere-cattes eate them, and such as fall to the ground, are the Indians parte. Paco∣aire is a sprig about tenne or twelue foote high: the body as thicke as a mans thigh, but yet so soft that it may be cutte in twoo with one blow: the fruit thereof is by them called Paco, which are of a handfull long, in forme like cucumbers, and being ripe, are of the same colour: this fruit groweth 20. or 25. vpon a braunch, which the Indi∣ans plucke off and carry into their houses, they are very pleasant of taste, whereof you may reade at large in the East Indian Hi∣stories: the sprigs that bring foorth cotten, are there in great aboundance, being of an indifferent greatnesse, and haue leaues like the yellow bels of the ash trees, frō whence there groweth an apple as bigge as Bul∣ken, which beeing ripe, openeth in foure partes, and yeeldeth forth cotten, the Bar∣barians call it Ameni iou, in the middle of which wool are certain blacke kernels, p••est together like mens kidneyes, and as bigge as beanes, this cotten is gathered by the Brasilian women, which they spinne, and therof make many things, Citrons and Le∣monds by the Portingales brought into those countries, grow there in great aboun∣dance, very pleasant and good: also many su∣gar canes, whereby much sugar is brought from thence into Portingale: it is much to be wondered at, that seeing there is so swéet a substance in those reedes while they are fresh and newe gatherd, that being but a lit∣tle withered or put into the water, they doo presently conuert into so sower a substance, that it is as good Vinegere as any can bee founde. Besides these sugar reedes, there groweth other reedes as thicke as a mans legge, which beeing greene, are with one blow easily cutte in two peeces, but when they are drie, they become verie tough and hard, whereof they make arrowes, & sticks to carry in theyr handes: in that countrie likewise is much Masticke, & excellent good Gumme (which was ordinarily brought out of Chio) also diuers and innumerable sorts of sweete smelling flowers & hearbes. And although that about this Cabo de Frio there is much thunder, raine, and great winds, as lying vnder Tropicus Capricorn, yet because there falleth no frost, snowe, nor haile, therefore the trees are there al∣wayes gréene, as they are with vs in May: and in December when the dayes are shor∣test and coldest here with vs, they are there at the longest and hottest, but it is to be vn∣derstood, that they neuer fal out to be so long or short as they are with vs, for they haue the day and night of an euener length then we, and a more temperate aire. The fruits of this countrey are many, whereof Ananas is the best, the leaues whereof are like the leaues of Iris or aloes, a little bowing, and in manner rounde, the fruit is long like Cu∣cumbers or distaues, when they are greene they presse a certaine iuice out of them, which tasteth as pleasantly as Maluesie, of this fruite I haue alreadie spoken in the de∣scription of the east Indians, so that at this time it is needlesse to write any more there∣of, as being ther to be read: there is an hearb in Brasilia, by y^e Tououpinambaulti•• called Petum, which we call Tabacum or Nicoua∣na, and now it groweth in our gardens, but not so good, nor so strong as theirs: this hearb is sufficiently described by Clusius and other writers, & very well knowne, it hath leaues like our dock leaues, or Consolida Maior by the Brasilians it is much esteemed, which they gather and make into balles, and be∣ing

dried, take foure or fiue of the leaues, and rubbing them togither, they make thē burne, the smoake whereof they receiue in to their bodies, which doth so fill & nourish them, that hauing receiued in the smoake, they will goe two or three dayes when they are in the warres, and neither eate nor drinke, which Le••ius likewise hath tried, as also, that the same smoake maketh men auoyde sleugine, out of their heads, & there∣fore the Indians weare bundles thereof a∣bout their neckes, to smel vnto it: the rootes Maniot and Aypi I haue alredy described. There is likewise another kind of roote cal∣led Hecich, whereof there are three kindes, some being sodden are blew, others yellow like quinces, and the rest white like parse∣neps, they are all good of taste, specially the yellow, which being rosted, are as good as peares, & are there in as great aboundance as turnops in Sauoy, about two handfulles thicke, and a foote and a halfe long: the hearb runneth along vpon the ground, and hath leaues like cucumers or great spinage, but differing in colour, neerer to the broome or white wilde vine leaues: because these roots neuer yeeld seed, they are cut in péeces and planted n the earth: he that desireth to knowe more hereof, let him reade Clusius his workes, and they wil satisfie his desire. There is also a kinde of nut (by them called Manobi) which groweth vnder the ground and hang by little thréedes one fast to an o∣ther, hauing a substaunce within them like to our hazel nuttes, of a browne whitish co∣lour, with huskes like the shelles of pease. Touching Brasilia pepper, which also at this present day groweth in our gardeins, and very hot it is, by Mathiolus called S••i∣quastium, and Brasilia beanes and pease, whereof néedeth no great description, as be∣ing commonly knowne. To conclude you must vnderstand, that séeing Brasilia hath no wilde beasts, foules, fishes, nor liuing creatures, such as are in Europa, neyther yet trees, nor hearbs, onely pulcelen, basill, and vaarne or felix, which growe in some places thereof, we may say with the Pro∣phet Dauid in his 104. psalme:

O Lord, thy works most strange and wonderfull, both far & neere are seene & known right well How wisely thou al things dost bring to passe, whereby al creatures thy great goodnes feele, And who can either number, write, or show, the kindes of beasts that are in land and sea.

And surely these people might well be ac∣counted happy, if they had the know∣lege of the true and euerli∣uing God.

A briefe discourse of their warres and armes.

TOuching their warres, they vse them not, thereby to get riches by force, or to inlarge their dominions, but only of meere affectiō and desire they haue to reuenge the deaths of their forefathers, which by theyr enemies haue from time to time beene ta∣ken and deuoured, wherein they are so zea∣lous, that as many of their enemies as they take are sure to die the like death, and to be eaten by them, and hauing once begunne warres with their neighbours, they wil ne∣uer be friends againe, but where or how∣soeuer they can intrap or catch each other, they are sure to die: The manner of the Tououpinambaul••ers warres are in this

Although they haue no Kings nor Prin∣ces among them, not one of them beeing of greater account than the rest, yet they haue this custome, that they honour their aunci∣ents, by them called Peore ru Picheb, and in euery village they are ready to do as they commaund them, which their auncients many times, walking among them, or else sitting in their hanging beddes of cotten, take occasion to vse this maner of spéech vn¦to the people saying, Are not our forefa∣thers that haue fought with, ouercom, slain and eaten so many of our enimies, an exam∣ple vnto vs, not to stay cōtinually at home? shall we suffer our nation, which in times past was so fearful to our enemies that they durst not looke them in the face, be thus brought into so open shame and reproach? that it shall be saide our ennemies came to assaile vs within our owne houses? shal we by our negligence and slownesse stay and watch till the Marga••aters and the Peros Engaipa, which are cruell Portingales, doe first shew their powers and execute theyr tirannies vpon vs? & hauing spoken in that manner, he clappeth his handes vppon his buttockes, and crying out saith, Erima, E∣rima, Tououpinambaults, conomi, ouassou, Tan, Tan, &c. that is, Beholde my friends, you strong yong men, is this conuenient to be done, let vs rather arme our selues, and by force be ouerthrowne, or els reuenge our iniuries receiued. These and such like Ora∣tions, which indure for the space of sixe ho∣wers at the least do the Elders vse vnto the people, which they with great patience and quietnes hearken vnto, and therewith are so incouraged, that presently, with all spéed they assemble themselues togither in a cer∣taine place, and in great numbers with swordes and holberdes (by them called Ta∣capes) of red or blacke wood, very heauy like

bore trees, about fiue or sixe foot long, round at the end like a spit, a foote broad, and the thickenesse of a thumbe in the middle, al the other part sharpe. Besides those weapons, they haue orapats, which are bowes, there are likewise of blacke or red wood, where∣with they can shoote so sure and certainly, that no man excelleth them, of the which bowes and arrowes, because there are so many of them brought into these countries, there needeth no great description: withall they haue bucklers of the skinnes of Tapi∣roussou, broad, flat, and round like the co∣uer of a drumme, wherewith they couer not themselues, but vse them onely to receiue their enemies arrowes: these are al the we∣pons they do commonly vse, only that they do put on certayne kindes of apparell made of feathers, wherewith they set foorth theyr bodies, otherwise they will not haue any thing vpon their bodies (were it but a bare shirt) that might be any let or hinderaunce vnto them. And being armed in this man∣ner, they set forward sometimes eight or tenne thousand men (with certaine women not to fight, but to carry their necessaries & prouisions and being in the field, the anci∣entest among them such as haue slaine and eaten many of their enemies) are appoyn∣ted for captaines and commaunders, after whome the rest folowe, and set forward to∣wards the enemy, and although they meete all together without order, yet when they march they place themselues in rankes, the strongest going before, and the rest after them, wherein it is strange, that so manye men being together without a generall, can so well place themselues, and know when they should set forward. There are some of them that blowe in great hornes, like our trumpets, which they call Inabia, where∣with they incourage the people, and giue them signes of battell, others haue pipes or flutes made of their enemies bones, which at other times they haue slaine and eaten: whereon all the time of their march they cease not to pipe, thereby to stirre their fel∣lowes harts to do the like with their enne∣mies bones that by them should bee taken. And if they assaile their enemies by water, they keepe close to the shore, not daring en∣ter farre into the sea, because their scutes which are made of the barkes of trees, are not able to indure against a tempest, but serue onely in calme weather, eache scute holding fiftie men, which may easily sitte therein and rowe, with so great swiftnesse, that it is wonderfull.

In the maner before rehearsed they tra∣uel sometimes tenne or twelue miles with∣in their enemies countrey, vsing to march with their strongest men first, leauing the weakest with the womē a day or two daies iourney behind them, marching very quiet∣ly entring into certaine woods, where they stay & hide themselues for the space of half a day, meane time if they meete with any of their enemies, either men, women, or chil∣dren, they kéep them not prisoners, neither take them with them, but presently kil and rost them vpon their boncans or girdirons, and so eate them, which they do, not to bee troubled with them when they should enter into the vilages of their enemies, which are all without walles, their houses being of 80. or 100. pases long, without doores, placing in steede thereof certayne Palme trees or branches of the hearb called Pindo: yet there are some villages among them, such as border vpon their enemies, that are paled about with boordes of sixe foote high, against the which when they meane to doe any exploit, they watch the way that goeth vnto the village, where such as issue foorth or enter in, fighting with them, are taken prisoners, and are killed and eaten. But when they meet in open field, army against army, it is done with such fury and horrible bloudshed, that it is incredible, as Ioannes Lerius a Burgonian hath personally beheld them, can witnes, from whome this is ga∣thered, for that they run with so great fierce¦nesse and boldnesse together, as neuer was heard of: for (as Lerius writeth) when the Tououpinambaultiers first perceiued their enemies, they made so horrible a crie, as greater is neuer heard among vs when we hunt the wolfe, and that so lowde, as if at that time it had thundred, it could scarcely haue béene heard: and approching nearer vnto them, they beganne a second time to crie, with blowing of hornes, and piping on their flutes, calling to their ennemies, and shewing thē the dead bones of their frends, and their teeth, which they do weare about their neckes vpon strings, at the least twoo elles long: that done, entring into battell, and beginning to shoote, you may see theyr arows flee into the ayre as thick as swarms of flies, with all kinde of coloured feathers, which maketh a most pleasant shew, if it might be séen without danger: in the which shooting, whosoeuer is hurt, presently pul∣leth sorth the arrow, and like a madde dog biteth it in peeces, yet hee leaueth not off, but still fighteth, as being so cruel and fierce that they neuer cease fighting as long as a∣ny strength is in their bodies, neuer flying: and such as they strike with their woodden holberts, fal presently dead vnto the groūd,

like oxen that are kild by the butcher. This manner of fight was séene by Lerius, to bee done by the Tououpinam baultiers, who after thrée houres fight had the victory, and after many on both sides were slaine and wounded, they brought about thirty men and women prisoners, which they placed in the middle of their battell, the strongest of them being tied with ropes: which done, they returned to the Créeke or entry or Ga∣nabara, of the which prisoners ten of them were bought and sent to Henry the second king of Fraunce. Lerius himselfe bought a woman and her child, and being with him, he thinking to comfort her, telling her hée would send her into France, she aunswered him, that she had rather be eaten by her e∣nemies, or to be let loose, that she might once againe helpe to be reuenged on the en∣nemies that haue taken her, wherein you may see how stiffely they are bent vnto re∣uenge, neuer forgetting or forgiuing anie iniury whatsoeuer.

The manner how they vse their prisoners, and what ceremonies they vse in the killing and eating them.

THe prisoners being brought home by such as haue taken them, are not onelie well fed, but they giue the men, women to beare them company (but not the women men to lie with them) and which is more strange, diuers of them that haue prisoners wil not refuse to giue him daughter or sister to wife, which must liue truely and honest∣ly with her husband, and because they ob∣serue no certaine time of the offerings, or butcheries of their prisoners, but somtimes sooner, somtimes later, as they thinke good, therfore the men prisners are kept to hunt, fish, and catch birds, and the women to gar∣den, plant, and fish for oysters: and when like swine they are fat and wel fed, they are slaine and eaten, in manner as followeth. First they certifie all the neighbours round about, when, and in what place their feast shall be kept, where there reforteth a great number, both men, women, and children, consuming all the forenoone with drinking, among the which are the prisoners (which know ful wel that it wilbe vnto their costs) all beset with feathers, who not onely fear∣eth not death, but in dancing, leaping, and drinking excelleth all the rest, in which ma∣ner, hauing consumed at the least six or sea∣uen houres, two or thrée of the strongest a∣mong them lay hold vpon the prisoner, and therewith bind him about the middle with cotten ropes, or with the barks of a certain trée, by them called Iuire, which is like a Linden trée, meane while hee standeth still and neuer resisteth them, although both his armes & hands are at libertie: which done, they leade him in that manner round about the village for euery man to see him, he not once hāging down his head (as those which in our countries are ready to be executed vse to do) but to the contrary with an incre∣dible boldnesse boasting of his déedes, and telling them that leade him, what hee hath done, speaketh vnto them in this manner: When I was at libertie, I haue manye times in this sorte bound your friendes and kinsmen, and with much more boldnesse commending himselfe, and setting forth his actions, tourning his face on all sides, and looking about him hee speaketh to some one of them and saith, Hearest thou friend, It is I that ate thy father, and to an other, sir∣ra, it was I that killd thy brother and broy∣led him vpon the coles, and haue taken and eaten so many of your people, that I am not able to number them, and be you well assu∣red that my friendes the Margaiaters will not leaue my death vnreuenged, and will once catch some of you, and serue you in the like sort.

And in this maner being shewed round about the village, in the end, the two men that holde him, stepping backe about thrée elles distant from him, pulling the rope wherewith hee is bounde on both sides so strait, that therewith he standeth fast, and is not able to stirre eyther backward or for∣ward: which done, they bring vnto him certain stones or peeces of broken pots, and they that hold him bound in that manner, being couered with bucklers of tap••roussou speake vnto him, and aske him if before he die he will reuenge his death, wherewith presently in great fury, he throweth stones at them, as also at al others standing round about him, which many times are aboue foure thousand people, not once caring how many of them are hurt or wounded, not al∣though he should breake any of their legges with a blowe, and hauing cast stones, pot∣shardes, earth, and all whatsoeuer he can reach: then he that must kill him (hauing al that day kept himselfe close, and not once come forth) goeth vnto him and saieth, Art not thou one of the Margaiaters our enne∣mies? hast not thou thy selfe taken prisoners and eaten some of our kinsmen and friends? whereunto the prisoner answereth him, and saith, Pa, che, tan, tan, aiouca, a••oupaue, that is, I am he that hath slaine and eaten many of your people, and to grieue them the more, hée layeth both his hands vppon

his head, and saith, O howe lustily haue I therein behaued my selfe? howe earnestly haue I pursued you in the battell, and haue eaten an innumerable companie of you? Wherewith he that shal kil him answereth him and saith: Therefore now séeing you are here, and our prisoner, I will kill you, and your body being rosted, shall likewise be eaten. Whereunto hee answereth and saith, Well, what remedy? assure your selfe my friendes will reuenge my death: and while he speaketh he is stricken down with the wooden holbert: and if he had a wife (as during their imprisonment they commonly haue) she falleth first vpon the dead bodie, and with a few (although crocadiles) teares she weepeth ouer him, for that it is saide the Crocadile weepeth before he deuoureth the dead body he hath slaine, in the same maner do they, for that the false teares once shed, she woulde be the first that shoulde eate his flesh: which done, the other women, special∣ly old womē, as being most desirous to feed on mens flesh, tell those women that keepe the prisoners, that they must make haste to bring the dead body, and hot water with them, wherewith they rubbe, scrape, and wash the body so cleane, that the skinne go∣eth off, the flesh séeming as white as a roa∣sted pigge: which done, commeth the mai∣ster of the prisoner, with as many compa∣nions as he thinketh good, and diuideth the dead body, as quickely as a Butcher with vs should cut vp a shéepe, or other beast: and as with vs when the hunters haue kil∣led a Bucke, throw the entrailes and bloud vnto the houndes, so those Barbarians an∣noynt their children with the bloud of theyr dead ennemy, thereby to prouoke them to cruelty and reuenge: before the Christians vsed to those countries, they cut the body in peeces with certayne stones, but now they haue kniues. The man in that sort diuided, and the intrailes being washed and made cleane, the girdirons are looked vnto by the other women, that are very desirous of mās flesh, where they fit and licke vp the fat that droppeth off the quarters, therewithal most ernestly exhorting and prouoking the yong men and childrē to take some more of their enemies, and to bring them such meate. In this sort one, two, or thrée prisners, or more, as it falleth out, being slaine and rosted, all the company that are present, assemble a∣bout their boucans or girdirons of wood, for that the Indians rost no meate vppon spittes, as some men paynt them to do, for that they thincke it impossible that euer it should be rosted enough being turnd round about, where they make great ioy, leaping, skipping, and with most fierce countenan∣ces beholding the rosted quarters, euerie man taking a peece, not for hunger, or desire of eating, (as some would think) or because without all doubt mans flesh is verie sauo∣rie, but rather in respect of reuenge, special∣ly the olde women, that are most rauenous of mans flesh, for their intent is onely to gnaw the flesh of their enemies to the bare bones, thereby to putte the rest of the priso∣ners (as then not slaine) in greater feare, for that to satisfie their monstrous and greedie desires, there is not one peece of the whole body, not so much as their fingers endes, nose, and eares, but by them is eaten, (onely the vaines and the scull, which they keep, as wee doo dead mens bones in our Church∣yards) and shew them as signes of their dic∣tories and triumphs. The great bones of their legges and armes are kept to make pipes, and their teeth they put vpon strings, which they weare about their necks. Those that haue killed them, estéeme it for an ho∣nourable action, and departing from the rest of their companie, cutte certaine slashes in their breasts, armes, legs, and other fleshie places, wherein they put a certaine salue, thereby to make scarres and signes thereof in their bodyes, vpon the which they throw certaine blacke pouder which neuer goeth off, being of opinion that the more strikes he hath in his bodye, the more men he hath murthered, and for the same is accounted a lustie fellow, and of great courage. And to finish their bloudy tragedie, if it fortune the woman (that was giuen vnto the prisoners during his imprisonment for his wife) bée with childe, they take the childe when it is borne (a thing most fearefull and horrible to heare, for they neuer suffer it to growe to yeares) and eate it, alleadging that such children are of their enimies séed. And those Barbarians doe not onely séeke vtterly to extinguish their enemies, but woulde like∣wise haue other strangers and countrymen that come among them to vse the same cru∣elty, and to eate mens flesh, which by some reiecting all humanitie, hath beene done.

¶Of the religion of the Brasilians, and the misery or feare where into the poore men are brought by their Caraiben, not acknowledging any God.

IN the historie of Peru, a prouince lying on the south side of Brasilia, and border∣ing vpon this Countrey whereof I speake, is declared that they worship the sunne and the moone, but these Toupins haue no god,

neither heauenly nor earthly, and therefore haue no churches nor temples, wherin they should assemble to worship their idols, clean contrary to the custome and manner of all Heathens and Idolatours throughout the whole worlde. They vnderstand not what the creation of the world meaneth, neyther do they giue any names to the dayes, or e∣stéeme one more than the rest, nor account not their times by wéeks, months or yéers, but onely by the moones: and as touching godly or worldly literature, they are wholy ignorant, not vsing so much as any kind of characters or letters, woondering much at the Frenchmen that wrote vpon paper, and could reade it: wherein we are greatly to praise god that hath giuen vs the grace that we can certifie each other by letters of our actions being in far countries, and thereby also attaine vnto the knowledge of the true and liuely God, maker of heauen & earth, wherof when any man speaketh vnto those simple people, being in great admiration, they stand still as it were abashed, and crie I c••••, and because they séemed to be very fearefull of the thunder clappes, by them called Toupan, and that thereuppon the Frenchmen (taking occasion to marke their simplicitie and little knowledge) tolde them that God, to shew his great power and ma∣iesty, did thereby cause both heauen and earth to shake, they aunswered that such a God must néedes be wicked that putte men in so great feare: Such is the miserable e∣state of those poore men. Now if any man aske whether they liue like beasts, without and God, it may be aunswered them, that there is not much difference, for that those people are wholy more thā other men with∣out any knowledge of God, and yet being in this gréeuous blindenesse, they beléeue the immortalitie of the soule, and doe most assuredly perswade themselues, that the soules of such as here in this life haue vali∣antly and well behaued themselues (which their valiancie and well liuing is meant by killing and eating of their enemies) doe fly behinde certaine high hilles, where being in pleasant gardeins (with the soules of theyr forefathers) they continue in euerlasting ioy, pleasure, and dauncing: and to the con∣trary that such as are slacke, (which liue without honour, and will not defend theyr natiue country) are borne away by the Ay∣gnan, for so they caled the diuel, with whom they liued in euerlasting paine. They are likewise in this life many times tormented by the diuell, which also they call Kaagerre, for Lerius writeth, that he personally sawe them, and heard them speake to the French men, and raging like madde dogges, began to crie out and say vnto them, Alas, alas, helpe vs, for the Aygnan beateth vs, and would tell them, that they did oftentimes see the diuell, sometimes in forme of a beast, sometimes in likenesse of a bird, at other times in diuers shapes: and because they maruelled that they were not troubled nor molested by him, they made them answer, that god who is of greater power than their Aygnan or diuell, did preserue them from him: wherupon they being tormented pro∣mised to become christians, and to beleeue in the onely God: yet their paines were no sooner ended, but they presently forgot their promise. And it is most certaine, that they are so tormented, for Lyrius saith, that hee hath often séene them, when onely with the remembraunce of their torments, they were in so great feare, and sighed so deepe∣ly that very griefe made them to sweat, and sitting with their hands vpon their heades, mourning and lamenting said, Mair atou∣rassap, acequere, aignan atoupaue, that is, O my good friend, and my companion, I feare wicked sathan aboue al other things, whereunto he answered them, that he fea∣red him not, wherewith lamenting their e∣state, they would say, O how happy should wee be if wee were fréeed from him: if you will be frée saide Lerius, then you must be∣léeue in him that is mightie. Then the Ai∣gnan or the diuel which they being in paine promised him to doe: but their torments past, they had cleane forgotten what they saide.

Herein you must vnderstand that those of Peru and Cusco, did not only beleeue the immortallitie of the soule, but also the re∣surrection of the body, as in the Historie of Peru is already declared, by the example of the Indians, who séeing the Spaniards to open graues of the dead Indians, and to take away their Iewelles, desired them that they wold not scatter nor throw away the bones, to the end that the dead might not want them when they shoulde rise a∣gaine.

This is written to the ende that all vn∣godly men, that are conuersaunt with the simple Tououpinambaultes, perswading themselues that there is no God, shoulde learne of the wild miserable wretches, that there are certaine wicked spirites, which torment the vngodly (not beléeuing in the power of God) here in this life. And it they affirme (as many of them doe) that such wicked spirites are nothing else, but the e∣uill affections and conceites of the minde, and that therefore the Barbarians doe foo∣lishly

perswade themselues of that which is not true, it may be answered them (as they may reade in our description) that the Ame∣ricans were openly and certainely tormen∣ted by wicked spirits, whereby it may suffi∣ciently appeare, that such torments are no fleshly effects, which torment the strongest of them in that maner. Secondly, although such vngodly men are altogether vnworthy to heare that which the holy scripture spea∣keth concerning the resurrection of the bo∣dy, yet this second poynt of the Barbari∣ans may well be propounded against those which beléeue the immortalitie of the soule, as also the Peruuians that beléeue the im∣mortalitie both of soule and body, whereby they may bee ashamed, and learne of such wilde men: and although those people knew how to bee quit of all their torments and gréefes aforesaide, yet are they in great feare of thunder, as fearing a certain power, which they cannot resist or with∣stand, yet will they not knowe it, where∣fore the Gospel in the Acts of the Apostles, fourtéenth Chapter and seuentéenth verse, most truely saith, that God in time past suffered the heathens to walke in their own wayes, although hee ceased not continually to make his power knowne, by doing vs good, sending vs raine from heauen, and gi∣uing vs fruitfull times and seasons, filling our hearts with ioy, and our bodyes with meate, so that it is the onely wickednesse of man that will not acknowledge the e∣ternall God and maker of all things. And in another place, in the first to the Ro∣manes and twentieth verse, Saint Paul sayth (for that which is inuisible vnto man, which is his eternitie and Godhead) is ma∣nifested vnto vs by the creation of the world. Therefore although those men wil not confesse God with their mouthes, yet are they by their own actions ouerthrowne, and made to knowe there is a God, and that so they are not ignorant, or may once pretend the same, considering their beléefe of the immortalitie of the soule, the feare they haue of the thunder clappes, and the wicked spirits that torment them. They haue likewise Prophets or Priestes, which they call Caraibes, that goe from village to village, making the poore people beleeue that they are conuersant with spirites, and that they can make strong whom it plea∣seth them, and giue them power to van∣quish the enemie, also that by theyr helpe the fruites and great trées do grow and in∣crease vpon the earth.

Besides this, euerie thrée or foure yeare they come togither, both men, women and children, obseruing a certaine feast, but in seuerall houses, so close or neare togither, that they may heare each other: where they first beginne with fearefull songs and some daunces, their Caribens being with them, the women foming at the mouthes, as if they had the falling sicknesse, beating their breastes, and making a most fearefull noyse, as if they were possessed with euill spirits, and in like sort the children: which noyse being ended, they are still for a time, and then beginne againe to sing so sweetly, and in measure, that it woulde delight a man to heare them, withall dauncing a rounde, each following and not leading the other, bending their bodyes forwards, and their right legge somewhat outwarde and crooked, with their right hande vppon theyr buttocks, letting the left hand hang down, and in this manner they daunce and com∣passe thrice about, in each daunce hauing thrée or foure Caribes, with hattes, appar∣rell, and arme bandes of feathers, each Ca∣ribe hauing in his hand a Ma••aca or rattle, thereby making the people beleeue that the spirit speaketh vnto thē out of th••••e rattles, stepping forwarde and backewarde, and (not as the people doo) standing still in one place.

They likewise often times take long Reedes, wherein they putte a certaine hearbe by them called Petum, which they sette on fire, and turning themselues about, incense the people with the smoke thereof, with these wordes, Receiue the spirite of strength, whereby you may ouercome your enemies: which kinde of ceremonies conti∣nue for the space of sixe or seauen houres to∣gither, and with so pleasant melodie, that men that are séene in musicke (as those peo∣ple are not) would maruaile thereat, and thinke it impossible: and at the ende of e∣uerie song▪ stamping on the grounde with their right foote, euerie man spitting, and with a hoarse voyce often vttering these wordes, He, He, Hua, He, Hua, Hua, Hua: In these ceremonies they first re∣member their valiant Predecessors, be∣ing in good hope that they shall goe behinde the hilles, and there with them be merrie and daunce: that doone, they doo most earnestly threaten the Ouetacaten (a most cruell people bordering vppon them,) that in short tune they hope to ouerrunne them, and at the last singing somewhat of Noes floud, that it destroyed the world and drow∣ned all the people, onely their forefathers, that saued themselues vpon the tops of high trees, whereby it should appeare that they haue hadde a certaine knowledge of Noes

floud, although now cleane forgotten, be∣cause they haue no bookes, neither yet can reade. These ceremonies ended, they enter∣taine their Caribes most sumptuously with daintie meate and drinke, and make good cheere: the saide Caribes walke likewise through the villages with their rattles or Maracan, & couering them with feathers, they make them fast to a staffe, which they fixe into the earth, and there offer meate and drinke before it, as if it were an Idole, making the poore men beleeue that the rat∣tles eate and consume the meate and drink, whereby euery housholder thinketh him∣selfe bound to set, not onely flesh and fish be∣fore them, but also of their Coauin, which is their drinke: the manner of it is thus: their Maracans or rattles being tyed to a sticke, and fixed in the earth, as afore said, for the space of fifteene dayes, are by the people ser∣ued with great deuotion, and therwith they do so bewitch the poore people, that they make them beleeue the rattles are holy, and that the spirits speake out of them. The Frenchmen séeking to bring them from that fonde opi••••on, were hardly thought of by them, and thereby incurred the Caribes sore displeasure: in like manner Balaams priests hated Elias, for discouering their deceits. And thus much concerning the ceremonies and Religion of these poore simple people, which at this presēt shal suffice, and such as are desirous to know more, let them reade the histories therof, specially Iohnes Lerius, from whence for the most part this is taken forth, who hath described at large what hap∣pened vnto him in his voyage into those countries.

The manner of their marriage, number of wiues, and the degrees of marriage ob∣serued among them, also the edu∣cation of their children.

IN marriage they obserue these degrées of kindered, no man marrieth with his mo∣ther, sister, or daughter, other degrées they respect not, for the vncles marrie with their cosins, and so of other degrées: when they match together, they vse no ceremonies, but hee that is desirous to marrie with a widow or a maide, speaketh vnto theyr friendes (if they haue any) or to their neigh∣bours, for want of friendes, asking them if it be their wils that such a one shuld mar∣rie with them, if they say I, then presentlie he taketh her home without any more ce∣remony, & keepeth her for his wife, but if she be denied him, he neuer seeketh further vnto hir: but here you must consider, that they are permitted to take many wiues, for that eue∣rie man hath as many as hee thinks good, and the more he hath, the stronger and wor∣thier they estéeme him: there are some of thē that haue eight, yet the liue in such vnitie, that although some one of them is better be∣loued then the rest, yet they neuer conceiue any ielousie therein, neither yet once mur∣mur thereat, but liue quietly togither, wea∣uing and making their cotten beds, doing their houshould worke, looking to their gar∣dens, and planting of their rootes, &c. Such women as commit adulterie, are by nature so abhominable to the Americans, that it is in the mans power to kill them, or els with shame to put them from him: it is true that they take no regarde vnto their maids, but let them do as they wil, but being once mar∣ried, they must obserue their promise, vpon the paines before rehearsed, but they are not so much addicted to vncleannesse as the people of East India: the women that are with child abstaine from great labours, and do nothing but ordinarie worke about the houses, and commonly the women do more work then the men, for the men only in the morning, set certaine trées about their gar∣dens, but not al y^e day after, but cōsume most of their time in the wars, hunting, & fishing, & to make Brasilia halberds, and weapons of wood, as also bowes and arrowes: as tou∣ching the bringing forth of the child into the world, the men receiue them from the wo∣mans body, and with their téeth bite off the childes nauill string, and then presse downe the nose, esteeming it a great beautifying vnto them the child being borne, is present∣ly washed by the father, and painted with red and blacke colour▪ it is neuer swadled nor lapped in cloathes, but onely laide in a little cotten bed, and being a boy, the father presently giueth him a woddē knife, a bow, and a little arrow, which are laide by him in his bed, and therewith he kisseth the childe, saying vnto him, My sonne, when thou art great thou must be strong, and reuenge thy selfe vpon thine enemies: as touching their names, they giue them the names of such things as they know, as Orapacen, that is, bow and arrow, Sarigoy, foure footed beast, Arignan, henne, Arabouten, a Brasill tree, Pindo, a great hearbe, &c. The childrens meate besids their mothers milke, is chaw∣ed meale, & some sowst meat, the womā that is deliuered, lieth 2. or 3. daies at the most vpon her cotten bed, after that shée putteth a cotten cappe vppon the childes head, and either goeth into the garden or els about the house to doo some worke, which our women cannot do, as being of weaker complections,

and liuing in an vntemperate aire: besides this, we would thinke if our children should not be wond or swadled, they would grow crooked, whereof not any such are founde to be among them, but rather goe vprighter then any other people in the world, which is also by meanes of the temperatenesse of the aire. The children growing great and to mans state, are taught no other thing, then onely to be reuenged of their enemies, and to eate them: also they are bounde (as right followers of Lamech, Nimrod, and Esau, to hunting, and to go to the warres, to kill and eate both men and beasts.

What lawes and pollicies are vsed among the Brasilians, also howe friendly they entertaine strangers, together with their weepings, and words vsed by the wo∣men vnto strangers at their first comming into their houses.

THe policie of the Brasilians is hardly to be beleeued: howe reasonably and natu∣rally they behaue themselues therein, I mean among themselues for commō quar∣rels, for that as touching their warlike af∣faires against their enemies, it is sufficient∣ly declared, but if there riseth any strife or quarrel among themselues, such as are pre∣sent will not seeke to pacifie the matter, but rather lette them fight or deale together as they thinke good, yea, although they should plucke each others eyes out of their heads: but if one of them chaunceth to hurte the o∣ther, and being taken, he is likewise woun∣ded in the same place where he wounded the other, and if it fortune that by the wounde the partie dieth, he that killed him shall by the kindred of the dead man bee likewise flame, so that with them they pay life for life, eye for eye, and tooth for tooth. Theyr goods are houses and lande, which they haue farre greater then their necessities re∣quireth: as touching their houses, you must vnderstande that euerie village hath at the least ••00. houses, wherby many of thē must of force dwell in a house, yet euerie fami∣ly hath a seuerall place, although without any distance, as beeing nothing betweene the houses, to let them from seeing from the one ende of all their houses to the other, al∣though many times they are at the least 60. paces long, yet euerie man hath his wiues & children seuerall to himself, and it is to be wondered at, that they neuer dwell aboue fiue or sixe moneths in one house, but ta∣king the trees and the hearbe P••••••o, wherof their houses are made, they carrie them of∣tentimes at the léast 1000. paces off, yet the villages keepe their ancient names, where∣by it may easily bee gathered what great houses they build, séeing it oftentimes hap∣peneth that one man in his life time doth remoue his house twentie times at the least: and if any man asketh them why they so of∣ten remoue their houses, they make answer, that changing of place is holsome, also that their predecessors did the like, which if they should leaue, they should not liue long: tou∣ching their grounds, euerie Moussacat, that is, housholder, hath certaine gardens and orchardes to himselfe, which hee vseth as he tihnketh good: but as touching the til∣ling and dressing of their groundes, as wee do ours it is not vsed among them: as con∣cerning their houshold worke, the women spin and work cotten wooll therof to make ropes and hanging beds, which beddes they cal I••••s, they are about six or seuen foot long, made like a net, but somewhat thicker, like our thin cloath, with strong ropes at the head and foote to tie them at, but because such beds are brough•• hither and so well knowne, it is not necessarie to speake anie more of them, neither of the manner howe they vse to spinne the wooll, but touching these things you may reade Lerius, my de∣sire being onely to set down their cheefe and principall customes. When the men go to warre, hunting, or fishing, they take such beds with them, and making them fast to two trees, they sleepe therein, which beddes being foule, either with dust, smoke, or o∣therwise, are by the women made cleane, which is done in this manner: they goe into the wooddes to seeke a certaine fruite not much vnlike our pumpcons, but grea∣ter, for that most parte of them are so great, that a man can hardly beare them in his hand: this fruite they slampe verie small, and put it in an earthen potte, steeping it in water, which doone, they stirre it with a sticke, in such sort, that it yeeldeth forth a thicke scumme, which scumme they vse in steede of Sope, wherewith they make their beddes as white and cleane, as anie Fuller doth his cloath, and in summer time or in the wars, it is better sleeping on those beddes then vppon ours: as touching their housholde stuffe, the women make great earthen Pottes, therein to put theyr drinke Coa••in. They make pottes like∣wise of many fashions, smal and indifferent great cups, broad dishes, and such like ves∣sels, the outward parte not much polished, but inwardly so cleane & white, with a cer∣taine colour layde vpon them, that they far surpasse our pot makers, they likewise make

certaine mixture of blacke and white colour together, wherewith they paint and stripe their earthen vessels, specially those where∣in they keepe their meate: their manner of earthen worke is much pleasanter and bet∣ter then our wodden dishes, onely the wo∣men which paint their pots, haue this fault, they cannot paint one thing twice, because they do it not by art, but onely according to their fantasies. These Barbarians also haue certaine pumpeons and other fruits, which they diuide into two partes, and cut∣ting the meate out of them, they vse them for drinking cuppes, which they call Cobi, they haue also great and small baskets, made of whole Rushes, not much vnlike wheate straw, cunningly wrought and fol∣ded togither, which they cal Panacon, wher∣in they keepe their meale and other things: theyr weapons are wodden Halberds, bowes and arrowes, feathered coates and caps, with arme bands and rattles by them called Mar••, whereof I haue sufficiently spoken, so that at this present it is needlesse to say more. Nowe then the Barbarians house, with his houshold stuffe, and furni∣ture, weapons, bedde, and apparrell, being sufficiently described, I will shewe you the manner of their entertainment of stran∣gers: and although the Tououpinambaul∣••ers doo receiue their guestes in friendly sort, yet their strange manner to such as know it not, is verie fearefull, as Lerius telleth it happened vnto him at his first going to visite them, saying that when he came first into one of theyr villages, all the Barbarians ranne about him, and said vnto him, Marape derere, Marape derere, that is, what is your name, & howe are you called? one of them taking off his hat, and setting it on his head, the other hanging his girdle and sword about his naked body, the third putting on his Cassocke, making a great hollowing: showting, and in that maner one going one way, the rest another, with his cloathes and furniture on theyr backs, he verily thought to haue beene quit of them, and in danger of his life, which af∣ter he found to be needlesse, as not knowing their customes, doing the like at the first to al such as come among them, not beeing of their company: & whē they haue taken their pleasure in wearing their apparrell, they giue it them again, the interpreter also told him that they were desirous to knowe his name, but said vnto him when he told them, he must not giue thē any name in our speech, because they cannot pronounce it, as in steed of Ioh•• they say N••••n, and because they can∣not remember such words, he said hee must name himselfe by some thing that is well knowne to them: and because Lerius signi∣fieth an oyster, he called himselfe Lery ous∣sou, which they wondered at, and said Te•• Mair, hey Frenchman, this is an honorable name. And such as we neuer heard of any Frenchman, and surely Circes with all her charmes and hearbes did neuer conuert a man so lightly into an oyster as then it was done, after which time Lerius spake often with them, and herein you must note that they are so good of memorie, that when they haue once heard a name, they will not light∣ly forget it. Then Lerius proceedeth further to shew how he spedde among them in that his first iourney, which is, that going furder with his interpreter, he came into a village of Barbarians called Eurami••, by the Frenchmen Goset, wherin his interpreter had dwelt, where they found the Barbari∣ans dancing & drinking of their Coauin, as hauing that day killed one of their enemies, for the which cause they helde the feast, the peeces of his bodie as then lying vppon the Boucan, howe this fearefull spectacle plea∣sed him you may wel iudge, which notwith∣standing was nothing at all, considering what followed, for beeing come into the house, and according to their manner sette vppon a hanging bedde, the women as their custome is, weeping, and the good man of the house friendly entertaining him, his interpreter being vsed therunto, & whollie accust••med to their drinke, without spea∣king vnto Lerius, or once bidding him wel∣come, left him, and went to dance and drink among the Indians, and hee being wearie, and hauing eaten certaine bread and other meate that had beene set before him, laide himselfe downe to rest, yet by reason of the noyse which the Barbarians with daun∣cing and drinking made about him, he was well kept from sleeping, specially when one of the wilde men came running vnto him, with a broyled shinne bone of a man in his hand, asking him if he would eate with him, iudge then I pray you if feare made not sleep to auoyd out of his eies, specially (as he wri∣teth) for that he thought (as then not vnder∣standing their speech) the wild man shewed him that peece of the broyled flesh, telling him that they would do the like with him, so that with feare he beganne to be suspitious, that hee was betraied by his fellow, who in that sort had deliuered him into the Bar∣barians hands, wherupon he determined if he could to get away, but being compassed on all sides w••h Barbarians (that meant him no hurt) hee fouude it impossible, so that with the feare hee hadde receiued,

which still increased more and more, thin∣king he should likewise be slaine and eaten, hee passed ouer the whole night onely in prayers, in the morning verie early the in∣terpreter came vnto him, that had passed al the night in drinking with the Barbarians, and séeing him looke so pale, and hauing a fitte of an ague then vppon him, asked him if hee were sicke, and whether he had ••ot slept well, wherewith hee blamed the in∣terpreter for leauing him alone among the Barbarians, hée not vndeestanding what they said, and because he could not shake off his feare, he desired his interpreter that hee might presently depart from thence, but hee to the contrary putting him in good comfort willed him to take courage, saying that the Barbarians meant him no hurt, and withal discouered his feare vnto them, who for his sake had watched and made that sport all the night long, because they estéemed him welcome, which the Barbarians hearing, sayde that they had somewhat perceiued it, and that it greeued them that he had passed the night in so great sorrow and disease, and with that they all beganne to laugh, which made him cast off all feare: after that, hee and his interpreter went into another vil∣lage, where as the manner is, entering into a Maussacats house (which in euery village they must do, and go to no place else, if they wil haue their loue and fauor) he sate down vpon a hanging cotten bed, and for a little time sitting still, presently the women went vnto him, and sitting downe vppon their héeles close to the grounde, couering their faces with their hands, bad him wel∣come, weeping and vttering many words in his commendation▪ as saying, you haue taken a great and dangerous voyage in hand, onely to come and visite vs, you are good, you are strong, and if it be a French∣man, they adde further, you haue brought vs many fine things that we neuer saw: and to conclude, with such counterfeit teares and pleasing words they receiue and salute their guests, & thē stranger sitting vppon the cotten bedde, must do the like, holding his hande before his face, which (some good fooles) prouoked by their teares, haue not let to doo, and hee must likewise aunswere them, and sigh as though hee were grée∣ued.

This foolish entertainement of the wo∣men beeing ended, the Maussacat or good man of the house, who all that time is bu∣sie making of his arrowes, and neuer re∣gardeth his guest, as though hee hadde nothing to doo with him, (which is a verie strange manner in respect of ours) at the last steppeth vnto the guest, and speaketh vnto him saying, Ere Ioube? that is, are you come? how looke you? what is your desire? and what seeke you? as Lerius hath perti∣cularly described: then he asketh if he hath a stomake to eate, if hee say or make signes that hée is hungrie, then presently hee causeth all kinde of victualles to bee sette before him, as meale, which is their bread, rosted flesh of certaine beastes, birds, and fishes, and such like meat, which is brought in earthen dishes, and because they haue neither Tables nor Stooles, they sette it on the grounde, and drinke, and if they haue any Caouin in the house, they giue it him. In the end when the women haue wept sufficiently, bidding the guest wel∣come, they come vnto him, bringing cer∣taine fruites, as••ing, or couertly desiring of him in respect thereof, either looking glas∣ses, Combes, or glasse beades▪ which they weare about their armes, and if hee meaneth to stay all night, the Mauslacat commaundeth the women to hang him vp a cleane bedde, about the which he causeth small fires to be made, which oftentimes by night hee causeth to be blowed with a cer∣taine paire of bellowes, (by them called Ta∣tapecoua) which are made of two rounde beddes, not much vnlike the fannes wher∣with the Gentlewomen in our countrie do kéepe themselues from the heate of the fire, which fiers are not made because of the coldnesse of the countrey, but to driue away the moystnesse of the night, as also because it is a custome with them so to doo: and seeing wee are nowe in hand with fire, I thinke it not vnconuenient to say some thing thereof, they call the fire Ta∣ta, and the Smoke Tatatin, and when they trauaile either to the wars, to hunting or to fishing, they alwayes haue fire with them, because of the Aygnan or Di∣uell, who continually tormenteth them, therewith to driue him away, which they kindle not with Flint stone and a peece of Stéele as wee vse to doo, but rubbe twoo péeces of woodde one against the o∣ther, one peece béeing soft, the other, harde, which is done in this maner: they take a péece of harde wood of a foote long, which they make sharpe at one ende almost like a pricke, which poynte they thrust it into the soft wood, and turne it so often with theyr handes, as if they would bore the peece of wood therewith, and by that meanes it not onely smoketh, but taketh fire, which done, they take cotten or dried leaues, and there∣with kindle their fire.

The guest being in this sort entertained,

and layd in a cleane cotten bedde, if he bée liberall he giueth the men kniues or sheeres to clip and pull out their haires, to the wo∣men combes or looking glasses, and to the children fish hookes, and if he chance to haue neede of victuals by the way, agreeing with them for their meat, hee may take it al with him, and because in those countries there are no kindes of beastes to carrie men or their wares, they are forced to trauell on foote, if they be wearie, and that the Indi∣ans let them haue some of their maids, they presently as being verie willing and ready to serue take vp the burthen, & often times carrie the man himselfe, and if he speaketh vnto them to rest themselues, they answere him saying, thinke you vs to be as weake and faint as married women, that we shuld faint vnder our burthen? rather you then shuld think so, we would carrie you a whole day long: they are likewise touching natu∣ral loue, better giuen & affected then wee, for that daily they giue each other flesh, fish, and fruits, & it greeueth them that their neigh∣bour shoulde not haue as much as they, which liberalitie also they vse to strangers, which in this one example by Lerius him∣selfe t••••d and set downe, may sufficiently be proued, which is, that as Lerius with twoo other Frenchmen, trauailed through the woods, and was in danger of his life by a fearefull East, as also that vnaduisedly hee and his companions had passed hard by the borders of the Margaraters, enemies to their friends the Tououpinambaultiers▪ (by whom if they had beene taken, they had bin eaten, and which is more, sticking their bo∣dies vpon thornes, would haue made them p••••e in that manner, for the space of twoo dayes without meate or drinke) at the last they came into a village called Pauo, where by the Barbarians they were most friendly welcommed, who vnderstanding the great danger they had escaped, not only from the beast▪ but also of the Marga••aters, that vse to stick their bodies vpon thornes, as I saide before, did with such pittie and compassion bewaile theyr hassard, that it might assured∣ly be sayde, that those simple Barbarians did not counterfeit, but rather wished them all good: and first with faire water (accor∣ding to their maner) they washed their féet, each of them sitting by himselfe in a cleane bedd: that done, the good man of the house that had made ready their meate, set fresh meale•• eating like our white bread crums) broyled flesh, fish, and foules, with all sorts of their best fruits, making them good cheere, and when night came, he caused all the chil∣dren to be conuayed out of the roume where they slept, that they might not be diseased, and in the morning betimes hee came vnto them, saying in theyr speech, Agite autou∣rassap, that is, my good friendes haue you rested wel this night, and they answered, I very well: he still as yet (sayth hee) for I know that yesterday you had a weary iour∣ney. To conclude, it cannot be expressed with what friendlinesse they were enter∣tained by the Barbarians, wherein you may perceiue that although the wilde men are cruell and reuengatiue against their e∣nemies, yet they are no lesse louing to their friendes and fau••urers.

Of the healing of the Barbarians disea∣ses, of theyr burialles, with the sor∣row and mourning they make ouer them that are dead.

IF any of them bee sicke, hee sheweth in what place hee is pained, causing it to be searched by some one that standeth by, or else by the trauellers about the coun∣trey, which are their cusening Pages, that is, Phisitions, and are another sort of peo∣ple then the Caribes, who doo likewise af∣firme that they can ease men of their pains, and lengthen their liues: Those people are much subiect to feuers and other kindes of diseases, but not so common as with vs: besides this, there raigneth among them a certaine incurable disease, called P••au••, pro∣ceeding from their lecherie, although many of their children are troubled therewith, as yong children with vs are sicke of the small por, it maketh blisters greater thē the ioynt of a mans thumbe, which runne ouer al the bodie and face, and is no lesse shame vnto them, then the French poxe vnto vs, they giue the sicke person no meate vnlesse he de∣sire it, although he shuld die for hunger, and although the sicknesse bee daungerous, yet those that are in health spare not to dance, leape, and drinke, thereby troubling the sicke man, whereof hee neuer complaineth or once disliketh, although it be much greefe vnto him: but if hee dieth, specially being a houskeeper, they presently change thou sing∣ing into weeping and mourning, with such a noyse, that all the whole night they neuer cease, specially the women that crie out, not like men, but like wolues and dogs, & with stammering voyces, vtter these or such like complaints, saying, Alax the strong ma•• is dead, that vsed to bring vs so many men to eate, others crying, O what a lustie hunter, and how cunning a fisher man was hee, O

what a strong and valiant man was hée in destroying our ennemies the Marga••aters and Portingales and in that sort lamenting and crying, they imbrace each other, neuer ceasing till the body be carried to the graue, adding many times, he is now gone whom we bewaile, the man Eheu is dead, whome we shall see no more before we goe behinde the hilles, there to daunce with him, as our prophets the Caribes teach vs, with many other wordes, which continue for the space of sixe ho••••••es, for they kéepe not their dead bodies any longer vnburied, and then they set the dead body in a round pit or graue, in forme like a winde pipe, wherein he stand∣eth vpright: but if the dead man be a house keeper, he is lapped in his cotten bed, and so buried in the middle of his house, with fe∣thers & such like things put into his graue, as if he were liuing in the same maner, that the Perunians bury their kings with their iewelles about them, as it shall be shewed. The next night after the dead body is buri∣ed, they set certaine dishes of meale, flesh, fish, and other victualles by the graue, be∣cause they are of opinion, that the A••gnan, or the Diuell would come and digge the bo∣dy out of the graue, if hee founde not other meate to eate, and withall they set some of their Coa••in, which they do as long as they thinke the body is not corrupted, from the which opinion they can by no meanes bee perswaded, although in the mornings they finde the meate whole, and in the same sort it was when they set it there. This toy, or foolish deuise seemes to spring out of the false gloses of certaine Rabines, but he that desi∣reth to see more hereof, let him reade Lerius: and because the Americans do often change their dwelling places, by whole villages together, therefore when they remooue they couer their graues with a great herb called Pindo, whereby such as trauell may easily know where men are buried, by the which places, whensoeuer they passe, they make a most fearefull noyse.

Thus much touching the generall cu∣stome of all the Brasilians, and now we wil procéede with the description of the rest of the coast from Cabo Frio, to the straites of Magellanes.

Heere followeth the description of the sea coasts.

FROM Cabo Frio to Punta de Buen Abrigo (in our Carde called Abitrioga) are a hundred miles: Beyond this point reacheth Tropicus Capricornus, and the line of repartition, which beareth the name aforesaide, from Buen Abrigo, to the Bay of S. Michael are 50. miles, and fro thence to the riuer of S. Francis, which lieth vnder sixe and twenty degrees are seuentie miles: from S. Francis to the riuer of Tibiq••••••e are a hundred miles, wherein lieth Puerto de Patos, which is vnder eight and twenty de∣grées: and right against it an Island called S. Catherina, Puerto de Fara••o•• and others: and from Tibiquire, to Rio de la Plata are more than fiftie miles, so that from Cabo de S. Augustin, to Rio de la Plata, that is, the siluer riuer are sixe hundred and threescore miles, which lieth vnder thirty fiue degrees on the South side of the Equinoctiall line. This riuer by the Barbarians is called the riuer of Parana, or Paranagna••••, that is to say, great riuer, or a riuer like the sea, ha∣uing certayne entries that are very broade, & many Islands, it is rich of siluer, pearles, precious stones, and fish: it is in breadth xx. miles, and many Islands between both the hookes of S. M••••ia•• and Cabo B••anco. This riuer increaseth and flowesh ouer like the riuer Nilus, making the country fruitful at certaine times of the yeere, and as some are of opinion, it springeth out of the hilles in the kingdome of Peru, into this riuer there runneth many other great riuers, as Auanca, Vicas, Purina, and X••••xa, which spring out of the high land called Bombon, many of the Spaniardes that dwell vppon this riuer, haue come vp as high as to Pe∣ru, and the mines of Potosi. The whole coast from Cabo Frio, to the Rio de Plata, or rio Solis, is inhabited by goodly men and well proportioned, but all eaters of mens flesh. The country is ful of brasil wood, and of white Anime. From Rio de Plata to Puerto de S. Elena, are thréescore miles, from S. Elena to Arenas Gordas are thirtie miles, from thence to Baros Anagedos forty miles, from thence to Terra Baixa fiftie miles, from terra Baixa to Bahya S••n F••n∣do thréescore and fiue miles: and from this Bay which is vnder one and fortie degrees, to the Arrecifes de Lobos are fortie miles. Vpon this bordereth the country of y^e Pata∣gones, where the inhabitaunts paint theyr faces with certaine herbs: frō Lobos which is vnder fortie foure degrees, to Cabo d•• S. Dominico, are fiue and fortie miles: from this cape to another called cabo Blanco are twenty miles to the riuer of Iohn Serrano, which lieth vnder nine and fortie degrées, and by others called Rio de Traba••os are threescore miles, betwéene them lieth Ba••a de S. Iulian, wherein is a good hauen. The people being wilde, and without weapons, couered with skins, and without any lawe,

but of a great stature: from thence to the Promontorium or cape de las 11000. Vir∣gins are fourescore miles: from Cabo de las 11000. Virgins which lieth vnder one and fiftie degrees and a halfe, to the entry of the straits of Magellanas, which vnder the same degrees from east to west are accounted 110 miles, some say 130. miles, and the south and north part from Venezula twelue hun¦dred miles, it is two miles broad, in some places more, and very deepe, and rather in∣creaseth than diminisheth, and runneth southward. In this strait are many Islands and hauens. The coast on both sides verye high, and full of great rockes: the countrie vnfruitful, it hath no greene land, but is ve∣ry colde, as hauing snowe the most part of the yeare: about it groweth many trees, whereof are diuers cedars, and other trées, bearing fruit like Bisnole or Creken. There they find Estriges, and other greater birds, with many strange beasts: also in that strait are many sardines, & flying fishes, they eate of all kindes of meates: there are likewise many seawolues, wherewith they line or furre their clothes, and whale fishes, the bones whereof they vse to make shippes, as also of the barkes of trees. This strait was discouered by Fernando Magellanus a Por∣tingale,* 1.15 in the yéere of our Lorde, one thou∣sand fiue hundred twenty and one, and as some saye, one thousand fiue hundred and ninetéene,* 1.16 entring vpon the one and twen∣tie day of October, and issuing againe in the moneth of December after, when as then the dayes were there at the longest, and the nights shortest. Touching this strait you may reade at large in the histories of India, and the nauigations of the Englishmē that also haue passed the same. The K. of Spaine in the yeare of our Lorde one thousand fiue hundred eightie and two, commaunded a Castle to be made vppon the point, or first entry into those straits on the south side to∣wards Peru, from whence most part of his treasure commeth, thereby to impeach other Nations to enter or passe the same: about this strait dwelleth certayne great giantes of tenne or eleuen foote high, and higher (as some men write.)

Magellanica, the sixt part of the worlde.

MAgellanica is the sixt part of the world which as yet is least knowne, but with out al doubt very great, and stretcheth farre and wide: the prouince in that countrey ly∣ing right against the strait of Magellana is called Terra de Fuego. Beach another pro∣uince lying in that part of the worlde, is e∣steemed to be rich of golde: the furthest I∣slands thereof are Iaua minor, or little Iaua, diuided into eight Kingdomes, bringing foorth many kindes of spices, as yet vnkno∣wen to vs. Iaua maior, Timor, from whence is brought white and redde sanders wood. Banda, from whence nutmegges and mace are brought: the Islands of Moluco, wher∣in groweth cloues: Los Romeros, and the Islands Salomonis. But hereof I wil leaue to speake vntil a more conuenient time, and wil proceede with our description to Peru, beginning from Panama, right against Nombre de Dios, and so containing our de∣scription in the briefest maner to Cabo De∣leado, or the desired Cape, lying in the straites of Magellana: but before I beginne, I wil first make a briefe description of Peru in generall.

Peru is a common word, and signifieth thrée things: first, a poore small countrey and hauen of the Spaniards, discouered by Pizzarro, and Almagio, lying about Pa∣nama vnder two degrées, on the north side of the line: secondly, by this worde is vn∣derstoode the whole countrey beginning at that hauen, and following along the coast within the south seas, til you come to Chi∣le, containing eight prouinces, as Quito, Cagnaresia, Porto veio de S. Iacomo, Cas∣samalca, Cuscoa, Cagnasia, Calloa, and Charcassia. Thirdly, this word Peru or Pe∣ruuia signifieth the sixt parte of the worlde, namely, that which is diuided southwarde from America, which is also seperated from New Spaine, by a straight or narrow péece of ground, not aboue seuentéene miles in breadth, making that Peru (which other∣wise is wholy cōpassed about with the sea) is not an Island, for that on the south side it hath the sea called the South Sea, whereby men passe through the straits of Magelana: on the west part lieth the strait it self, which diuideth Peru from the land that lieth ouer against it, as yet not fully discouered, and by some called Terra di Fuegos, that is, the land of Fire. This strait or narrowe pas∣sage, was found out by Magellanus, in the yeere of our lord one thousand fiue hundred and nineteene, and as some say, in the yeere of our Lord one thousand fiue hundred and twenty one, and reacheth right east & weast 110. miles, and lieth vnder 52. degrees and thirty minutes, being in the greatest part but two miles broad: the shore on both sides being full of high stone rockes. In this part of the worlde are fiue principall great prouinces, as Castilia del Or••, or the Gol∣den Castle, Popaiana, Brasilia, Chile, and

Peru, and is diuided from new Spaine, by the prouince of Dariene. Beginning from thence, and reaching to the straites of Ma∣gellana, you must then vnderstand Peru to be a whole sixt part of the world, which rea∣cheth wide and broade to aboue sixty foure degrees and thirtie minutes, namely on the south side of the line to fiftie two degrées, and one halfe, and on the north side twelue degrees to Saint Martha. which is the fur∣thest part of the country northward: in the furthest length this part hath fiftie three de∣grees, accounting from the meridian. Pas∣sing the Cape Saint Augustine which ly∣eth vnder 8. degrees, and thirtie minutes, southward to the Meridian, and the head of saint Francis lieth vpon the poynt of two parts southward. The whole sixt parte of the world is in forme almost like a Hart, or a Triangle, standing three equall distances or lines, being drawne from the three cor∣ners or points of the land. The first from the Cape Saint Augustine, to the straites of Magellana. The second from Magella∣na to saint Martha: and the third, from saint Ma••tha again vnto saint Augustine, which in this sort may be described, for that pla∣cing the one corner of the triangle, being Cape saint Augustine, vnder eight degrees and thirtie minutes southward, and the length thrée hundred forty and one degrées, the other corner of the triangle being the strait of Magellana vnder fifty two degrees and thirtie minutes southward, and the length 303. degrées. The line that is be∣tweene these two heades must haue sixtie degrees, as the Meridian three hundred six∣tie hath, so much then, or somewhat more hath the line that runneth from Magellana to Saint Marcha, which lieth vnder twelue degrees, and in length two hundred ninetie foure degrees: therefore this land hath al∣most the forme of a triangle: others say, it is formed like an egge, which on both sides runneth sharpe downewards, and is broad in the middle, whereof (the better to know it) I will first beginne with Peru, and the course the Portingales helde from Panama to Peru. In tune past by the name of Peru men vnderstoode all the prouinces that lie thereabouts, from Pastoa vnto Chile, and from the riuer Maul•• north and south, vnto the riuer Anchasmay. Nowe the Spani∣ards by the word Peru mean the land that lieth between the riuer Argiropilis, or Vil∣la de la P••atta, & the prouince Quito, which is a fruitful, sound, populous, and wel inha∣bited countrey, being in length from north to south seuen hundred miles, and in bredth from east to weast about a hundred miles, so that the borders east and south are Argi∣ropolis, towards the west sea and towards the north the prouince Pastoa.

This land is diuided into three partes, that is, Planitiem, Sierras, and Andes, that is, an euen flat land lying on the Sea side, with hilles, or hilly countrey, which passe through the middle of Peru lying eastward ouer the hilles. This land is rich with gold and siluer, more than any country in al the world, which well appeareth by the yeerely quantitie of golde and siluer brought from thence, respecting not the boastings & brags vsed by the Perunians themselues, that say, The summes yéerely brought out of that countrey is nothing in respect of the quanti∣tie therein, for that it may be esteemed as much as if a man hauing a sack ful of corne, should take a few graines out of it: it may likewise be iudged by the history of Francis∣co Xeresio, who writeth, that in Cusco there were houses, hauing the gates, walls, and roofe couered with plates of golde. Be∣sides this, Giraua writeth that the inhabi∣tantes of Anzerma hadde their weapons, breastplates, necke peeces, and peeces for their shinnes, all of massy gold: he likewise writeth, that about Quito there were gold hilles, that yeeld more gold then earth, the like do all Historiographers witnesse, that write of king Atabalidas ransome, which was so great, that the like was neuer heard of, for that he caused the chamber (wherein he was kept prisoner) beeing of twoo and twentie foot long, and seuenteene foot broad, to be filled so full of gold, that hee standing vpright therein, and stretching his armes and fingers aboue his head as high as hee could reach, the gold couered them, offering that if they would haue siluer and leaue the gold, he would fill the Chamber twice full, but the Spaniards tooke the gold, whereof the kings duty being a fift part, amounted to sixe hundred and seuenteene thousand, six hundred fortie seuen Carolus gyldernes, & 30000. marks of siluer, euery horseman had 12000. castilians, euerie Castillian of fourteene rialles besides siluer, and euerie footeman 1450. castillians, besides siluer, being 180. markes, so that to conclude, the golde onely ammounted vnto (in Flemish money) the summe of three millions, eighty eight thousand; two hundred & fiue carolus gylderns, besides the siluer, wherby may be knowne the great aboundance of gold and siluer that is in those countries: and al∣though Atabalida payed so great a treasour for his ransome, yet was it not comparable vnto y^e which his elder brother promised to pay, so that he might saue his life, for that he

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

had all the treasor of his predecessors, and also his fathers, which were not knowne to Atabalida, when he first entered into the kingdome, from whence by force he hadde driuen his brother, and placed him selfe therein. We reade likewise, that when the Spaniards first entred that country, they shooed their horses with shooes of golde, and what it yeeldeth yeerly at this present doth sufficiently appeare by the Armada that came from thence into Spaine the last yeere, whiche needeth not heerein to bee decla∣red.

But now proceeding to the description of the coast of Panama to Peru, you must first vnderstand that Panama and Nombre de Dios are two townes, lying one right ouer against the other, the one on the north sea, or north side of Peru, the other on the south sea seuenteene miles distant one from the o∣ther, Panama lying in a little valley, so neere vnto the sea, that when the moone is in the full, the sea entereth into the houses lying neerest to the shore: the houses thereof are part of reeds, and partly made of other sub∣stances mixed together, most couered with tiles, but there are not many houses in the towne. There is in this towne a very fitte and safe hauen, but very small, where with the streame or floud, the shippes doe enter, and with an ebbe, they go out, but not hea∣uy laden, for that such as are deepe laden, would be in danger to fall vpon the flattes: in this hauen there runneth both a great floud and ebbe, so that where the water is very deepe, within an houre after it will bee drie sand, whereby the shippes must keepe somewhat from the land, discharging and lading their shippes by little scutes, as well such as come out of Spaine thither, as that goe from thence into Spaine. This Towne hath from Peru, maiz, meale, hennes, and hony: it hath of it selfe, kine, and hogges, o∣ranges, lemons, coleworts, onions, lettuce, melons, and such like things in great abun∣dance.

This prouince of Panama, in time past was much inhabited, and haunted by the Indians, and al the riuers yeelded gold, but now by the Spaniards are most fished drie. When men will trauel by land from Pana∣ma to Nombre de Dios, the first dayes ior∣ney is faire and good way, the next day you enter into woods, which continue till you come to Nombre de Dios. In the middle of this way you come vnto a water, which in three houres can hardly be passed ouer, because of the many crookings & windings thereof, and many are cast away therein, the streame (specially in winter when there falleth much raine) running most swiftly. Such as compare this towne to Venice, are much deceiued, for that both of them put to∣gether, with many other townes erected by the Spaniardes in those countries, wil not make the compasse or greatnesse of the Cit∣tie of Venice, although euery man may iudge as pleaseth him. As touching the ma∣ner of sayling from Panama to Peru, as al∣so at what times of the yeare, you must vn∣derstand, that the best and fittest times of the yeere are in the three first moneths, that is, Ianuary, February, and March, vntill the moneth of Aprill, for as then the Sea is open, summer comming on, and many of the Brisen (which are east and northweast windes doe blowe, no weast or southerly windes as then stirring, whereby the ships do easily performe their voyages, and com∣monly ariue at their desired hauens, before any other winde, specially south winde, which for the most part of the yeare vp∣on the coast of Peru) doe blowe. They may likewise put out in the moneths of Au∣gust, and September, but make not so good ariuage, as in the moneths aforesaide, and if any ships do put out of Panama, at other times than in the moneths aforesaide, they are sure to haue a long and tedious voyage, and commonly som one of them is forced to turne backe againe, not being able to gette the coast, and are (by reason of the southern winds, which for the most part of the whole yeere blow vpon the coast (as I said before) as likewise because of the great contrarie streame) many of them are brought into great danger. It is very good with the wind blowing from Peru, to sayle to Panama. Ni∣caragua, and other quarters thereabouts: but to sayle to Peru from Panama it is very dangerous, and vncertayne. The ships that are laden with Spanish wares, and depart from Panama▪ first come to ••aboga, and the Ilands bordering on the same (which haue receiued their names from the Pearles) where they take in fresh water, in those I∣slands that are at the least fiue and twentie or thirtie together.

The Spaniardes in times past founde many Pearles, whereof they helde the name of Islas de Pa••las.) They lie hard∣ly vnder eight degrées northward. The greatest of them in times past, was woont to be inhabited: but not now, because the fishing for pearles beginneth to decay, and such as are owners of those Islandes there: in keepe slaues of Nicaragua, and Cubag••a, that looke to their beastes, and sowe the ground, as being very fruitfull: from thence they put into the sea westward, & then see y^e

poynt called Carrachine, which lieth north∣west and southest from the great Island of pearles called Taboga, distant about thir∣ty Italian miles, which are seuen Spanish miles and a halfe: as they come néere vnto this cape, they shall perceiue it to be a high hilly land, lying vnder seuen degrees and a halfe, from this poynt to the Rio de Pinas, or Pine trée hauen) the coast runneth south west, and southwest and by south, and is di∣staunt from the poynt aforesaide foure and twenty miles, which are six Spanish miles or sixe degrees and a halfe: it is a high land with great hilles and dales: on the sea side there groweth very great pine trees, and therefore it is called the Hauen of Pine trees: from thence the coast lieth southward and south and bywest, to Cape de las Cor∣rentas, that is, the cape of Streames, which is very small, and reacheth into the sea, and because of the great and stiffe streame that runneth like a strong fall of waters, running eastward like riuers, many times the Portingale ships which saile that way, are forced to anker in the night, and in the morning setting saile, it happeneth often∣times, that when they thinke to winde, that they are stayed, and driuen backe agayne, & so hang somtimes 15. or 20. dayes about that Cape before they can passe it: but pas∣sing forward beyond that Cape, you come to the Island lying before the Rio de Pal∣mas, so called because of the aboundaunce of palme or Indian nut trées that do growe thereon. This riuer is in compas somwhat more than fiue miles, which is one Dutch mile, and a mile and •• Spanish, which was once inhabited: it is distant from Cabo de Correntes, seuentie fiue miles, or foure de∣grees ••.

Thereabouts are many riuers, all very good water, and not farre from thence ly∣eth the land and riuer of Peru, where Piza∣••us arriued, and after his name almost all the country is called Peru: from the Iland de las P••linas folowing along the coast and the same course, you come to the strand of Bonauentura, which is distant from the I∣sland aforesaide somewhat more than nine miles, which are two Spannish miles ¼. Hard by this strand (which is very great) lieth a high cliffe or rocke of stone, and the entry of the Bay is vnder three degrées 1/••. All this side is full of very great hilles, and there runneth into the sea many and verie great riuers that haue their springs out of the hilles, by one of those the shippes enter into the land or ha••••n of Bonauentura, but the ••ilots that pu••••h there, ought to haue good knowledge of the riuer, for that if they be not wel acquainted with it, they are like to indu••e much danger, as it happeneth vn∣to many shippes, that had Pilots to whom the riuer is not knowne: from this Bay the coast runneth east, and east and by south to the Island Gorgona, which is distant from the strande seauenty fiue miles, which are ninetéene Spanish miles: the coast al along this course, is very lowe, full of trees, and o∣ther wilde places and hilles, from whence there runneth many great riuers, whereof the chiefe and greatest is the riuer of Saint Iohn, which is inhabited by Barbarians, hauing builded their houses vppon great postes and stoopes, in manner of houelles, where many dwell in one house, (and some alone by themselues) because the houses are very long and broade. These Indians are rich of gold, and their country is very fruit∣full, the riuers by force of the streames a∣bounding with much gold, but it is so sleeke and moorish that it can hardely bee gotten, but with the losse of many people, and with great labour.

This Island of Gorgona is vnmeasu∣rable high, wherein for the space of eight moneths yéerely it neuer ceaseth raining, and thundering, whereby it seemeth the E∣lements fight and striue one against the o∣ther, it is in circuite about two miles, or sixe Italian miles, all high hilles, vpon the the trees whereof are seene many peacocks, phesants, speckled cats, great serpents, ma∣ny sea crabbes, and night foules, seeming as if it were not inhabited, it hath likewise much fresh water. Summer there begin∣neth at the end of Maie, cleane contrary to Panama, whereas then winter beginneth. In this Iland Franciscus Pizarius with 13 others that had discouered the countrey of Peru, stayed certayne days, induring great paine and hunger, before they coulde ouer∣come the countrey. This country of Gor∣gona lieth vnder three degrees: and as tou∣ching the miles that in this discourse, as al∣so in the description of Brasilia, and other places I haue obserued, they are all Spa∣nish miles, whereof seuenteene 1/•• make a de∣grée: from this Iland the coast runneth west southwest, to the Iland del Gal••o, or of the Cocke, all this coast being lowe and full of vallies, from whence there runneth many riuers: this Iland is small, and in compas scarse a mile, or about three Italian miles, it hath certayne redde Downes. The same coast from the firme land thither lyeth twoo degrees from the Equinoctiall: from thence the coast tourneth southwestward till you passe the point called Mangla••es, which are trees so called, and in our Card Manglalos▪

which lieth scarce vnder two degrées: and from the Island to the poynt which is sixe Spanish miles, little more or lesse, or foure and twenty Italian miles: the coast is low and ful of vallies, and thereabouts runneth certaine riuers into the sea, which inwards to the land are inhabited: from thence the coast runneth southwest to the strand called S. Iacob, or S. Iago, and maketh a greate Creeke, where there is an open hauen or roade named by the Sardinians: and from thence runneth the great riuer of S. Iacob, where the gouernement of Pizarro began: and this strand is 9. miles ¼ from the point of Manglares, and it happeneth many times that the ships haue there at the beake head fourescore fadomes water, and at the sterne they touch the ground: and also it is often found, that sometimes they sayle in two fa∣domes water, and presently they find nine∣tie fadomes, which the strong course and fury of the riuer causeth: and although there are such banks, yet are they not dangerous, neither do the shippes refuse to passe in and out when they will. The strand of S. Ma∣thew, in our Carde Mathias, lyeth full in one degree: from thence the coast runneth west to the Cape saint Francis, which lieth from the strand thirtie Italian miles, that is, seuen Spanish miles and one halfe: this poynt lieth on high ground, and hard by it are certayne red and white Downes, that are of the same height. This poynt of saint Francis lyeth vnder one degrée, on the north side of the Equinoctiall line. From thence the coast runneth southweast, to the poynt Passao, which is the first hauen of Peru, o∣uer the which passeth the Equinoctiall line. Betweene these two poynts there runneth foure great riuers into the Sea, which are called Liquixinus, in Latine Quisinuae, and there about there is an indifferent good Ha∣uen, where the ships finde good water and wood to burne. From the poynt Passao, to the firme land are diuers high hilles, that are called De Quaque: the poynt is a land which is not ouer lowe, where you sée cer∣tayne Downes as aforesaide.

¶Here followeth the Nauigation from the Line to the Towne of the Kings called Lyma.

FRom hence forwarde wee haue declared the coast of Panama, in the South sea, til you come to the hauen of Quixinus, which lieth in the Countrey of Peru, now I will goe forward with the course that lieth be∣tweene Quixinus and the towne of Kings, so then departing from the poynt de Passos the coast stretcheth south, and south and by weast, to the hauen called Porto veio, or the Old Hauen: and before you come thither, there lieth the strand called Charaqui, wher the ships may put in without any daunger, and it is so safe a strand that they may there lay their ships on shoare, and mend them if they neede, be they neuer so great, for it is a good hauen of entraunce, onely that in the midle of the entry there lieth certain stones or rugged Islands, but the shippes may en∣ter at which side they wil and passe by them without any danger, for there is nothing to be shunned, but onely that which you sée before your eyes, the Olde Hauen lieth vn∣der one degrée on the south side of the Equi∣noctiall line, and is one of the fiue Townes which the christians or Spaniardes haue built in the flat land of Peru, so that Porto Veio signifieth the towne and countrey ly∣ing thereabouts, which is much ouerrunne & wasted, because it is a poore vnwholesome country, yet it hath certain mines of Sina∣ragdes, which they held long time hidden, and by no meanes would discouer them, as to this day they yet do. They had likewise in times past many golde and siluer vessels which are by the Spaniardes all taken and carried away, but now by the kings letters patents being made frée, they pay to theyr superiour lords, but onely the tenth parte of all their fruits, whereby many Spaniards withdrawe themselues from thence, séeing their profite to decay. The Countrey about Porto Veio was rich of golde, where the people made their houses in the trées, like birdes nests, and because the coast is moo∣rish, there is no being for horses, where∣by it was not so soone subdued by the Spa∣niardes, as also because that out of theyr nests, they threw stones, iauelines, pottes with hot water, and whatsoeuer came next to hand, whereby they killed many Spani∣ards, wherewith they were forced to couer themselues with boordes, and so cut downe the trees, before they could ouercome them, as also because the Countrey is so rough, sharpe, and wilde, that they could hardely finde prouision for their army: there is yet much country thereabouts vnhabited. By the Old Hauen two miles within the land is the towne of saint Iacob, or Iago, which for houses and inhabitants is not inferiour to Porto Ve••o: and thereabouts is the pas∣sage of Gainacaua, by the Spaniards so cal∣led for this occasion, that Ga••••acaua the fa∣ther of Attabalida vpon a certain time sent one of his Captain••••, ••••th a great army to subdue that countrey, who minding to passe

his people ouer the riuer, commanded them to make a bridge of péeces of wood, that so they might passe. Which being made, when his people with their armor and weapons were vppon it, the ennemy cutte the ropes, wherewith the péeces of wood were fastned together, whereby many of them that were vpon it, by force of the streame were drow∣ned in the riuer, and the rest spoyled by the enemy. Which Gainacapa vnderstanding, assembled a great number of souldiers, and with them departed from Quito, and being in the plaine field, in open battell he ouer∣came those people: after the which victorie, minding to make a passage ouer the riuer, that men might passe ouer on foote, to the same end he caus•• great numbers of stones and earth to be brought thither, and threw them into the riuer, being twentie foote broad, but whatsoeuer he threw in, al wold not preuaile, by reason of the great deapth, and swiftnesse of the riuer, that carried it a∣way by force of the streame, which hee per∣ceiuing, left off his worke and so departed, and therfore the Spaniards haue giuen this place the name of the passage of Gainacaua: about the which passage lieth the towne of saint Iacob builded by them. About a Spa∣nish mile and a half distant from this town of saint Iacob, towardes the south lyeth a round hil, by them called Christs Hil. From Porto ve••o further forward the same course almost foure miles distant in the south, lieth the poynt of saint Laurence, and two miles, and a quarter from thence southwest lieth an Island of the same name, which is full a mile in compasse, wherein the Indians or Peruuians of the firme land, in times past vsed to make their sacrifices and offerings, killing many lambes, shéepe, and some chil∣dren, offering their blood vnto their idolles, or diuelles, whose figures were made and carued in stone, to whome they doe vsually pray.

When Franciscus Pizarius with his thir∣teene companions trauelled to discouer Pe∣ru, they entred likewise into this Island, where they found certaine iewells of siluer and golde, many cloakes and shertes of very faire and fine wooll, so that from that time forwards, and for the same cause this Island was called Siluer. The poynt of saint Laurence lieth vnder one degrée, on the south side of the line. And (as I sayde before) Peru beginneth at the line, and stretcheth southwarde vnto Chile. The people that dwell vnder the line and there∣abouts, haue the customes and manners of the Iewes. Whereby many men are of o∣pinion, that they are issued from the Iews, or of the race of Cham: they speake hoarse∣ly, and in the mouth, like the Moores, and are much giuen to vncleannesse, especially that which is wholy against nature, where∣by they do not well agree with their wiues, but rather despise them. The women weare neither hayre nor apparell, but onely a cer∣taine aprone before their priuities. They plant, sowe, reape, and thrash the corne, and wheate meale, whereof they make breade, which wheate in Peru is called Zara: the men weare short shertes without sleeues, downe to their nauelles, their members be∣ing vncouered, and some goe naked & paint their bodies with a black colour, their haire being shauen, and cut almost like Friars, but they leaue no haire neyther before nor behinde their heades, but onely vppon the sides: it is likewise a common custome with them to weare many Iewels of golde, both in their eares, and noses, specially eme∣rauldes, such as are found in those Coun∣tries.

And although the inhabitants will not discouer the mines, yet hath it beene percei∣ued by certaine rough stones: on their arms and legs they weare many beades of gold, siluer, and small tourqueses: also of white and red Teekens and Huyzkens, but will not haue their wiues to weare anye such: touching the situation of the Countrey, it is very hote, and vnwholesome, and there they haue certayne sore biles, that issue out vpon their faces and other partes of theyr bodies as bigge as akornes, hauing deepe rootes, worse and more deformed than por, and must be wroong off by binding a threed about them when they are ripe: they paynt their mouthes, and boare holes in theyr eares, nose, lippes, and cheekes vpon their festiuall dayes wearing iewels and pearles therein: the scutes by them vsed in those countries, to fish, as also to saile in, are like drifts made of thrée, fiue, seuen, nine, and e∣leuen light quarters, or rafters of wood laid or bound together, as men binde mastes, and let them driue vppon the water, and their manner is to binde the longest in the middle, and the rest on both sides shorter than other, and as their driftes are long or short, so are their sailes proportioned, and when they haue brought their drift a good way forwar•• they throwe bread, fruit, and such like things into the sea, praying for a good winde, as being weary, and wholly without strength to rowe any more. The doores of the Churches in that Countrey stand Eastward, hanged with certaine cot∣ton linnen, and in euery church there stan∣deth two grauen Images, of forme like

blacke Buckes, and before them there is a fire made of swéete wood, (which groweth in that countrey) which fire burneth conti∣nually, out of the which wood, the barke be∣ing taken away, there issueth a certaine sweet gumme, I thinke it to be Cedar, from whence the gumme Elemi is taken, which is accounted for the life of the dead, and the death of the liuing, because it preserueth the dead body from putrifaction. There are al∣so in those temples certain Images of great serpents, which they pray vnto: and besides these common idolles, euery man hath his seuerall Idoll, each man according to the trade he vseth, as the Fishermen a greate fish, and the Hunters a hart or the Image of some wilde beast, by the Cape Passao, in some churches vpon euery piller thereof, were placed the bodies of men women and children crucified, that were so well kept and dried, that by no meanes they could rot or cast foorth any vnswéete sauour: there were likewise the heads of Indians set vp∣on nailes, which with some certaine sub∣staunce they had so closed and knitte toge∣ther, that they were no bigger in compasse than a mans fist: their houses are made of great thicke réedes, which growe in that countrey: but for fruite they haue very lit∣tle.

Procéeding further to the description of the coast, and folowing on south and south∣weast to Cape saint Elena, before you come to that poynt, there are two hauens, one called Colao, the other Calemgo, where the shippes anker, to take in fresh water, and woodde to burne: and from the poynt saint Laurence, to Cape saint Elena, are full nine miles, and lieth vnder twoo de∣grees, and from the point towardes the north it maketh a hooke of land, which is a very good Hauen: about a bowe shoote from thence, there standeth a fountayne, which by certaine veines runneth into the sea, from whence there issueth a certayne Bitumen, altogether like pitch, and by the Spaniardes is vsed about their shippes in¦steede of tarre, and the Peruuians say, that about that point in times past, there dwelt great men like Giants, but they knew not from whence they came, and fedde vppon such meate as their neighbours vsed, spe∣cially fish.

Those Giauntes fished likewise vppon drifts, and manye times came on foote to land through the water where they had at the least two fadome déepe and somewhat more. They went naked, and were most cruell, killing many of the people therea∣bouts.

When the Spaniardes arriued at Porto Vero, they found therein two Images of those Giantes, a man and a woman, and the Peruuians say likewise that the destru∣ction of those Giauntes was done by a boy that came downe from heauen, shining like the Sunne, that fought against them with fiery flames, in such manner, that where the flames touched, they tare and rent the stones, the rents and holes where∣of are at this day to be seene, and by that meanes the Giauntes ranne into certayne holes to hide themselues, where they were all destroyed.

This tale was not greatly beléeued by the Spaniardes, vntill one Iohn de Helmos borne in Truxillio, Gouernour of Porto Vero, in the yeare of our Lorde God euer∣lasting,* 1.17 one thousand fiue hundred fourtie and thrée caused certayne places to bee dig∣ged vppe, where they found so great bones and ribbes, that it was incredible to bee mens bones, but that they found the heads lying by them, the teeth thereof being three fingers broad, and foure fingers long, and fiue quarters square, which were sent into diuers places of Peru, and from that time the Peruuians tale thereof was beleeued to be true. The Spaniards opinions are, that because the Giantes were giuen to sinne a∣gainst the lawes of nature, that the most righteous God had destroyed them by his Angel with fire from heauen, as he did the Citties of Sodome and Gomorrha: Yet is this not certainely to be credited, because the Americans haue no histories, bookes, nor other writings to record the same, one∣ly the memories and rehearsalles of menne from time to time, and by some tokens and memorialles there made of all sortes of painted cotten ropes, which they call Quip∣pos, signifying by the number of knottes, made of diuers fashions, that which they would remember, beginning from the bot∣tome, and so telling vpwardes, from one to tenne, and so forth, painting the ropes of the same colour that the things were of, which they woulde thereby signifie or haue in memorie, whereof the Spaniardes by their Barbarian crueltie and negligence haue spoyled great numbers, in euery pro∣uince: there were menne appoynted for the purpose, in that manner to register such things as had happened, as you may reade more at large in the Historie of Mexico, those that did it were caled Quippo camay∣os, of which cordes there were whole hou∣ses full, which by such as were acquainted with them, could easily be tolde, although the things had béene done many yeeres be∣fore▪

but returning againe to the descripti∣on of the coast, from the point of saint Ele∣na you saile to the riuer of Tumbez, which lieth almost nineteene miles off, and from thence about foure miles lieth the Islande P••na otherwise called the Island of Saint Iacob, which is more than seuen miles and one half in compasse, very rich, and inhabi∣ted with so many people, that they warred continually with the men of Tumbez, and the people of the firme land: betweene them hauing had many battells in open field, but by continuaunce of tune, and power of the Spaniardes, they were in the ende wholely subdued. This Island is very fruitful and ful of al sorts of trees, abounding both with wilde beastes and fish: also of fresh water: for their apparel they vsed shirts and other clothes: they fish with drifts of light wood, bound vpon two other peeces of woodde, as their neighbors do, of the which drifts some of them are so great, that at the least fiftie men and three horses might sit vpon them, which they vsed both with sailes and oares, wherein they are very expert. It chaunced on a time, that the Peruuians bare certaine Spaniardes vpon one of those driftes, and that they vntied the cordes that bound the wood thereof together, whereby the Spani∣ardes were all drowned, and the Indians saued themselues vpon the peeces of wood, and many without them swamme to land, as being very expert therein. Their wea∣pons are slings, bowes, clubbes, and billes of siluer and copper, also launces and pikes with heades of base golde: both the menne and womē weare many iewels, their drin∣king cuppes and vesselles being of gold and siluer: the Lorde of the Island was much honoured by his subiects, and was so ielous that he cut off both the noses and priuy mē∣bers of his seruaunts that attended on his wiues. In this Island Pizarius and the Spaniards were very friendly entertained. But the Gouernour perceiuing their great auarice and couetous desire in seeking for gold, as also their lechery with the women, fell vpon them, with great numbers of In∣dians: but in the end, not being able to re∣sist the Spaniardes, he was forced to flie and keepe himselfe in the wooddes: which vic∣tory was after by Pizarius most cruelly v∣sed, and therewith passed ouer vnto the prouince of ••umbez, which is about 12. miles distant: but the inhabitants hauing heard of their cruelty vsed among those of Puna, fled into a Castle lying somewhat in∣ward from the sea: but Pizarius to the con∣trary sent vnto the Gouernour, making as thogh he would be friends with him, wher∣vpon the Gouernour came not alone, but prepared himselfe very strong to go & meete him, thinking thereby to ouerthrowe him: but the spaniards setting forward towards him, in the night time passing ouer the riuer with their men, being guided by such as were well acquainted with the way, and going through sharp and rough waies, they surprised the Peruuians by night, as they lay sleeping, and so ouercame them, and af∣ter the ouerthrow entred the town of Tum∣bez, which they robbed, and spoiled the rich church, taking away the same: and in that towne hee was informed of the great riches in Per••. Touching the Island Puna, it is a common opinion, both of the Indians & Spaniards, that in time past, there was much golde and siluer hidden within theyr Temple. Also the inhabitants at this pre∣sent liuing do affirme, that their forefathers were very religious, and much addicted to soothsayings, and other abuses, very coue∣tous, and aboue all other things, they vsed the accursed sin of S••dome lying with their own sisters, & committing many other gree∣uous sinnes. Into this Island fled brother Vincentius de Vaile viridi (a Friar that was the chiefe cause of the warres against the Peruuians, and after that first Bishop of Peru) with two and fortie Spaniardes, seeking to shunne the wrath of Didaci Al∣mag••••, and hauing hidden himselfe in the night time, the Ilanders with clubbes slew both him and his companye, where hee receiued a very iust rewarde for his good workes.

In Puna, and in the countries of Guaia∣quil, and Porto Ve••o groweth the roote with vs called Zarzape••••••a▪ which is vsed against the por and other diseases. In that Island they bruise it betweene two peeces of wood, & so presse out the iuyce, which done, they mixe it with warme water, and giue it to the patient, whereupon they sweate as much as possible they may, which drincke they vse for certaine dayes, eating onely a little bisket, with a rosted henne, in our country we vse to cut the roote in small pee∣ces, and seethe it, causing the sicke person to drinke it certain dayes: by this Island there lieth another (but somwhat further into the sea) called S Clara, not that it is at this pre∣sent, neither was in time past inhabited, as hauing neither woodde nor fresh water, but onely because the predecessors of the I∣slanders of Puna vsed therein to bury their forefathers, & there offered their sacrifices: y^e place wherin they buried their dead, was very high, with whome they buried greate treasures of golde, siluer, & other iewels, as

offered and layde vp for the vse and behoofe of their Gods, which at the enterance of the Spaniards they caused to bee hidden, no man knowing where it is become. This riuer of Tumbez is greatly inhabited, and in time past was much more populous: by it there stoode a verie strong and beautifull Castle, built by the Iugas or kings of Cas∣co, who ruled ouer all the countrey of Pe∣ru, and therein kept a great treasor, where there was a temple of the sunne, and a co∣uent of Ma••aconas, which is as much to say as cheefe or principall women and maides, that were consecrated and appoynted for the seruice of the Temple, which liued al∣most after the manner and custome of the Vastale virgins in Rome▪ and were therein maintained: but because these women with their seruices and works are spoken of here∣after, I will for this present leaue them. Touching the building of this castle, it was long since destroyed, yet not so wholly, but that men may yet perceiue the greatnes and magnificence thereof. The mouth of the Ri∣uer Tumbez lyeth vnder foure degrees on the south side in the firme land. Right ouer against Pana there are people that haue fiue or sixe of their foreteeth in the vpper gumme pulled forth, some say they do it of pride, and think it a beautie, others say that they had their teeth pulled out as a punishment for certaine iniurie they hadde in times past doone and committed against the kings or Iugan of P••ru, and others say they offer thē vnto their Idols. From the riuer Tum∣bez the coast runneth southwest, to Cabo Blanco, or the white Cape, being distant full 11. miles, and lyeth vnder three degrees and from whence it runneth west, to the Island de Lobos or of ••olues: betweene Cabo Blanco and the Isle de Lobos, lyeth a poynt called Depa••na, and in our Carde Pariana, which reacheth almost as farre into the sea, as Cabo Blanco: from this pointe the coast reacheth againe southwest, til you come to Parta, betweene Cabo Blanco and Parta, lyeth the towne of S. Michael, which was the first town that the Spaniards built within Peru, called Noua Castillia, and was begun by P••z••rius, in the yeare of our Lord 1531.* 1.18 wherein also was the first Christian Church, although at this time of small im∣portance, and so I wil leaue to speake there∣of.

The whole coast from Tumbez is without hils or daies, and where there are any dales they are bare, only full of sand and stones, and but fewe riuers issue from the coast: the hauen of P•• lyeth beyond the Cape som∣what more then sixe miles, and is a good hauen, wherein they rig their ships, & newe tarre them, being the principall staple of all Peru, and of al the ships that sayle for those parts. This hauen of Parta lyeth vnder fiue degrees, from the Island of Wolues afore∣said, thither you run east and by west, which are distant three Spanish miles, or twelue Italian miles, and from thence the coast runneth south, wherewith you fall vppon the poynt de la Cora: in the middle between the Island of Wolues and this point, there is a great intercourse or creeke of water, hauing very good harber for shippes to an∣ker in, it lyeth vnder six degrees on the south side of the line, from thence you perceiue 2. Islands, both called Islas de Lobos, that is, Islandes of Sea Wolues, because of the great quantity that are thereabouts: the first of these Islands lyeth north and south, with the first poynt, and is distant from the firme land three Spanish miles, or 12. Ita∣lian miles: the other Island lyeth 9. miles further forward, and is not ful vnder seuen degrees, southwest from the coast, till you come to the hauen called C••sma, and from this first Island you saile northeast & south∣west to Malabrigo, (which is the slender or bad defence) where there is a hauen wherin their shippes may not enter, but with faire weather, and such specially as haue great occasion, thereby to further their voyage. Seuen miles and a halfe further you come to Tarr••e••sse, (that is the cliffe) of Truxilio, which is a verie bad hauen, and hath no o∣ther harber or defence, then onely good an∣kers, and a mile and a halfe within the land lyeth the towne of Truxilio, which is al∣so one of the Spanish townes, situate in the plaine countrie of Peru, it is builded vppon the corner of a Riuer in the vallie of Chimo. The countrey thereabouts is verie fruitfull, abounding in wheat, M••l••, cattell and water, and the towne built in good proportion, hauing about three hun∣dred Spanish houses, with broade streetes, and a great market place: rounde about the towne are many fayre gardens, and euerie house is serued with water by chan∣nels, comming out of the Riuer, and run∣neth into all their gardens, which are con∣tinually greene and full of blossomes, wher∣fore it is saide this towne lyeth in a verie good place, compassed about with faire and pleasant meddowes, corne fieldes, and Pastour groundes, where the inhabi∣tants feede their Cattell, and likewise plant and sowe theyr Corne. There the Spaniards haue plāted many kinds of spa∣nish fruites, as por••ga••nats, oranges, le∣mones, citrons, figs, & much of the countrie

fruit in great aboundance, and verie good: besides this, they haue many foules, hens, and capons, whereby they are prouided of all things, of flesh in great aboundance, and fish out of the sea, which is hard by them, & also in the riuer. The Indians inhabiting about the towne, are in subiection to the Spaniards, and furnish the towne with all things that are necessarie: at this Towne there are whole shippes laden with cotten linnen, made by the Indians to sell in o∣ther places. This towne was made and e∣rected by Marquis Francisco Pizarto, the first gouernour of Peru,* 1.19 in the yeare 1533 From Tru•• by land vnto saint Micha∣e•• another spanish towne, and the first place where they inhabited in those countryes, are about fiue and fortie spanish miles, or an hundred and eightie Italian miles, litle more or lesse, for that comming from Saint Michae••s to the vallie Motup••, are fifteene miles and a halfe, all sandie and bad way, specially where men much cheefely trauell: and being past those fifteene miles, you en∣ter into certaine vallies, and though thera∣bouts falleth certaine small riuers out of the hilles, yet they reach not to the vallies, but runne into the sands, whereby they doo no good: and to trauaile this way, you must depart out of Saint Micaels in the enening, and so go all night, and earlie in the mor∣ning you come to certain places where you find water to drinke, for by night the heate of the sunne doth not hurt, some carrie bot∣tles with water or wine, and when you come vnto the vally Motupe you enter into the kings hieway, very broad & euen, which I haue occasion to speake of the kings of Peru▪ I will declare more at large. This vallie is broade and fruitfull, but the riuer that falleth from the mountaine, stoppeth before it commeth vnto the sea but because the earth is verie moorish, there groweth many trees: the people draw their waterout of certaine pits, which they dig within the earth, their traffike is cotten wool, and cloth made thereof: three miles from Motupe ly∣eth the faire fresh vallie of Xa••anca, which is also three miles great, through the which there ••unneth a goodly riuer from whence they fetch water to moysten their grounds: this vallie in time past was very populous, and likewise the other: in this vallie were many houses of great Lords, that therein kept their stewards to commaund ouer the rest, who were greatly honoured and fea∣red by the common people: from this vallie you goe to another called ••uqueme▪ which likewise is great and full of bushes, the ruines of the great houses that stood therin, yet to bée séene, do euidently shew that ma∣ny people haue inhabited in that vallie: a dayes iourney further there is yet ano∣ther faire vallie called ••••nto, and between these two vallies there is nothing but sandy wayes, and drie stony hils, where you find•• neither liuing creatures, trees, nor leaues, but onely certaine birdes that flie ouer it, and such as will passe that way, must haue good guides, lest they loose themselues in the sandie downes, and by reason of the great heate of the sun, and want of water, should faint for thirst. From Cinto you come to an other vallie called Coliche, through the which there runneth a great riuer called by that name: this vally likewise in times past was full of people, but nowe for the most part by meanes of the warres, they are al∣most consumed: from whence you goe to Zana, much like the ••ormer, and somewhat further to Palcamayo, of all the rest therea∣bouts the most fruitful and populous: the people of this vallie before they were ouer∣come and subdued by the ••ings of Peru were verie mightie and much esteemed of by their neighbours, they had great chur∣ches, wherein they sacrificed, but now al de∣stroyed and ouerthrowne: there were like∣wise many Indians graues. Through this vallie there runneth a great riuer, that wa∣tereth al their groundes, and through it also passeth the kings high way, and there∣in were many houses belonging to the king.

In this vallie they make much cotten work, & haue al kind of cattel, as kine, hogs, goates, and such like beasts, and is verie temperate. From this vallie you go to an∣other called Cancama, not inferiour for fruitfulnesse and pleasure to the other. They haue likewise many sugar canes and very good fruit, wherein there is a cloyster of Dominican Friers, made by Dom di S. Themafe, and three miles from thence in the vallie of C••••••o, lieth T••ux••l••▪ as I said before, which val••••e keepeth the name of a Lorde called C••••o, who was a vali∣ant Souldiour, and liued long time 〈◊〉〈◊〉 warres.

The kings of Peru greatly esteemed that vallie, wherein they builded many houses and gardens of pleasure, and through it al∣so passeth the kings high way, with the wales: but returning again vnto the coast, the hauen of ••xillo lyeth vnder seauen degrees •• and from thence you saile to the hauen of Goanape▪ which lyeth full fiue miles from the towne of ••x••lo, vnder eight degrees and •• and somewhat further southward lyeth the hauen 〈◊〉〈◊〉 or holie,

where the shippes put in, by it there is a great riuer and a very good water: all this coast is without hilles, and (as I saide be∣fore sandy and chalkie vallies. This hauen of Porto Santa lyeth vnder nine degrees: and further southward about foure miles distant lieth another hauen called Ferrol▪ a very good and sure hauen, but hath neyther fresh water, nor wood to burne: and about foure miles and a halfe further there lyeth a hauen called Casina where there is a Riuer of fresh water, and much woodde to burne, where the shippes doe ordinarilye refresh themselues, it lyeth vnder tenne degrees: From Casma the coast runneth south to the cliffes called Los Farollones di Guaura: A little further lieth Guarmey, wherein run∣neth a riuer: and from thence you sayle the same course to the Barranca, or Downes, which is fifteene miles towardes the south: and foure miles and one halfe further lieth the hauen of Guaura, where the shippes may take in as much salt as they will, for there is so much that all Spaine and Italie might be furnished with salt from thence, and yet they woulde haue sufficient for the country: three miles further lie the Cliffes or Farrollones: From this poynt which ••utteth out of the land with the same north∣east and southweast course, you saile sixe miles further, to the furthest cliffe that ly∣eth into the sea. These Cliffes lie vnder eight degrées and one halfe: from thence the coast turneth againe southeast, till you come to the Island of Lyma, in the middle way, and somewhat more towards Lyma lieth a rocke which is called Salmarina, and is vnder seuen or seuen degrées and a halfe. This land maketh a barre of defence before Callao, which is the hauen of the Towne of Kings, or of Lyma, and by this defence from the Island the hauen is very safe, for the shippes to harbour in: Callao lieth vn∣der twelue degrees and a halfe.

The way by land from Truxillo to Lima.

THe towne of Truxillo lyeth distant from Lima sixtie spanish miles, which is 48. duch miles, or 240. Italian miles, all the which way is sandie, vnlesse it be when you passe certaine vallies. Now when you set out of Truxillo, you come first to the va∣lie of Gu••nape, which is full fiue Spanish miles from thence, that is, 21. Italian miles, which in times past was wel known because of the good drinke called Cica, that was made ther, no lesse then in Italy, Men∣te, Frascon, and in Spaine, S. Martin, are e¦steemed for the good wines that are there to be solde, and this vallie is inhabited and watered as the rest are, it hath a verie good hauen, where the shippes take in all theyr prouision: from thence you come to a little valley, where no riuer runneth through, but it hath a small water, where those of Peru and other trauailers vse to drinke: and going further, you come to the vallie of Santa, which in time past was verie popu∣lous, and had in it many braue souldiours, and captaines for commanders, which held stoutly against the Kings of Peru, so that they were forced to ouercome them more by pollicie then force: they were likewise much esteemed of by their kings, that cau∣sed many houses & pallaces to be built ther∣in, as being one of the greatest and biggest vallies in those countries, and through it there runneth a verie strong and great ri∣uer, which is verie full and high when it is winter in the hilles, wherein also were ma∣nie Spaniards drownde. Nowe they haue a drift to set ouer their passengers, therein in time past there dwelt many thousand people, nowe there are not aboue 400. left. They go apparrelled both men and women with certain mātles and shirts, with bands or rolles about their heades: all kindes of fruites both of that countrey, and such as are brought out of Spaine, do grow therein in great aboundance. There likewise they take much fish: the shippes that saile along the coast, do there take in fresh water and other prouisions: two daies iourney from thence, lieth another vallie called Guamba∣c••o, for fruitfulnes & other things like vnto the rest, & about a daies iourney and a halfe further lyeth the valley of Guarmey, wher∣in are many beasts, cowes, hogs, and hor∣ses, from thence you go to Parmongo, no lesse pleasant then the former: in it are yet seene certaine faire castles, built after theyr manner, wherein vpon the walles are pain∣ted the Images of certaine beastes and birdes: and it is to be wondered at howe they make the water runne out of the riuer so farre into the land, whereby it moystneth all the countrey: a mile and a halfe from the vallie, lieth the riuer Guaman, which in our speech signifieth the riuer of the fields, and is by them called Barranca, which vallie is like all the rest, and when it raineth much in the hilles, this riuer is verie dangerous. A dayes iourney from thence lyeth the val∣lie of Guaura, from the which you go to Lima, the vallie wherin it lyeth is the grea∣test and broadest of all that are betweene it

and Tumbez, and as it is greatest, so was it verie populous, wherof at this time there are few left: for when the towne began to be inhabited, the inhabitants of the towne tooke the countrey and land from those that dwelt in the vallie, who after that were likewise destroyed and cleane rooted out▪ This towne next vnto Cusco, is the grea∣test in all the countrey of Peru and the prin∣cipall, for that at this present the Viceroyes of Peru, the Archbishop, the Councell, and the Chancerie, wherein all processes are su∣ed, and the lawes of the whole countrie ad∣ministred, are resident therein, whereby there is great traffike and concourse vnto Lyma, because many people come thither out of the townes lying about it. In this towne are faire houses, some built with Towers and costly galleries: the Market place is great, and the streetes broade, and entring into the market place, from whence also you may goe into euerie place of the towne, and to the fieldes, and into most of the houses there runneth certain channels, that conuay water, a great commoditie and pleasure vnto the townesmen, where∣with they may water all their gardens and orchards, which are there verie faire and pleasant: vpon the riuer likewise are many water milles, made after the manner of our countrey, wherewith they grinde theyr corne, to conclude, therein dwelleth manie rich inhabitants, some worth 150000. duc∣kets: and from this towne oftentimes there saileth shippes that are worth in value at the least 800000. duckets, and some a Mil∣lion: on the east side a little aboue the town, lyeth a high hill, whereon there standeth a Cru••••fix: on another side of the towne, the townsmen haue certaine places where they keepe their cattell, their douehouses, vine∣yards, (but no good grapes because of the grounde) gardens of pleasure, not onely full of all those countrie fruits, but also of Spa∣nish fruites, as figges, poundgarnats, le∣mons, oranges, melons, beanes, pease, and sugar canes, all verie good and sauorie, and better then in Spaine, and to say the truth, to passe a mans life in quietnesse (were it not for the reporte that runneth of the Spani∣ards, that they make warre against those people without a cause) I thinke it the best and most pleasant place in all the world, the aire being so temperate, that all the yeare long there is no extremitie either of heate or cold, and it was neuer heard that euer they had famine, plague, or any raine, thunder, or lightning, but to the contrarie, alwayes a cleare and faire skie: it was builded by the Admirall Don Francisco Pizarro, in the yeare of our Lord 1535.* 1.20 and was called 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Kings towne, because they arriued therein vpon twelfe day, by vs so called. Touching victualles, besides fish, which they haue both out of the sea and the Riuer▪ in great a∣boundance, as also flesh and fruits of trees, and of the earth, as I saide before: they haue no lesse quantitie of wheate: and the foure moneths of summer in Spaine, are winter with them, onely somewhat colder then the summer: in those soure moneths of winter, there falleth euerie day in the fore∣noone, a small dew or mist, but not vnhol∣some, as with vs, for that those that haue a∣ny paine in their heades, washing their heades therewith, it healeth the ach: it is ve∣rie likelie that this towne of Lima will dai∣ly increase in people and houses, for many yeares together there were not aboue 500. houses therein, yet the place is great inough to containe 2000. houses, for the streetes are verie broade, and the market as bigge as a great fielde, euerie house is eightie foote broade, and a hundred and sixtie foote long, and because there is no conuenient woodde whereof to make chambers, for that al their wood within two or three yeares, is cleane consumed by wormes, therefore the houses be but of one storie high, yet verie costly and sumptuous, with many chambers, halles, and parlers, both fitte to dwell in, and also to receiue strangers, the walles of the hou∣ses are made of a certaine stuffe baked hard together, and filled with earth. They couer their houses with painted mattes, or else with painted linnen, and round about and aboue vppon the walles they make arbours of greene boughes, wherein they sit to keepe themselues from the sunne, for raine they neede not care, for there it neuer raineth: this Citie hath vnder it al these townes hereaf∣ter named, where there are Bishops, as Quito, Cusco, Guamanga, Arequipa▪ Pax, P••ata, Trugillo, Guanuco, Chachapo••a, Portus, Vetus, Guaiaquil, Popatan, Carchi▪ Saint Michael, and S. Francis. Before it was saide that Peru is diuided into three prouinces, in flat or plaine land, on the sea coast in hillie lande, that runneth through the middle of Peru, & in other lands, lying beyonde the hilles: touching the flat lande on the sea shore, I haue hitherto spoken, be∣ginning from the line, and the Cape Pas••ao hitherto, so you must vnderstand that from Tumbez, not onelie to Lima but also fur∣ther southward, the sea coast is full of ma∣ny great droughts, and wilde sandie pla∣ces, where for the space often miles it neuer thundereth, lightneth, nor raineth, but be∣yonde that, or all the space that is betweene

those tenne miles and the hilles, it thunde∣reth, lightneth, and raigneth. In this flatte land there are no fountaines nor welles, but foure or fiue standing waters that are brackish, because they are neare the sea, the inhabitants vse the riuer waters, that run out of the hilles, which spring of the snow and raine that falleth on the hilles, and not out of fountaines that stande among the hils. The distance of these riuers are alrea∣die partly described, lying seuen, eight, ten, twelue, fifteene, and twentie miles one from the other, yet most part seuē or eight, wher∣by such as trauaile direct their course, be∣cause they haue no other waters: on both sides of these riuers about a mile broade or further, and sometimes more or lesse, accor∣ding to the scituation of the countrey, are diuers fruitfull trees, and corne landes, which are planted and sowed by the peo∣ple of the countrey, which they may do all the yeare long, also there groweth about those riuers many wilde trees, cotten, reeds, thistles, and L••s, and since the Spaniards subdued the countrey, they sowe wheate, moystning the lande by certaine channels, made out of the Riuers, and because they runne with so great force out of the high hilles, that without helpe men can hardly passe them, and many are drowned: such as trauaile in that flat countrey go so neare to the sea coast, that they haue them alwayes in their sight: when it is winter in the hilles, and that it raineth much, it is dangerous trauailing in those countries, specially to passe the riuers, which they must either do vpon drifts which they haue for the purpose, or with a net, which they fil with canworden or goords, whereupon the trauailer must lie, and one of the Indians swimmeth before him, drawing the net or drift, and an other behinde that steereth it. The people in the flat land dwell in houses made of boughes, the men weare shirts and cloathes vppon their knees, and ouer it they cast an vpper garment or mantle, the wo∣men weare a kinde of cotten pettiecoate, from the head to the foot, and although their manner of apparrel is in euerie place almost alike, yet they vse certain differences in the attiring of their heades, some wearing no∣thing but plaine hairelaces, some double and wreathed, others of one colour, and some of diuers colours, and there is no man but he weareth some thing vppon his head, and all different, according to the manner of the country. Those Peruuians of the plaine countrie are diuided into three manner of people-ech hauing a different name, wher∣of the first are called Iungas, those are such as dwell in the hot country, the second Tal∣lanes, and the third Mochicas, ech hauing a seuerall speech, only that the Lordes could speake the Cuscan speech, as our Courtiers speake French, the cause thereof is, that their Kinges helde it for a dishonour vnto them, to speake to their subiects by an inter∣preter, for the which cause Guaynacapa fa∣ther to Atabaleba, commanded that all the ble men of the countrey shoulde send theyr children to his Court, vnder pretence as he saide, to serue him, to learne that speech, al∣though his intent was none such, but onely thereby to assure himselfe of his kingdome, against such as might rise vp against him, which they would not do, he hauing theyr children in his power, and by this same meanes al the noble men learned the speech commonly vsed in the Court, wherewith a man may trauaile cleane through the coun∣trie.

Of the windes that blow in the plain coun∣trie of Peru, also the occasion of the droughts, and of the other townes and places which lie in the fur∣ther description of the sea coast.

BEfore I returne to procéeding with the description of the rest of the sea coasts, from Lyma to Arequipa, I thinke it not vnconuenient to declare why it raineth not in the plaine countrey of Peru, lying on the sea side, where neuertheles there is so great occasion giuen of raine, because the Sea, (which commonly yeeldeth moysture) lyeth vpon the one side, and the hils, (whereon there is alwaies so great quantitie of water and snow) vppon the other side: you must vnderstand that vppon the hils summer be∣ginneth in Aprill, and continueth May, Iune, Iuly, August, and September, and in October winter beginneth, and continu∣eth the other moneths til March, not much differing from our Countries, or frō Spain, in that time they both plant, build, and ga∣ther in their fruites and seedes: but day and night are al of a length, onely that in No∣uember they differ a little, and in the plaine land it is contrary, for when it is summer in the hils, it is winter there, so that in the plaine countrie summer beginneth in Octo∣ber, and continueth til the moneth of Aprll, where as then winter beginneth: and surely it is a verie strange thing to thinke how so great difference should be in one countrey, where a man may vppon one day in the morning, trauaile from the hilles, where it raineth, and befo••e night bee in the plaine

countrie, where it neuer or verye seldome raineth, for that from the beginning of Oc∣tober, al the summer long, it neuer raineth in that countrey, onely there falleth certain dew, which in many places hardly layeth the dust of the sandes, wherefore the inha∣bitants of the plaine countrey must conti∣nually water their groundes, and not till nor plant any more lande, then they can bring the water vnto: in other places by reason of the vnfruitfulnesse of the country, there is no grasse, as beeing all drie sandie and stonie grounds, the trees growing ther∣on, are vnfruitfull, with verie few leaues, there likewise groweth diuers thistles and thornes, and in some places nothing at all: when it is winter in the plaine countrie, there are certaine thicke and close cloudes, onely as if the aire hung full of raine, from whence there onely proceedeth a certaine small miseling, that can hardly lay the dust of the sande, which notwithstanding is a verie strange and wonderfull thing, that the ayre being in that sort so thicke and close, there falleth no other moysture, and yet the sunne for many daies because of the clouds, cannot be seene, and as the hilles are verie high, and the coast low, it appeareth that the hilles draw the cloudes vnto them, not suffering them to fal vpon the plaine lande, so that when the waters do naturally keepe their course, it raineth much in the hils, and not in the plaine countrie, but therein cau∣seth a great heat, and when the dew falleth, then it is cleare weather vpon the hils, and raines not there: likewise it is very strange that for the most part of the yeere ther blow∣eth but one kind of wind in the plain coun∣trie, that is, southwest windes, which al∣though in other countries they are com∣monly moyst, and causes of raine, there they are cleane contrarie, I thinke because they are suppressed by the high hilles, from whence they blow, that they draw no moy∣sture or dampenesse out of the sea into the aire, wherby any great raine should folow: by these windes also it happeneth that the water in the South sea runneth into the North, and maketh a hard nauigation from Panama to Peru, both against winde and streame, in such sort that it cannot be done, without lauering and striuing against the winde.

There is yet another thing to bee marked, which is, that vnder the line in some places it is moyst, and in some places colde and moyst, and in those plaine coun∣tries of Peru, colde and drie, and depar∣ting from thence to the other side, it rai∣neth continually.

Here followeth the description of the coast of the plaine countrey of Peru (with the hauens and riuers lying therein) between the towne of Lyma, and the prouince of Dechia, as also the degrees and the manner of the sayling on that coast.

THe Ships that saile from the towne of Lyma or of Kings, take their course to∣wards the south, and so come to the hauen of Singalla, which is verie great, whereby at the first the Spaniards were in mind to haue built the town of kings in that place, it lyeth distant from Lyma 2••. Spanish miles, or 105. Italian miles, whereof fiue make a Duch mile, which is one and twen∣tie Duch miles, it lyeth not ful vnder four∣teene degrees on the south side of the line. Hard by the hauen of Sangalta, lyeth an Is∣land taking the name of the sea Wolues: al the coast from thence forward is very low, although in some places there are smal hils of plaine stone, and some sandie downes, wherein as yet, neither before, nor til this time it euer rained, where also there fal∣leth no other moysture, then onely the smal dewe, whereof I spake before: about this Island of sea Wolues, there are seuen or eight other Islandes, which lie in Tri∣angle, wherof some are high, some low, and all vnhabited, hauing neither water, wood, trees, grasse, nor any thing, onely Sea Wolues, and great store of sande. The Pe∣ruuians of the firme land, (as they thēselues say) in times past vsed to goe into those Is∣lands, and there to offer sacrifices, where it is thought much treasor lyeth hidden, these Islands are distant from the firme land a∣bout three miles. Further in the same course vnder 14. and 1/•• lyeth another Island of the same name, and from thence sailing on, and coasting along the shore southwest, and southwest and by south, and being 9. miles beyond the Island, you come to a point cal∣led Nasca, lying vnder fifteene degrees lesse ¼ vnder the which the shippes may anker, but yet they cannot land with their boates, neither throw foorth their Bocken: follow∣ing the same course vnder fifteene degrees, 1/•• there is another head or poynt called S. Nicolas, and from this cape the coast run∣neth southwest, and when you haue sayled nine miles in that sort, you come to a ha∣uen called Hacan, which lyeth vnder six∣teene degrees, from whence following on the coast, you come to the riuer Diocouna, on which side the coast is altogether wilde: A little further there is another riuer cal∣led

Camana, and somewhat further the ri∣uer Quilca, and about halfe a mile beyonde it there is a verie good grounde where the ships may ride and anker, which hauen is also called Quilca, like the riuer: and from thence as men put out, they saile to the towne of Arequipa, which lyeth 12. miles from this towne, the hauen and the towne lying vnder seuenteene degrees ½: sayling a∣long the coast of this hauen, about three miles distant you see certaine Islands, in the which certaine Indian fishermen of the firme lande doo lie to catch fish: about twoo miles further there is another Island hard by the firme lande, where on the loofe side the ships may harber, it is called Chul••, from whence there are wares sent to Are∣quipa and is from Quilca nine miles▪ it ly∣eth vnder seuenteene degrees and a halfe.

The way by lande from Lyma or Cidado de los Re••es to Arequipa.

DEparting from Lyma, and following the coast about three spanish miles, or twelue Italian miles you come to the vally of Pachacama, in our card Pachamma, a most pleasant place, and wel known among the Peruuians, because of the most statelie Temple that sometimes stood therein, for riches exceeding al others in that countrey, being placed vpon a litle hil made of square stones and earth: in the which temple were many painted doores & wals, with formes of wilde beasts: in the middle therof where the idoll stood, were the priests, that shewed themselues to be verie holie, and when they offered sacrifice for all the people, they tur∣ned their faces towardes the gates of the temple, and their backs to the Image, ca∣sting downe their eyes, and ful of fearefull demonstrations, made great stamping (as some of the old Indians say) like the maner of the sacrificators of the Idoll Apollo, when the people staied to heare the prophe∣sies. Those old Indians likewise say that they vsed to offer many beastes and some men vnto this Idol, & at their cheefe feastes this Idol gaue them answere to their de∣maunds, and what he sayd they beleeued: in this temple there was great treasor of golde and siluer hidden, and the priestes were greatly esteemed, the Lords of the countrey being much subiect to their commaunde∣ments: rounde about this temple were certaine houses made for Pilgrims, and no man was esteemed worthie to be buried a∣bout that Church, but onely their kings, noblemen, and the priests that came thither on pilgrimage, bringing certaine offerings with them: when they helde their greatest feast in al the yeare, there assembled many people, that according to their manner plai∣ed on instruments: when the kings of Ca∣sco subdued the vallie, they hauing a cu∣stome throughout al their countries, to erect temples in the honour of the sunne: and be∣holding the greatnesse and auncientnes of that temple, with the perswasion that the common people had of the holinesse of that place, as also the great deuotion vsed there∣in, they thought it not conuenient to destroy that church, but appoynted ano∣ther to be made by it in honour of the sunne, which shuld be esteemed the greater, which according to the kings commandement be∣ing finished, be indowed it with great gifts, sending thither certaine women, wherwith the diuell of Pachacan••a was verie well pleased, as it appeareth by the answere hée gaue vnto them, being serued as well in the one temple as in the other, and keeping the poore soules vnder his power: and now al∣though this temple is defaced, yet hee cea∣seth not secretly to speake with some of the Indians, telling them that the same God which is preached by the Spaniards and hee are all one, thereby to keepe them in obe∣dience vnto him, and not to become christi∣ans. In steede of those Idols, there are cros∣ses erected, as they think to please the diuel, the name of the diuell was Creator of the world, for Camac is creator, and Pacha world: but God permitting Francis Piza∣••ius to take King Atabaliban prisoner, he sent his brother Fernando Pizarrus to de∣stroy the temple, and to take away the trea∣sure, although the priestes before his com∣ming had hidden part thereof, which could neuer be founde, yet a great part was car∣ried away. This vallie is verie fruitful, rich, and ful of trees, abounding with kine and other cattel, as also good horses. From the vally Pachacama you come to Cilca, where there is a notable thing to be noted, for the strangenesse thereof, for it neuer rai∣neth there, neither is there any riuer, whereby they may conuay the water, ther∣with to water their groundes, yet the most part of this vallie is ful of Maiz and other rootes that are good to eate, with fruitfull trees: the meanes they haue to helpe them∣selues therein, is thus, that they make cer∣taine deepe pits within the earth, wherein they sow their Maiz and other rootes and other fruits, and by reason of the cleare and pleasant aire, as also the smal dew and moi∣sture that falleth, God sendeth them great aboundance of Maiz and other things, but no other corne, neither would that likewise

grow therein, if they did not throw one or two heades of the fish called Sardinia into the ground with euerie eare of corne, which fish they take with nets in the sea, and by that meanes it groweth in great aboun∣dance, whereby the people maintain them∣selues. The water that they vse to drinke, they take it out of great deepe pittes, and for the better prouision of their corne, they do euerie yeare fish for so many Sardines as they shal neede, both to eate, and sowe theyr corne. There was likewise in that country many houses for prouision and munition, belonging to the King of Peru, therein to lodge and rest themselues when they tra∣uaile through their countryes. Two miles and a quarter from Ci••ca is the prouince of Mala, where there runneth a faire riuer, the coast whereof is ful of trees: and not full foure miles further lyeth Goarco, well knowne in that countrey, being great and broade, and ful of fruitful trees, speciallie of Guuyas, a certaine Indian fruit, verie pleasant of smel and taste, and also Guauas, and Maiz in most great aboundance, with al other things, as wel Indian as Spanish fruites. Besides this there are great num∣bers of Pigeons, Turtle Doues, and other kindes of foules, in the woods and wilde countrey, which make a good shadow in the vallie, vnder the which there runneth cer∣taine streames of fresh water. The inhabi∣tants of this country say, that in times past that place was verie populous, and that they ruled and hadde commandement ouer some of the hils, and ouer plaine countries, and when the Ingen or Kings of Peru or Cusco came to subdue them, they held wars against him for foure yeares together, min∣ding not to loose the liberty, which their pre∣decessors before them had so long maintai∣ned. During the which wars, many strange things happened, which are herein needlesse to rehearse, because my meaning is not to make a History, but onely to describe the coast: and although the Kings of Peru in summer time, because of the great heate withdrew themselues into Cusco, yet they had their Captaines and Souldiours that helde continuall warres, and because they might the better bring their affaires vnto effect, the Ingen in this vally caused a newe Casco to be built, whether he and his nobi∣litie repaired, giuing the streetes and other places the names of the olde Cusco, & when he had subdued that people, the saide resi∣dence of the King and the towne did both decay, yet in steede thereof there remaineth a goodly Castle, which he left in signe of vic∣tory, situate vpon a hil within a goodly val∣lie, the foundation beeing of foure squared stones, so cunningly closed together, that it could not be perceiued how they were ioy∣ned: frō the which Castle there went a vast vnder the earth to the sea coast, so that the waues beat against the entrie thereof with such force, that it is wonderful to think how that péece of worke was made: which Ca∣stle was most curiously painted, and in it al∣so there was a great part of the kings trea∣sor, the ruines whereof in regard of the Pe∣ruuians perpetual cōmendations ought not further to be spoyled, as being workes done by such people, which vnto vs wold be alto∣gether incredible, if they had not bin seene: a mile & a half further vpward from the castle of Goarco there is a riuer called Lunagua∣na, in our Card Laguna, which vallie is al∣together like the former, and foure miles and a halfe from that is the great vallie of Chincha, much esteemed in Peru, specially by the auncient inhabitants. In this vallie there is a cloyster of the order of saint Do∣minike. At the spaniards ariual there were aboue 25000. men in that vallie, where now there are scarce 5000. and were ouer∣come by Inga Iupangue, & of ••opaynga Iu∣pang••e, who had their gouernours therein, with many houses of pleasure, and the tem∣ple of the Sun, yet the inhabitants lest not off to serue and honour their olde Idol cal∣led Cinciaycama, the king hadde likewise in this vallie many pentioners and souldiers, commaunding some of them for certaine moneths in the yeare to repaire vnto the Court, and goe to warres with him. This vallie of Cincia is one of the greatest val∣lies in all the countrey of Peru, where it is a most pleasant sight to beholde the greene trees that grow in the waters that run vn∣der them, with most sweete and pleasant Citrons, not like the Spanish Citrons, al∣though in forme not differing much, for that these being pilled are yellow, and of a good taste, and so pleasant, that a man can neuer satisfie himselfe therewith: in those woods there are many birds, but beasts verie few, because of the continuall warres: in times past, there was likewise many graues in this country, wherein the Spaniards found much treasor. Departing from this goodly prouince of Cincia, and trauailing further ouer the plaine countrey, you come to the pleasant vally I••a, which is no lesse inhabi∣ted then the former, through the which also there runneth a riuer, which in some times of the yeare is so small, that they shuld want water, but that they haue a channell of wa∣ter that commeth out of the hilles: heerein are many fruites, there are likewise manie

yong horses, kine, goates, pigeons, and tur∣tle doues: from thence you come to the val∣lie and riuer of Nasca, otherwise called Caxa Malca, which in times past was ve∣rie populous, where they till their ground, and water their fruits, in manner before re∣hearsed. These people for the most parte were spoyled and consumed by the disunion and contention of the Spaniards, in it were many great places and houses of mu∣nition for the kings of Peru, and diuers graues, all spoyled and destroyed by the Spaniards: the vallies of Nasca are many in number, whereof one of them hath many canes that yeeld much sugar: they haue like∣wise much sugar, which they bring to sel in the townes bordering vpon them: through all these vallies the kings great high way doth passe, and in some sundrie places there are as yet certaine tokens or signes to shew the right way, that men should not stray a∣side, of the which way I meane to say more heereafter, when I come to speake of the kings of Peru: from this vally commonly called Nasca you goe to Hacary, and then to Ocuna, Icamanna, and Iquilca, where there are great riuers, and although at this pre∣sent there are but few inhabitants, yet in times past they were no lesse populous then the first, they are fruitfull and very fatte to feede cattel: in the vallie of Quilca lyeth the hauen of Arequipa, and the towne, so that from Lima or the Kings towne to Arequi∣pa are ninety Spanish miles, or thrée hun∣dred and sixtie Italian miles: the town ly∣eth about eleuen miles within the vally of Quilca, distant from the sea in the best and most pleasant place of all the vallie to bée built vpon, where there is a verie good and temperate aire, whereby it is commended for one of the most holsomest places in all Peru, and the pleasantest to dwell in, being a Bishopricke, and vnder the Iurisdiction of Lyma, hauing in it about thrée hundred Spanish houses: the countrey thereabouts is verie fat, and yéeldeth verie good Corne, whereof they make bread: the limites or Iurisdiction of the towne reacheth from the vallie of Hacari, to Tarapaca, and in the prouince or countrey of Condesuyo: they haue likewise authoritie ouer certaine pla∣ces, which are vnder the Spanish gouern∣ment: those of Hubnas, Ciqui Guanitta, Quimistaca, and Colagnas, are all vnder the commandement of this towne, in time past very populous, and now most part destroy∣ed by the Spaniards: they pray to the sun, as other Peruuians do, and weare shirts and mantles, most of their siluer and treasor is brought from Charcas, and the mynes of Potoisi, and Porco, from thence it is carri∣ed to Lyma, and so to Panama and Spaine: about this towne there is a hill of Brim∣stone, which burneth continually, whereby it putteth the countrey in great feare, doing great hurt vnto the countrey and the town: sometimes by reason thereof they haue cer∣taine earthquakes: this towne was buil∣ded by Francisco Pizarro in his maiesties name, in the yeare of our Lord 1536.* 1.21 Many Spanish wares (as wine, oyle, oliues, meale, corne, or wheate. &c.) are brought thither, therewith to serue the Countrey of Charcas, and the mines of Potoisi & Porco. There also many of the Inhabitants of the p••••ne countrey do come and traff••ke, con∣cerning the mines aforesaide, wherby much siluer and treasor is brought thither, to be conuayed frō thence into other places: ther∣abouts on the sea coast are many great Gieren, that spread their wings at the least fiftéene or sixteene handfulles broade, that liue vpon Sea Wolues, which they take, picking out theyr eyes, and feeding of theyr bodyes. There are likewise great numbers of Sea Mewes, by the Spaniards called Alcatraces, that likewise liue of sea fish and sea crabs, and such like. Their flesh is stin∣king and vnholsome, so that many who for want of meate haue eaten them, died therof. And thus much for the first part of the plain countrey of Peru, lying along the sea coast.

Nowe before I procéede further, I will speake somewhat of the Peruuians dwel∣ling vppon the hilles, and of their townes, withall not forgetting their kings, that ru∣led ouer all those people, and haue so rich a country of gold & siluer: Peru is in length 525. Spanish miles, or 420. Duch miles, which are 2100. Italian miles in breadth: in some places 75. Spanish, or 60. Dutch miles, in some places broader, and in some narrower, accounting the length from Qui∣to, to the towne Delia Platta: in this coun∣try of Peru are thrée sorts of hilles, wherein men cannot inhabite: the first parte of the hilles are called Andes, which are full of great Woods, the country being vnfit and vnholsome to dwell in, which likewise were not inhabited, but beyonde the hilles: the second parte of the hilles taketh her course from the Andes, which are verie colde, and are great snow hilles, so that there also no man can dwell, because of the great colde and aboundance of snow, which maketh the ground so soft, that nothing can grow ther∣in. The third parte of the hilles are the Sandie Downes which runne through the plaine land of Peru, from Tumbez to Tarapaca, where it is so hot, that neither

water, trées, grasse▪ nor any liuing creature is seene thereon, but onely certaine birdes that flye ouer them. Nowe Peru beeing so long, and scituate in this manner, there are many wilde and desart places not inhabi∣ted, for the causes before rehearsed, and such as were inhabited were great vallies and dales, that by reason of the hils are throw∣ded and defended from the windes and snow, wherby those vallies and great fields are verie fruitful, so that whatsoeuer is plā∣ted therein, yéeldeth fruit most aboundant∣ly: the woods about them bring vp manye beasts and birds: the Peruuians that dwel betwéene these hils, are wiser, stronger, and subtiller then those in the plaine countrey lying on the sea coast, and apter to gouerne and for pollicy: they dwel in houses made of stone, whereof some are couered with earth, others with strawe, because of the raine, whereof those in the plaine countrey by the sea side, haue no care at all, couering theyr houses, thereby to keepe them from the sun, with painted mattes, or boughs of trees, out of these vallies lying betweene the hilles, there runneth many streames of good wa∣ter into the south sea, and moysten the plain countrey of Peru, causing many fruitfull Trees, corne, and other things necessary for mans life to grow therein, as I haue alrea∣dy declared.

Of the people and countries that are there∣in lieing from Pasto to Quito.

THe village of Pasto lieth in the vallie Atris, which is in the land of Quillacin∣ga, people without shame and good man∣ners, as also they of Pasto, little esteemed by their neighbours, trauailing from Pasto you come to Funez, and two miles and ¼ furder to Iles, from thence to Gualnatan are two miles and a halfe, and from thence to Ipiules two miles and a quarter, in al these villages is very little maiz by reason of the colde, although they are so neere vnto the line, but much Papas and other rootes that are to be eaten: from Ipiules you trauaile to Guaca, but before you come at it you may see the Kings hie-way, which is no lesse to be wondred at, then the way that Hanni∣bal made through the Alpes, whereof here∣after I will speak: also you passe hard by a riuer, vpon the side whereof the King of Pe∣ru had made a fort, from whence he made warre vpon those of Pasto, and ouer this Riuer there is a bridge, by nature so artifi∣cially made, that arte coulde not possibly mend it, it is of a high and thick rock, in the midle whereof there is a hole, through the which, with great fury the streame passeth, and vpon that rocke men may go ouer it, this rocke in their speech is called Lu••••ch••∣ca, that is, a stone bridge, about that place is a fountaine of warme water, wherein a man cannot endure to holde his handes, al∣though the countrie about it and also the ri∣uer are verie colde, whereby it is hard tra∣uailing: by this bridge also the King of Peru ment to haue built another castle, therin to keepe garrison, but he was preuented by the Spaniardes ariuall in those countries: in this countrie there groweth a certaine fruit as small as plumbs, and blacke, by them called Mortunnos, whereof if any man ea∣teth, they are drunke and as it were out of their wittes for the space of foure and twen∣tie houres. From this small countrye of Guaca you come to ••usa where y^e prouince of Pas••o endeth: not farre from thence you come to a little hill, wherevppon also the Kings of Peru had a castle much defended by the Peruuians, and going furder you come to the riuer of Mira, where it is very hot, an there are many kinds of fruits, and certaine faire melons, good connies, turtle doues, and partriges, & great aboundance of corne, barley and maiz: from this riuer you trauaile downe to the rich and costly houses of Carangue, & before you come thi∣ther, you must first passe ouer a lake in In∣dia called Aguarcocia, in our speech the opē sea, because Guianacapa king of Peru, at the Spaniards ariuall caused 20000. men of the places thereabout to be assembled, & destroyed them all because they had displea∣sed him, and threw their bodies into that lake, making the water red with their blood. The houses of Carāgue are in a little place, wherin there is a goodly fountaine made of costly stone, and in the same countries are many faire houses belonging to the kings of Peru, all made of stone, and also a Temple of the same, wherein there was alone 200. maides, that serued the temple, and are ve∣rie narrowly looked vnto, that they commit no vncleanes, if they did they were cruelly punished, and hanged, or buried quicke, with them also were certaine priests y^t of∣fered sacrifices and offerings, according to their religious manner. This Temple of the sunne in time of the kings of Peru was holden in great account, being then very carefully looked vnto, and greatly honou¦red, wherein was many golde and siluer vessels, iewels and treasure, the walls be¦ing couered with plates of golde and siluer, and although it is cleane destroyed, yet by roums you may still behold the great mag¦nificence

thereof: in times past the kings of Peru had their ordinary garison in the houses of Carangue, with their Captaines, who both in time of peace and warre, con∣tinued there to punish offenders. Depar∣ting from the houses of Carangue, you come to O••aballo, which is also rich and mightie, and from thence to Cosesqui, and before you come thither, you must passe certaine snowie hills, where it is so colde, that men trauaile ouer them with greate paine: from Cosesqui you goe to Guallabamba, which is three miles from Quito, and be∣cause the countrie thereabout is lowe and almost vnder the line, therefore it is there very hot, yet not so hot, that men cannot dwell therein, or that it hindereth the fruit∣fulnes thereof: by this discourse you may perceiue the eror of many ancient writers, that say that vnder the line by reason of the great heate no man may dwell, but to the contrary you see that after their maner they haue both summer and winter, in some pla∣ces colde, and in some places hot, as also that vnder it there dwelleth many people, and there many fruites and seeds do grow, In this way you passe many riuers by brid∣ges, whereabouts are greate houses, and strange things to be seene, and to conclude, at this present the Spaniards by them maintaine their cattaile.

The description of Quito.

AMong the towns that lie in the hills of Peru, and at this time inhabited by the Spaniards, Quito is one of the chiefest, it lyeth in the valley Annaquito, about fiue miles beyonde the south side of the Equi∣noctial line, in time past it was a very faire, rich, and pleasant towne, specially in the yeares of our Lorde 1544.* 1.22 and 1545. then it florished, because the gold mines (which euerie man regardeth) were first found out, but by the warres that Pizarro made, it is almost destroyed, the earth thereabouts see∣meth to be vnfruitful, yet it is found contra∣ry, for in it are many catell, as also al other prouision of corne, fruit, and foule: the situ∣ation of the countrie is very holesome and pleasant, not much vnlike Spaine both for hearbes, and seasons of the yeere, for that summer beginneth there in the moneths of March and Aprill, and continueth til halfe Nouember, & although there is much cold, yet they haue no lesse seede then in Spaine: there is likewise much spanish fruite, those people are cōmonly friendlyer, and ciuiler then those of Pasto, and of a meane stature, and go apparrelled at this time like other Peruuians. About Quito there vsed to be great numbers of sheepe, y^t were not much vnlike camelles, but not so great, only in forme, fit both to carry men and other bur∣dens, but not aboue three or foure miles a day, and being wearie they lie downe, so that they can hardly be forced to rise again: there are likewise many hogs and hennes, that are bred of our countrie hens, & great abundance of connies, very plesant of taste, and no lesse quantity of goates, partridges, pidgions, turtle doues, and such like foule: among other things which are by the Peru∣uians laid vp for prouisiō (besides maiz) one is Papas, which is rounde like a turnup, which being sodden or rosted are altogether like chesnuttes, another is a kinde of fruit called Quinua, y^e truncke of the tree or sprig being as high as a man, with leaues like beetes, whereon grow certaine seeds, some red, some white, wherof they make their drinke, and eate it likewise as wee do rice: the people are very skilful in tilling the land but not after our manner, for there the wo∣men do it, the men spinne, weaue, & make clothes, and looke to their armes. From Quito you come to another town caled Frā∣cisco del quito it lieth on y^e north side in the lowest prouince of Peru, this town is much colder then warme, and hath but few fields about it, lieing in a smal valley like a pit, al compassed with hills: from S. Francisco you go to y^e pallaces of Tomebamba (being about 30 miles distant) and from thence to Panzaleo: the inhabitants of this countrie differ something from their neighbours, as touching the binding of their heades where by the Indians of all places are knowne: they had likewise another speech differing from their neighbours, yet al of thē learned the Cuscan speech, which if the fathers did not teach their childrē they were punished, the men weare long haire tied vp with a hairelace, they go in shirts without hands or sleeues, and close all about them, onely where they must put forth their heads and armes, ouer the which they weare long wollen mantles, and some of cotten, the Lords wear such as be verie fine, and pain∣ted of diuerse coulours, their shooes were made of leaues, the women goe in long gownes couering all their bodies, tyed a∣bout them with a wollen bande, going ma∣ny times about their bodies, and therewith make themselues a long body, ouer the which they weare a fine wollen gowne pinned about their neckes with certaine golden and siluer pinnes, which they call Topos, hauing great flat heads, and very sharp pointes, about their heads they tie a

faire fillet or headband, by them called Nin∣••i••: to conclude, the manner of their appar∣rel and also that of Cusco, is the fairest and best in al America. They are verie careful to combe their haire, which they weare long: they are white of face, of good com∣plection and manners, wherein they differ much from the women of the plaine coun∣try: two miles from Pancalco lyeth Mula∣hallo, in times past also verie populous, but at this present most consumed: on the right side of this villag lyeth a hill of brimstone, which whē it bursteth out, it casts forth ma∣ny great stones, with feareful sights: a little further lyeth I'acunga, in time past not lesse then Quito, as well for houses as other things, as by the ruines may yet bee seene.

From Tacunga you come to Muliambato, and from thence to the riuer Ambato, and two miles further to Mocia, and frō thence to Rio Bamba, lying in the Prouince of Puruaes, where there are goodly fields and good hearbes and flowers, altogether like Spaine: from Rio Bamba you come to Cai∣ambi, and then to Tumb••z, or Teocallas, and Ticiquiambi▪ and from thence to Tho∣mebamba, in the Prouince of Canares there were likewise great houses of ammuniti∣on, as also throughout the whole countrey, at euery eight, ten, or twelue miles, wherein was al things that belonged to the wars, and thereabouts likewise were certaine of the Kings garrisons and captaines, hauing commandement of the countries, thereby to hold the countrey in peace, and to punish such as rebelled, though they were their owne sons. Thomebamba lay in a plaine countrey, where twoo riuers met together, and ranne into the sea, being nine miles compasse, in a colde place, where notwith∣standing were many wilde beastes, as Goates, Conies, &c. there likewise was a Temple of the Sunne, made of browne, greene, and blacke stones, like Iasper stones.

The gates of the Kings Pallace were brauely guilded, wherein were set certaine Emeraulds platted in golde. From Tho∣mebamba you goe to Bracamoros, in our Carde Boamo••aces, founde out and disco∣uered by Iohn Porzel, and Captaine Vergara, who therein hadde made two or three fortes, thereby to ouerrunne and subdue the places lying about it. The Prouince of Bracamoros, is about sixtie miles from Quito: trauailing along the hill about fiue and fortie miles further, lyeth the Prouince of Chichapoyas, or Cachapo∣••as, wherein the Spaniardes haue a towne called Frontiera, on Leuanto, where the countrey is verie fruitfull of all kinde of Spices, and of rich Golde mynes: Leuanto by reason of the scituation of the place, is verie strong, and well kept, as be∣ing almost compassed about with a deepe vallie, wherein for the most part there run∣neth a certaine riuer, whereby the towne of Frontier builded vppon Leuanto, is not easie to bee woonne, if the bridges be once broken downe. This prouince was built with houses, and peopled with inhabitants of the Spanish nation, by Alonzo de Alua∣rado, in the yeare of our Lord 1536.* 1.23 Ther∣in are faire and white women, fairer then in any other parte of Peru, also very gra∣cious and courteous, and withall, verie well apparrelled. From thence you goe into another Prouince called G••ancas, a goodly countrey, both those people of Ca∣chapoia and Guanca, are subiect to the Spa∣niardes of Frontiera, as also those of Cas∣cayunga, people of another prouince. In all those Prouinces the kings of Peru hadde their houses of amunition, and in some of them rich mynes of Golde. Both men and women in these countreyes go apparrelled: In time past they hadde their Temples, and offered to theyr Idols, and were ve∣rie rich of Cattell, and made much costlie apparrell for the king, as yet at this day they doo, and many fine couerlets and car∣pets. In those Prouinces there are manie fruitfull trees, and the countries are ful of Wheate and Barlie.

Touching their ceremonies, customes, burials, and offerings, they are like all the other Indians, they burie much siluer and golde with their dead, and some liuing women: they offer vnto the Sunne, as I will declare when I write of the Kinges of Peru. This Andes or hill beeing past, you come to Maiobamba or Moyobamba ano∣ther great riuer, and some places inhabited: From Mayobamba, you trauaile to Guanu∣co, a towne inhabited by Spaniardes, and lyeth about fortie miles from Cachapoya, it is likewise called Leon de Guanuco, hauing the name of a Spanish Towne, by the commaundement of Vacca di Ca∣stio, borne in Leon. The scituation of this Towne is verie good and wholsome, because the morning and night seasons are verie temperate, where also by reason of the temperate aire men liue verie health∣full. There they gather much Maiz and other graines, Quinces, Figges, Citrons, Lemons, and other Spanish fruites, as also much of their own country fruit: besids this there is much Platain, & because it is a verie

good soyle, it is thought the towne will in∣crease, for all their kine, goates, horses, and other beasts are kept in the fieldes. There are likewise many Partriges, Pigeons, and other Birds, wilde Hawkes and tame, therewith to catch the other birdes. In the hilles there are some Lions, Beares, and o∣ther wilde beasts: and in most parte of the places that are vnder the gouernment of this towne, the kings high way doth passe, and there are likewise many houses for a∣munitiō: among those people were certaine southsayers and coniurers, that were skilful in the course and nature of the starres, in time past there were so many of their coun∣trie sheepe, that it was incredible, which by meanes of the Spanish warres were most part consumed. Their houses are of stone, and couered with straw. The liuing womē in those countries are buried with the dead men, and are not so vnchaste as others are. In their countrey are good mines of siluer: Fortie miles further from Guanuco de Li∣on, lyeth another towne, inhabited by the Spaniards, and builded on the hils, by Fran¦cisco Pizarro in the kings name, in the yeare of our Lord 1539.* 1.24 and called S. Iohan dila vitoria di Guamanga: the cause why it was made, was chiefly to cleare the passage betweene Cusco and Lyma, from inuasion of the Peruuians, before the countrey was wholly subdued: by this towne there pas∣seth a riuer of good sweete water to drinke, and there are verie faire stone houses and some towers, the market place is plain and verie great, and there it is a wholsome aire, for that neither sunne, aire, nor elements do any hurt, but are verie temperate, round a∣bout the towne the Spaniards haue their houses for cattell, which lie in the vallies vpon the riuers side. The greatest riuer that passeth thereabouts is called Vinaque, where there are many ruines seene, of great foure square pallaces, built in other sort then the Peruuians vse to do, that make theyr houses long and narrow. They say those houses were built in olde time by strange people, but what they were they knew not. There is likewise goodly wheate, whereof they make as good bread as any in Spaine, and all kindes of fruites in great aboun∣dance: from Guamanga to Cusco are fiue and fortie miles, little more or lesse, in this way you passe the fields of Chiupas, where the cruel battell was fought betwéene Vac∣ca di Castra, and Dondiego di Almagro, and being eight miles beyond Guamanga, lyeth Vilcas, which is sayd to be in the mid∣dle of all the countreyes, that are vnder the gouernment of the Kings of Peru, for that Vilcas lyeth in the middle betwéene both, and is as farre from Quito as from Chile, where also were great and costly houses for the king, and a temple of the sunne, from whence fiue miles further you keepe on the kings high way to Vramarca, whereabouts there is a bridge of two arches, verie cun∣ningly made, that passeth ouer a riuer: in breadth 166. paces. The Riuer of Vilcas runneth out of the Prouince of Soras, verie fruitful and aboundant in victuals, golde and siluer mines, and of warlike people, ap∣parrelled in wollen clothes, and wel estee∣med of by the kings of Peru. From thence to Andagnayla vpon the Riuer Abamcay, are seuen miles: and trauailing sixe miles further, you come to another Riuer called Apurim••, there the wayes are verie badde, rough, and sharp, ouer hils and stony waies, dangerous to descend, for that many horses laden with gold, do stumble and fall into the Riuer, & so are spoyled: from Apurima you come to Ma••ambo, and passing the hilles of Vilca conga, you come to Xaqui Xaguana, which is verie euen, but neither long nor broade: in this vallie were certaine goodly houses and pallaces of pleasure for the kings of Cusco, who vsed to go thither to recreate themselues, and is scarce 4 miles from Cus∣co, through the which also passeth the kings high way, and otherwi••e it wold hardlie be trauelled, as hauing certain moorish groūds which crosse the way close by the wals: and from thence you come to Cusco, in times past the cheefe of all Peru, and the whole countrey gouerned by the kings, made by Mango Capo, the first king of that race, in a verie rough and sharpe place, compassed with hilles and betweene two small riuers, whereof one runneth through the middle of the towne, and is inhabited on both sides it hath a vallie on the East side, & the streame that runneth through the towne, taketh her course on the west side: in this vally because it is colde, there are verie few fruitful trees, onely certaine Molles, whereof hereafter I will speake, because therewith they make their drinke. On the north side this towne had a Castle vpon a hil, which for the great∣nesse and strength thereof, was much estee∣med, but now most part destroyed, although the foundation and some towers thereof are yet to be séene: it hath likewise on the east and north side, the Prouince of Andesuyo and Cinciasuyo, on the south side the coun∣treys of Callao, and Condesuio, vnder the which lyeth Callao, betwéene East and South, and Condesuyo betweene south and west: a part of this Cittie was called Ha∣uan Cusco, & the other Oren Cusco, places

where the Noble men, and Gentlemen, and principall of the towne dwell: on the other side the hill Carmenga, where there stoode certaine small towers, wherein they noted the course of the sunne: in the middle where most of the people dwell was a great place from the which there passed foorth high wayes, that went into the foure partes of the kingdome: and this towne onely was orderly and fairely built with stone houses, and richer and mightier then all the other Townes of Peru, for that vpon paine of death no man might carrie any gold out of the same: therein was the richest temple of the sunne in all the world, which was cal∣led Curicanche, & in it was the high Priest, by them called Villaona, and part of this ci∣tie was inhabited by M••timaes, which are strangers, that all were holden vnder good policie, lawes, & ceremonies of their Idols, most wonderfull to heare: the Castle was made of so great foure squared stones, that ten paires of oxen could hardly drawe one of them, so that it cannot be imagined howe by mans handes those stones were brought thither, hauing neither oxen, horses, nor a∣ny other beasts to draw withall. The hou∣ses at this time inhabited by the Spani∣ards, are most built by people of the coun∣trie, but are somewhat repaired and made greater: in the time of their kings this citie was diuided into foure parts, according to the foure partes of the worlde, and hadde the names from the foure prouinces that lay vpon each corner of the Cittie, and when the Kings were liuing, no man dwelling in one quarter of the Citie might remooue houshold into another, vppon great paine and punishments inflicted: and although this Citie lyeth in a colde place, yet it is ve∣ry holsome and better prouided of all sortes of victuals, and greater then any other tho∣rowout all Peru: round about it there vsed to be certaine mines of gold, but now con∣sumed, and are left for the siluer mines of Potosi, because now the profit is greater by siluer, and lesse danger. In this towne was great resort from the parts of Peru, for till the nobilitie were forced to send their chil∣dren thither vnder pretence of learning the speech, and to serue the king, but were there rather for pannes, that in the meane time their fathers might not rise vp against the kings: other people dwelling about it, were forced to come thither to build hou∣ses, to make cleane the Castles, and to doo other kindes of workes, whatsoeuer they should be commaunded: about this Cittie there lyeth a great hil, called Guanacaure, of great account with the kings, wher they offered both men and beasts: and although in this Citie there were people of all nati∣ons, as of Chile, Pasto, Cagna••es, B••aca∣mo••o, Chacapoyas, Guancas, Charcas, Col∣lao, &c. yet euerie nation dwelt in a place by themselues, appoynted for the purpose, and helde the ceremonies of their aunce∣tors, onely that they were forced to pray vnto and honour the sun, as the high God, by them called Mocia. There were likewise in this Cittie many great buildings vn∣der the earth, wherein there dwelt certain coniurers, southsayers, and such as told for∣tunes, who as yet are not all rooted out, and in those holes there is daily found great quantities of treasor. About the Citie are many temperate vallyes, wherein there groweth certaine trees and corn, although in times past euerie thing was brought thither in great aboundance. Vpon the ri∣uer that runneth through the towne they haue their corne milles: nowe they haue likewise many Spanish capons and hens, as good as any are in Spaine, as also kine, goates, and other cattell: & although there are but fewe trees, yet there groweth much pease, beanes, tares, fitches, and such like, because therin was the most rich and sump∣tuous temple of the sunne and high priest. I think it not vnconuenient to speak some∣thing of their Religion, and of the Petti∣gree of the Kings of Peru, and then in bréefe manner to go on with our course, of shew∣ing the ••ownes lying on hilles, til you come to Arequipa, as also the coast reaching to the straights of the Magellanes.

The Religion of the Peruuians.

TOuching their Religion, they acknow∣ledge, and after their manner worship∣ped a creator of heauen and earth, whome they caled Pachacama, which signifieth cre∣ator, & a son of the Sun & Moone, like that in the vallie of Pachacama, where they had made a great temple, yet they accounted and held the Sun for the greatest God, as a creator of all liuing creatures, which in Cuscan speech they caled Ticebiracoce, and although they had this knowledge and vn∣derstanding, yet they vsed their olde cu∣stomes, not onely to pray vnto the Sunne and Moone, but also to trées, stones, and other things, the diuell through them giuing them answeres, and because they had no certaine knowledge out of any wri∣tings or bookes of the scriptures, or of the creation of the worlde, neither yet of the floud, therefore they obserue that which their forefathers told them, which was that

a notable and worthy man (which they call Con) in times past came out of the north, into their countries, with most swift pase, that had no bones nor ioynts in his body, neyther was it knit together by any kinde of substance, that in one day could throwe downe, or raise hilles, and fill deep vallies, and passe through a place where no wayes nor meanes to passe was found, and that this man had made their predecessors, gi∣uing them hearbs and wilde fruits to liue vpon, and that he being offended with the Peruuians inhabiting the plaine countrey, conuerted their fruitfull land into sandie grounds, and caused raine not to fall there∣in, yet being moued with pittie, because of the beasts, and to water the drie fieldes hee opened diuers fountaines and riuers, whereby the people might moisten theyr groundes. This Con being sonne of the Sunne and Moone, in times past they ho∣noured for the highest God, vntill an other came out of the south called Pachacama, (which signifieth Creator) who also was ingendered by the Sunne and Moone, and of greater power than Con, at whose com∣ming Con departed away: and this Pa∣chacama conuerted the people made by Con into Sea coltes, Beares, Lions, Pa∣rats, and other birdes, and made other men that were the predecessors of the Pe∣ruuians now liuing, and taught them the manner of planting and tilling the earth, whome they after that esteemed for their God, building Churches for him, and praying vnto him, and called a whole Pro∣uince after his name Pachacama, lying foure miles from Lyma, as already is de∣clared, where in times past the Kings and noblemen of the land were commonly bu∣ried: which theyr god Pachacama was long time worshipped by them, til the com∣ming of the Spaniardes into Peru, and after that he was neuer séene. Againe▪ it is to be thought it was a Diuell, who vsed that manner of subtiltie, thereby to deceiue and blinde the people, who in those times appeared in forme of a man, as it is eui∣dent, that before the Spaniards arriuall, he shewd himselfe in that great costly tem∣ple, in forme of a man, and answered the Priests, which answere the Priestes de∣liuered vnto the poople. They do general∣ly beleeue and tell, that once there was a great floud, whereby all the worlde was drowned, onely a few persons, that hidde themselues in certayne high hollow trées, and hauing prouided victualles, stopping the holes, by that meanes saued them∣selues from the common misery of al man∣kind: and that when th••se men thought the raine and waters to be gone, they sent out two dogges, who returning all wet backe againe, they gessed the water not to be con∣sumed, and so thought it not time to goe foorth. After that they sent the two dogges forth againe, and perceiuing them to come home all dirtie, they then knew the water to be gone, and came foorth, where they found great numbers of snakes, which the slime earth had bred, whereby they hadde worke enough to kill and destroy them. They likewise say that the world shalbe de¦stroyed, but not before there shal first come a great drought, and in manner a burning of the ayre, whereby the sunne and moone shal be darkened and taken away, where∣fore when there happeneth any Eclipses or darkenesses of the sunne or moone, but spe∣cially of the sunne, then they sing sorrow∣full songs, and make great mournings, thinking the world shall be destroyed, and that the end approcheth. What are these but cloudes of their religion? which the di∣uel in so great blindnesse could neuer driue out of these poore peoples hearts, so that those of Brasilia beleeue the immortallitie of the soule, and the Peruuians beleeue not onely the immortalitie of the soule, but the resurrection of the body, as it appeereth not onely by the manner of their graues, but also by the request made by them vnto the Spaniardes, (when they opened their pre∣decessors and Kings graues, to take out the treasure) desiring them not to take a∣way or scatter the bones of the dead, that they might not want them at their resur∣rection. Touching the manner of their graues, their Kings and Nobilitie are bu∣ried with great magnificence, being set in seats within their graues, apparelled with their best cloths, one or two of their liuing wiues buryed with them, being the fairest, and such as in his life time hee loued best, for the which when time serueth, great con¦trouersie riseth among the women (which by the king in his life time is ordained and appoynted) they bury likewise with him two or thrée of his seruauntes, and much golde and siluer, and the best they had, also fruit, bread, maiz, and such like things: and which is more, the last seruice the friendes doe for him, is, that with reedes or pipes they powre a certaine measure of theyr drinke called Cicha into the dead mannes mouth, to this ende, that hee may not want drincke before hee commeth into the other worlde: in which his iourny he vseth that meate, and the company of his wiues and seruantes, which manner is vsed al∣most

through all Peru and Mexico, onely that euery one dooth more or lesse accord∣ing to his estate: but they vse most in Peru to burye liuing women, which mischiefe sprang from the diuell that blinded them, that at some time appeared vnto them in shape of those that were dead, walking vp∣on the earth, and women with him. So great is the power and blindenesse of Sa∣than in the children of the vnbeleeuing. In East India the diuell so wrought, that hee got them to burne liuing women with the dead, & here in Peru hath perswaded them to bury liuing women with dead bodies. They mourne many dayes for theyr dead, and vppon the graue they place the Image of the dead person. The common people and handiecraftesmen place something of their handiecraft vpon their graues, and the souldier some kinde of weapon vsed in the warres, whereby it may be seene who lyeth buried in that place.

So then the Peruuians pray vnto the Sunne and the Moone, and acknowledge them for the highest gods, and sweare by them, as also by the earth, which they e∣steeme to be their mother: and if at anie time they speake with the diuell, asking counsell, and attending answere of him, they did it more for feare they hadde to bee hurt by him, than for any worshippe: that they held and accounted the Sunne for the chiefe and highest God, first it appeereth by many and so costly temples, by them e∣rected, throughout al the kingdom of Peru, as also by the answere of king Atabalida, made to the Dominican Friar Vincentius de Valle Viridi (after first Bishop of Pe∣ru) who shewing him of the creation of the world by God, and the redemption there∣of by the death of Iesus Christ, he answe∣red him, that no man made the world, but onely the Sunne his god, that died not as Christ did, and said, that he might beléeue in the crucified and dead Christ, if it plea∣sed him, but for his part, he would beleeue in his owne god, and his Guacas which di∣eth not: this Guacas were certaine stones, that with weeping they honoured and cal∣led vpon.

Their maner of praying to the Sun.

THe Peruuian (as I saide before) had di∣uers great and sumptuous Churches of the Sunne in al places of the countrey, many of them hauing the walls and Pil∣lers couered and plated with gold and sil∣uer, with most costly stooles and benches, and when the Prince, Lords, or Priests would desire any thing of the sunne, they rise betime in the morning, before the sunne riseth, and get them vpon a high stone scaf∣fold made for the purpose, where holding downe their heades, and with wringing and folding their hands, and then presently lifting vp and spreading their armes, as if they would receiue the Sunne into them, they murmure certaine wordes, shewing their requests, and in the same manner they vsed to pray vnto the sunne since they were subdued: they fal downe before the Spani∣ardes, and desire them to be mercifull vnto them, and not vtterly to destroy them: in some places, specially vnder the Line and thereabouts, they placed the gates of their temples in the Est, and couered them with certaine cotten linnen: in euerie Church there stood two grauen Images, of fashion like blacke Buckes, before the which they kept a continuall fire of sweete wood, which I thinke to be Cedar, because the barke be∣ing taken off, there issueth a certaine sweete gumme, which is most excellent to preserue the bodyes of dead men, and to the contra∣rie corrupteth the bodie of a liuing man. Likewise there are in those Churches cer∣taine Images of great Serpents, which they pray vnto, but this is only about the line in Peru and Cusco, and not where they haue the Guacas, which are stones, about the which no man may come, but onely the Priestes, that are apparrelled al in white: and comming to them, they take in theyr handes certaine white cloathes, and fal vp∣pon the ground, speaking to the Image in a strange speech, because the common peo∣ple may not vnderstand it. Those Priestes receiue all the offerings that are giuen vn∣to the Idol, burying the tenth part thereof in the Church, and keepe the rest for them∣selues: and you must vnderstand that all the offerings must be wrought with golde and siluer, and of such forme and fashion as the thing is which they desire to haue of their Guaca. They offer also liuing men, and all kindes of beastes, looking in the hearts and intrailes of the men or beastes which they did offer, for certaine secret tokens, which if they founde not vpon the offerings, they still offered newe men or beasts, vntil they founde the tokens, thinking the Idoll not to be pleased with such offrings as had them not. When the priests should offer sacrifi∣ces, then they abstaine from the company of their wiues, and ceased not all night to doo nothing but crie out, and pray to the diuell, running into the fieldes, and to the places where the Guacas stande, whereof there were so many, that euerie man hadde

one before his dore, and the day before they should speake with the diuell, they fasted, some binding a thing before their eies, and some thrust them cleane out, and it hath of∣ten bene seene that some of them haue done it of meere deuotion. The kinges and no∣ble menne enterprise not any thing before they haue consulted with the Priestes, and the Priests with the Idoles: in their sacri∣fices, they vse not onely beastes but menne and children, but they eate not mans flesh, as the Caniballes do. When the Spani∣ardes spoyled their Temples, they founde therein many pottes full of the dried bones and flesh of dead children, that had bin of∣fered to their Idolles: they offer likewise birdes and other beastes, and with the bloud of their offerings they annoint the mouthes of their Idolles, and the dores of their churches. There was likewise among the golde that lay by their idolles certaine staues and myters for Bishops, such as our Bishops vse when they are in their robes, or as the Painters vse to set foorth Saint Nicholas▪ with his Crosse and Myter: and being asked what those things meant, they knew not what to answere, neyther from whence they came. Besides those great temples of the Sunne and Guacas, there were in all places of the countrey of Peru, many other Churches and Cloysters, for yong maides, wherein some had one hun∣dred, some two hundred, and some more, al obseruing chastitie, or at the least, vowing to keepe it, and to honour the Sunne, like the Vastal virgins in Rome, or our Nuns. Those they called Mamacomas, and were bound to stay in the cloyster during their liues, and neuer to depart from thence, doo∣ing nothing but spinne, weaue, and sowe, very fine cloth of cotten and wooll, appa∣rell, and furnitures for their Idolles, or as others affirme, the clothes by them made, were burnt with the bones of white sheepe, the ashes whereof as a signe and token of godly honour they threw into the ayre a∣gainst the Sunne. Those maides were verye narrowely looked vnto by certaine Priestes, and other men, appoynted for the purpose, wherof some were gelded, because they should not seeke to defile them, which if the maides once committed, they were eyther put to death, or buried quicke, but if the maide with childe would take her othe that it was begotten by the Sunne, then the childe was free from death: and euerye yeere in the moneth of August, when they had gathered in their corne, or maiz, the Per••uians that dwelt in the hilles made a great feast, they set vp in the middle of their Market place two great hie trees, like our Maie-poles, and in the top of them they placed certaine Images, made like men compassed about with flowers, and so in roundes, yet in good order, comming thi∣ther they strike vp drummes, throwing and showting one after the other with stones and arrowes at those Images, ma∣king great noyse with whooping and hal∣lowing and euery man hauing shott and thrown. The Priests brought an other I∣mage, which was set belowe on the nea∣ther part of the trees, whereunto they offe∣red, either a man or a sheepe, annoynting the Image with the bloud thereof, and af∣ter they perceiued the tokens in the heart or intrailes, they certified it vnto the peo∣ple, and the tokens being found, the feast was ended, eyther with ioy or sadnes, most part in drinking, wherunto they are much addicted, and so daunced, turning and pas∣sing vnder each others armes, each man hauing either a bill, clubbe, or some other weapon in his hand: such as are desirous to know more of their ceremonies and false worshippings of Idoles, let them reade the histories of the Spanish Indies.

The countrey of Peru was first ruled by Iudges, which are Kings or Rulers, that come from the great lake called Titicara, or as some write, Titicaca, lying in Charcas, being foure score miles in compasse which runneth westward through a great riuer, which in some places is halfe a mile broad, and then runneth into an other small lake fortie miles distant, and it is to be wonde∣red at, how the abundaunce of water that runneth out of the great lake, is compre∣hended in so small a place, where it is not once perceiued to increase. The lake bee∣ing so small, and the water so great: but it is reported, that in that lake there is no bo∣tome or ground, and that the water run∣neth vnder the ground thorow the earth into another sea or riuer, as it is saide of the riuer Alpheus, that it runneth from Peioponces or Moica to Cicilia, vnder the ground: and from this lake or therea∣bouts the kings of Peru had their origi∣nall, the petegree of which kings is by Iacob Fernando, a Spaniard, declared in this manner. Frst Mango Capa, who ac∣cording to the Indians report, was not borne of a woman, but sprang out of a stone, which vntill this day is yet shewne by them about the towne of Cusco, hee by his wife Mama Guaco, had issue one sonne called Sicheroca, that ruled after his father, and was the second Ingen or king, you must vnderstand that the inheritance

of the kingdome continueth in the issue sons successiuely, and not vnto the children of the sonnes, before all the brothers haue raigned one after another, but first the el∣dest sonne is King, then after his death his second brother succeedeth in the king∣dome, and not the eldest brothers sonnes, and the second brother dying, there being no more brethren, the crowne falleth vn∣to the eldest brothers sonnes, without al∣teration or change: this Sicheroca was a valiant souldier like his father, and broght many of his neighbours to subiection, and by Mama Cura he had issue a sonne called Locuco Pangue, the third king, who stu∣died rather to holde those landes he had vn∣der his subiection, then to win or increase more vnto them: and being aged, he mar∣ried a wife Mama Anauerque, by whom he had a sonne called Maita Capa, that aug∣mented his kingdome, and thervnto ioyned the prouince of Cusco, and by his wife Ma∣ma Iacchi Dela he had issue a sonne, called Capa Cyupangu, of whom there is nothing worthy memory, onely that he left a sonne (by his wife Mama Cagna) called Inga Ru∣ca, who likwise did no speciall thing during his life, but onely by his wife Mama M••cay he had diuers sonnes, and one among the rest called Iaguar Guacinga Iupangue, of whome there is a strange history recited, which is, y^t he being a child of y^e age of thrée monthes, was taken by certaine Caciquen that are likewise Lordes or kinges, that thought to kil him, and while they cōsulted amongst themselues cōcerning his death, it chanced that as the childe cried, certaine drops of blood issued out of his eyes, where∣by they were abashed, estéeming it for a mi∣racle, they left the child and departed, which being taken vp by a stranger, was caried to the king, and after that became great and proued a braue souldier, so that he ouercam many of his neighbours, and brought them in subiection vnder him, he had to wife Ma∣ma Chipuia, and by her had his eldest sonne named Vi••a Cocham, that succéeded him in his kingdome, and much increased his do∣minions: after him raigned Pachacoti his sonne, borne of Mama Yunta Cayan, this Prince was much valanter then al his pre∣decessors, whereby he ouercame many peo∣ple, and by him the foundation of the castle of Cusco was first begun: and dying, he left for heire and successor of his kingdome ••o∣pa Inga Iupangue his sonne, borne of Ma∣ma Anaberque, that followed his fathers steppes, and ouercame many people, and brought them in subiection, and finished the castle of Cusco begun by his father. The prouinces by him won, were C••i••e, and Quito, and he caused the kinges hie-waye (so much wondered at of all the worlde to be made from Cusco, through the prouince of Charcas vnto Chile, in the which way, from halfe mile to halfe mile, he had placed postes by them called Chasquis, which were Indians that went faster then any of our horses, to the great ease and contentment of trauailers, for by that means they might shorten their way, and in three dayes tra∣uaile 120 L••uken (that is 240 miles) by reason of the swiftnes of the men that bare them and stoode for postes,, after the A••tri∣can manner in the kingdome of Congo, as I haue already declared, for that after the ariual of the Spaniardes, there were neither horses, asses, nor mules within the country whereon men should ride or trauaile with∣al. This king dying, left issue aboue 150. sonnes, among the which one of them na∣med Guaynacapa, begotten vpon Mama O∣clo his wife, succeeded him in his kingdom, not any thing inferior for valour, wisedom, and councell, both in peace and war, much augmenting and increasing the limites of his countrie, obseruing great order and e∣quitie in all thinges, both concerning the gouernment of the countrie, and the people, appointing better orders, and manie olde and ancient lawes that were vnfit and not conuenient, he caused to be abrogated, and newe deuised in their place: hee maried a wife called Coyam Pilico vaco, by whom hauing no children, he maried diuers other wiues, so that the number of his children was much greater then his fathers, who notwithstanding had 150 sonnes. Among his children the eldest was called Guascar Inga, his mother being called Raua Oclo, and as I said before this king Guainacapa much increased in his kingdome, and ouer∣came many people, among the which hee helde so good gouernment and order, as it séemed in manner vnpossible, specially a∣mong such rude & simple people, that were wholy without learning, wherein appeered a most manifest example of great subiection and loue in his subiects towards their natu∣rall Lordes: and herevpon to his great ho∣nour, they made the two notable and costly hie-waies (so much esteemed in al coūtries) and may well be accounted for one of the seauen wonders of the world, for when Guainacapa was gon from Cusco with his armie to make warre against the prouince of Quito, distant from thence at the least 500 miles, he was forced to passe ouer high hills, whereby both he and his people in∣dured great trouble and miserie, because

〈◊〉〈◊〉 war was full of hard and rough stones, before his returne againe being victorious, his subiects in token of great ioy, as also for his further ••ase and comoditie, because hee and his souldiers had indeed so hard and la∣boursome a ••ourn••e) cut downe and digged vp all the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 waies and stonie cliffes, making the waye euen and plaine, so that in some places there were vallyes of twen∣tie or thirtie mens height, that were filled vp and made euen with the hilles, which way they made in that maner for y^e length of fiue hundred miles, so plaine and euen that any cart or wagon might trauell ther∣on, which way, after the Spaniards ariual in the contrie was in diuers places spoiled and destroied, to let the Indians from traue∣ling that way, and thinking this not suffi∣cient, when the saide Guainacapa went to visit his country of Quito, and tooke his waie through the plain country, they like∣wise made him another way, to fill all the vallies and ••rish places therein, and to make them euen, which way they made a∣bout fortie foote broad on both sides with high walles, and in the sandy waies they set great ••roughes with ropes tied vnto thē, because men should not lose themselues in the wa••e, which stretched likewise 500, miles, the walles as yet in some places are to be seene, but by meanes of their warres the Banks for the most part are taken a∣way and burnt, and besides all this, he him selfe caused many temples of the sunne and other Idoles, and diuers Ta••••bo•• which are houses of munition and of pleasure (for the benefit and commodity of his successors in time of warre) to be made and builded as wel on the hils, as in the plain countrie, both on the riuer sides, as in euery way, the riuers whereof are at this day in many pla∣ces to be seene, whereby may be coniectured the greatnes and riches of those kings, and the great care they had for the defence, and safetie of their countries, for that heereby when they trauailed through the countrie, not only they and all their companie might lodge in those houses, but the houses were still furnished and prouided (by the people inhabiting about them) not only with vic∣tuals sufficient for a whole armie, but also with apparel and al kinde of weapons that were vsed in the warrs, therewith present∣ly to apparell their souldiers, and to make them ready for the warres, as bowes, ar∣rowes▪ pikes, halberds, clubbes, bils, &c. for 20000. or 30000 men presently to bee raised, wherof there was no want, and those houses were some 8 or 10, and some twentie miles at the furthest one from the other, neuer further distāt then a days iour∣ney. As touching the ornaments of the kings of Peru, which they in steed of crow∣nes and princely septers vsed to weare ther∣by to shew their power and maiestie, they ware certaine tassels of red woole bound a∣bout their heads, hanging downe vppon their shoulders, almost couering their eies, whereat there hung other threeds, which they vsed when they would haue any thing done or executed, giuing that thrid vnto one of the Lordes that attended on them, and by that commandement gouerned the pro∣uinces, and by that token they commaun∣ded al whatsoeuer they would desire, which by their subiects was with so great diligēce and dutiful obedience fulfilled, that the like was neuer knowen in any place through∣out the world: and if hee chanced to com∣mand that a whole prouince shuld be clean destroyed, and vtterly left desolate both of men and all liuing creatures whatsoeuer, both yong & old, if he sent but one of his ser∣uants to execute the same, although he sent no other power or aide of men, nor other commission then one of the theerds of his Quispell, it was sufficient, and they wil∣lingly yeelded themselues to all dangers of death or destruction whatsoeuer. These kings were borne in chariots or seats made of beaten golde, borne on the shoulders of 1000. Lordes and councelours at times thereunto appointed, wherof if any of them vnaduisedly stumbled & staggered, he was presently put to death, and no man spake vnto the king at any time, but they brought him certaine presents, and if they went to speake with him ten times in a daie, so of∣ten must they presēt him with new gifts, it was likewise accounted for a great fault, so looke y^e king in the face. Being in the wars, and hauing ouercome any countrie, or pro∣uince▪ they obserued the ancient custom of Rome, which was, to take the people with them that they might not rise vp or rebell against them, yet with great diffrence from the Romaines, for that hauing won ••ame land or prouince, they tooke many or ••••we out of it, according to the number of people that were therein, & if these whom they had conquered inhabited in a hot countrie, they were placed in another warme country, & if theirs were cold, they likewise went into a cold countrie, where they had the lands de∣uided among thē, that each man might liue vpon it. And it the naturall count••••men of any prouince or place w•• to ••••bel against their prince, the kings Li••tenants and Cōmaunders vsed the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 as ••hat is the strange people to keep them in subiection,

and to the contrarie, if the Mitimaes seemed once to stirre or rise vp, they kept them in subiection by the naturall inhabitants, and by this policie they maintained their coun∣trie in great peace and quietnesse. Besides this they vsed another meanes, not to bee hated of their subiects, for that they neuer tooke the rule or authoritie (of any peo∣ple that were subdued by them) from the Caciquen or Lords that were nobly borne, if any of them disliked thereof, they puni∣shed him, yet gaue his office either to his children or to his brethren, commaunding them to bee obedient when they went to hunt and take their pleasures, which they call Chico, they assembled many men to∣gether, according to the scituation of the countrey, some times foure or 5000. men, whom they placed in a ring together, that many times compassed at the least two or three miles, and so singing a certain song, they followed each other foote by foote, vntil they were so neare togither, that they might reach hands, and yet nearer till they could imbrace each other, & the nerer they went together, the closer they made the ring, by which meanes al the beasts by them inclo∣sed, they killed as they thought good, with so great a noyse and crie, as seemed incredi∣ble, not much vnlike the maner of the Duch Princes, in their general huntings, special∣ly of the Wolues, onely that they haue not so many men, nor sing not, yet make a great noyse. The beasts that they take are wild Sheepe, Rheen, Foxes, Lions, blacke Beares, Cattes, many Hogges, and other beasts, & foules, as Turtle doues, Quailes, Spetchten, Parrots Hawkes, &c. The tri∣butes and talages, that the kings receiued of their subiects, were things of their owne increase: out of the countreyes that were vnfruitfull they brought him Hoopwik, of Crocadiles, by them called Caymans, and many other wormes. This Guaynacapa renewed the temple of the sunne in the Ci∣tie of Cusco, couering the wals and ruffes with plates of gold and siluer, and as I said before, the prouince and countrey of Quito was woon by him, which countrey pleased him so well, that for a time hee continued therein, meane time leauing his eldest son Guascar, Iuga Mango and other of his children in Cusco, to gouerne the countrey, and in Quito hee married another Wife, daughter to the Lord of the same prouince, and by hir he had Atabalipam, a son whom he greatly loued: and when he trauailed to Cusco, hee left him and others in Quito, yet before he dyed, he went once againe to Quito, partly because the country liked him so well, and partly to sée his sonne Atabali∣pam, and there before he dyed, hee ordained that the countrey and towne of Quito shuld remaine to his sonne Atabalipam, and his heires for euer, as beeing taken from his forefathers, which his sonne Guascar after his fathers death would not permitte, and for the same cause raised warres against his brother, which in the ende was the ouer∣throw and subiection of Peru, whereof, as in the life of Gualca••, (that after his fathers death ruled all the countrey vnto Quito) it appeareth. Guascar signifieth a cord or ca∣ble, for that at the time of his birth, the king caused a cable of gold to be made, as great as two hundred Indians could carry, hee vsed likewise a plate of golde whereon hee sate, worth at the least 25000. duckets (which after fell into the hands of Francisco Pizarro, first gouernour of Peru) and all his vessel was of golde, whereby it appea∣reth that golde was likewise much esteemed by them.

The Kings in Cusco had many golde∣smiths shoppes, therein to make and worke al kinde of vessels, Iewels, and images of men, beastes, foules, and hearbes of golde, al in good proportion: and although theyr Goldsmithes vsed not any iron tooles, yet they make most excellent workmanshippe, although somewhat groser and plainer then ours. The manner of working was in this sort, first they tooke the siluer or golde that they would melt, and put it in rounde or long melting vessels, made of cloath, pa∣sted about with earth and beaten colours, which being drie, they set it in the fire, with as much golde and siluer therein as they would melt, or as it would hold, and so with fiue or sixe reedes blowe so long about it, vntill the mettall melted and became redde hot, and the skimme being taken off, it be∣ing taken out of the melting vessell, euerie man had his part, which they sitting vppon the earth, with blacke Ke••ci••ick stones (made in form like hammers) they forged & framed theyr images of Gods, vessels, and Iewels of gold, chaines, and formes of all kinde of beastes, birdes, and hearbes, with all manner of things.

But to returne vnto our former matter, the Sonnes of Guaynaca••a called Guas∣car and Atabalipa, were the cause of the destruction, ruine, and ouerthrowe of the countrey of Peru by reason of the wars by them made one against the other, for the go∣uernment of the country, which was so cru∣ell, that they once met & fought for the space of thrée whole dayes together and neuer ceased, where many people were slaine ••

and Atabalipa taken in the battel and kept prisoner in the prouince of Tomebamba, and there very straightly kept in one of the Kings Castles, yet by subtiltie, and intrea∣tie made to certaine women: he had a cop∣per inst••••ment brought vnto him, where∣with hee brake the walles of the Castle of Tomebamba, and gote out of prison, at the same time that his brothers souldiers and captaines were making good cheere, drin∣king their Cicha, whereunto they are much addicted, and dauncing for ioy of the victo∣rie: and being at libertie, he fled vnto Q••••∣to, telling his people, that he was by his father conuerted into a snake, and so crept out of prison at a little hole, his father pro∣mising him victorie, so that his men would once againe returne with him to battaylet whereby his people were so well incoura∣ged, that they went with him agayne into the fielde, where Fortune fauouring him, and being victorious, hee tooke his brother Guascar prisoner, (to whome not long before he hadde beene prisoner) and there∣with obtained all the Countrey, making himselfe chiefe ruler thereof, keeping his brother prisoner within Cusco.

About the same time Franciscus Pizar∣rus arriued in Peru, being Oyuaer of those two mightie kings, and by reason of theyr dissension, made him maister of so great and rich countries of gold. Hee that desireth a larger description hereof, may reade the Spannish Histories, that write of the de∣scription of the new worlde. Pizarius be∣ing in the Countrey, made warre against Atabalipam, and in thend ouercame him, and for a time kept him prisoner: and du∣ring his imprisonment hee agréed with Pi∣zario for a certaine ransome, and when it was ready, hée caused his brother Guascar to be sent for out of Cusco, and by the way, before he came at him, he caused him to be slaine, fearing (and not without a cause) that if Guascar once came before the Spaniard, and should declare his mis∣fortune, he would without all doubt offer a greater ransome (as he had done) then hée should pay, and by that meanes he shoulde remaine in prison, and his brother at liber∣tie, hauing hadde al the treasure of his pre∣decessours, as also his fathers. But A••∣tabalipa hauing brought his ransom which amounted vnto 3088235. gilderus, was not long after, by crueltie of the Spaniards without any cause, and also against theyr othe and promise, most shamefully by cer∣taine Moores, at the commaundement of Pizarius, openly strangled in the Market place: and as some write, his body was af∣ter burned to ashes. This was the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 a∣ble end of the mightie K. Atabalipa, a man of a meane stature, wise, and high minded, wholly giuen to rule. Twenty dayes be∣fore his death there appeared a blazing starre, which when he perceiued, he pro∣phecied, that in shorte time after a gr••at Prince of that country should die, not thin∣king it to be himselfe. Guascar and Ata∣balipa being both dead, the gouernment f••l vnto Mango Inga the third brother, who dying, left his kingdome to his son Xaires Topa Inga, that maried a wife caled C••ya daughter of a noble man called Cuxi V••r∣cay Guascaris: and he before he entred into the gouernement, chaunged his name to Mango capa Pachuti Iupan, withall ma∣king himselfe subiect vnto Philip King of Spaine, which hapned 1557.* 1.25 on the sixt of Ianuary being Twelfe day. Thus much touching the kings of Peru.

A description of the places or townes lying among the hils.

THrée miles from Cusco, lieth the valley Iucay, a very pleasant valley, lying be∣twéene two hilles, very fresh and whole∣some aire, as being therin neither ouer hot, nor colde: and two miles beyond it lieth Tambo, another valley, wherein are seene great ruines, of the kings munition hou∣ses. And trauelling further, you come to Condesuyo, a prouince, where in times past there dwelt certaine warlike people, their townes standing betwéene high hils, where there were many wilde and tame beasts. Their houses were of stone, coue∣red with strawe: therein also were many houses and pallaces of noble men. They haue all one maner of liuing with the rest, the Peruuians offering lambes and other beastes in their churches, wherein at cer∣taine times the diuell shewed himselfe: the riuers are rich of golde, and there are made certayne couerlets of fine wooll cunningly wrought in diuers colours. This way be∣fore called Andes, is very long, for it run∣neth cleane through Peru, to the straites of Magellanas wherein there lieth many pro∣uinces and townes, and diuers high trees, some couered with snowe, others with flames of burning brimstone, whereby it is very hard to be trauelled, specially, be∣cause therein for the most part, it common∣ly raineth. Trauelling many miles fur∣ther, you come to the countrey called Col∣lao, wherein is the lake called Ti••icaca,

where there is an Island, and therein a Temple of the Sunne, wherein they sow∣ed their maiz, and kepe their treasure.

Round about this lake are many villa∣ges, and therein much good fish is taken. Somewhat further you come vnto the town of Plata, which is a hundred and fiftie miles from Cusco, in the prouince of Cha••∣cas, in a colder aire then any other place in all the hilles: there are but fewe inhabi∣tants, but such as are verie rich▪ and most because of the mynes of Porco and Potosi, for Poto••i is not aboue eighteene miles from the towne of Plata, discouered by the company of Captaine Caruaial, for that as some of the Indians with one Ian de Vil∣la Roel a townsman of Plata trauelled tho∣row the countrey, they found a high hil ly∣ing in a flat and euen vallie wherein per∣ceiuing certaine tokens of siluer▪ they mel∣ted a peece of the Minerall, and found it so rich, that one quintal made fourscore marks siluer, the like whereof was neuer heard of.

This newes being come to Plata, pre∣sently the cheefe gouernours of the towne went thither, where they diuided vnto eue∣rie man as much as he could doo or labour in, whereby such resort came thither, that in short time the place was inhabited by more then 7000. men: the Indians working and making contract with the Spaniards their maisters, how much siluer they wold week∣ly deliuer. This mine is of a wonderfull strange nature, because it wil not be molten by blowing with the bellowes, neyther in fornaces like other mynes, but only in smal furnaces by them caled Guairas, which they sette vppon the highest parte of the hill, pla∣cing the mouthes southwarde from whence the winde dooth continually blowe, throw∣ing into the mine fire, coales, and sheepes dongue, whereby the winde made the fire to burne so hot and cleare, as that not any bellowes or other instruments coulde doo more: and the Peruuians working in this maner, by so easie means had so great gain, that some of them got weekly besids theyr maisters parte, fortie thousande Pezos, but by resort, it became likewise to be scarse, for that they left other mines, as Pero, and the riuer of Caraba••a, wherein they founde golde, to come thither, because there they made more profite.

In those hilles, and al the land thorow, there are many vaines of all colours, wher∣of men may make faire colours: the siluer found in this myne, and which belongeth to the king for his parte, is carried by lande to Arequipa, and from thence to Lyma, Panama, Nombre de Dios, and Spaine.

A further description of the sea coast from Arequipa to Chile, and from thence to the straights of Magellana.

CHulli a Hauen of Arequipa, lieth vnder seuenteene degrees and a halfe, and one mile and a halfe from thence the Riuer of Tambopalla, and seuen miles and a halfe further, there reacheth a poynt into the sea: not ful a mile beyond, or further out then the other lande, vpon the which poynt there are three cliffes: about this poynte not ful a mile from it, there is a goodly hauen called Illo, in our Carde Rio de Vl••e, and there runneth a riuer into the sea that hath good water, and is also called Illo, lying vnder eighteene degrees and ⅓: from thence the coast lyeth southeast, and southeast and by east: and fiue miles & a halfe further, there is a poynt which the Sea men call Moro del Diauolo, that is, a rounde house or ho∣uel of diuels. This coast is al wild and de∣sert, and with great Ba••zen: not full foure miles further from this poynt, there is ano∣ther riuer not verie great, but good water. From this riuer Southeast, and Southeast and by east, sayling seuen miles and a halfe, there reacheth another round houel, which is verie high, and maketh certaine downes: beyond this poynt is an Island, and thera∣bouts lieth the hauen of Arica, which lieth vnder 19. degrees and 1/••: from whence the coast reacheth Southwest: not ful seauen miles further, there runneth into the sea a riuer called Pizagua, and in the same course sayling along the coast, you come to the ha∣uen Taracapa, which is 19. miles ¼: harde by Taracapa lyeth a Island, little more then a mile in compasse, and is distant from thē about one mile and a halfe, and there ma∣keth a strand or bay of Sand by the hauen, vnder 21. degrees: from Taracapa you saile along the coast south & by west, about foure miles, and then you come to the poynte of Decacanna, and 12. miles beyond this point you come to the hauen Moxillioni, which lyeth vnder 22. degrees and a halfe: from this hauen sailing vpwardes south south∣west about 67 miles and a halfe, the coast lyeth in a manner straight, and therein are some poyntes, creekes, and sandie baies, at the ende whereof there is a great creeke, where there is a good hauen, called Copayo lying vnder 27 degrees, aboue the which li∣eth a smal Islande, about halfe a mile from the firme land, & from thence beginneth the country of Chile, inhabited with people: be∣ing

past this hauen of Copaypao, a little frō thence, there lieth a point which makeh an∣other creeke, wheron standeth two cliffes, & at the end therof is a riuer of good water, cal∣led E•• Glasco, this point lieth vnder 28. de∣grees & ••: following the coast southwest on, about eight miles and a half, there is ano∣ther poynte, which maketh a great hauen for ships, but therein is neither fresh water nor wood: and hard by this hauen lieth the hauen of Coquinbo, & betweene this and the poynt passing by seuen Islands, there is a hauen vnder 29. and a half, & seuen miles and a halfe further, following the same course, there is another poynt, about the which there is a great creeke or bay called Antogayo, in the Carde Bahio de Tage, about foure mile further lieth the Riuer Li∣mara, in the Card Lemare, from this riuer, you keepe the same course to another creeke or bay about 7. miles distant, which hath a cliffe, but no fresh water, lying vnder 31. de∣grees, and is called Choapa, in our card Cu∣pa: further in the same course, about 15. miles, there is a verie good hauen, called de Q••i••nic••o, in our Card Cutero at Quintero: it lyeth vnder 32. degrees, & seuen miles and a halfe further, is the hauen Val Paraize, and from the town of S. Iacomo by vs called Chile, after the name of the country. Tou∣ching this country of Chile it is very great, stretching along the sea coast, reaching a∣boue Chaicas and Peru, a cold countrey, which is by reason of the scituation thereof, as lying by the Pole Antartico, wherefore it is called Chile, that is the cold countrie, partly because of the great cold which men indure, trauailing ouer the Andes, vnto this countrey, and partly because of the coldnes of the countrey it selfe, although it is much like Spaine, touching the temperatenesse of the aire. This countrey was first discouered by Petro de Valdiuia, in the yeare of our Lorde 1539.* 1.26 and is all inhabited: in some place it is hillie, and in other places plaine fieldes, poynted and running very crooked, by reason of the inflection and crooking of the sea. Touching the rest of the scituation, as I sayde before, it is verie temperate, ha∣uing winter and summer, as it is in Spain, yet at contrary times, for their summer is winter in Spaine, and the Spaniards win∣ter theyr summer. The south starre that should answere and be right distant to our starre, being there on land cannot be seene, but onely a small white cloude, betweene day and night making a smal circuite or compasse, about certaine places of the Pole Antarctike. There likewise you see foure starres, in forme like a crosse, with three o∣ther stars following them, which make sea¦uen stars, like ours, without any difference▪ that may be perceiued, onely that the foure which in the south make the form of a crosse, stand closer together then those of our Pole Antarctico. Touching their day and night, they are in Chile according to the scituatiō, short and long, as with vs, yet contrarie to ours, for that our shortest dayes are theyr longest daies. Their apparell and meates are altogether like those of Peru, both men and women are of good complection and be∣hauiour, vpon the coast of this countrey are many riuers, which by day do runne with water, and by night they are without wa∣ter, because the snow by day melteth, by rea∣son of the heate of the sunne, and so runneth downe from the hils, which by night by rea∣son of the cold aire, congealeth, and so run∣neth not. In Chile and Chaicas they haue many sheepe, that are like camels, but that they haue not a hill vppon their backes like the Cammel. The Spaniards vse them to ride vppon, as being able to beare a man foure or fiue miles a day, but being wearie, they lie downe, and will not rise whatso∣euer they doe vnto them, be they neuer so much beaten: and whosoeuer rideth vppon them, the sheepe being wearie, shee will cast vp the head towardes him that sitteth vpon her, and blowe a filthie stinke into his face, thereby to bee eased of her burthen. These beastes are verie profitable and necessary, no lesse then Cammels in Egypt & Affrica, and are fedde with a little Maiz and other meate, specially those that they vse to ride vpon, to labor, and to carry burthens. They goe likewise as Cammels doo, foure or fiue dayes together without drinking, and but little meate: some of them called Pachos haue verie fine wool, with long fleeces, wi••h verie good, holsome, and sauorie flesh, like our gammons of Bacon. The hauen of Chile or S. Iacomo lieth vnder 32. degrees, and 2/•• parts: sayling further along the coast in the same course, you come to the riuer of Calma, distant from Chile eighteene miles: it is here also to be considered, that all the coast from Tumbez to this place, is verie good to sayle by, and a calme sea, without tempestes or foule weather, whereby the shippes may lye at anker where they think good. Nine miles from Calma you see the poynt of the riuer called Manque or M••ule, in our card Maole and ten miles and a half further there is another riuer called I••ata, in our Carde Rio Tatu••a, and so sailing south and southwest eighteene miles, there is another called Biobio, lying almost vn∣der eight and thirtie degrees, in the same

course, kéeping along the shore, full eleuen miles distant, there is a great Island about foure miles distant from the firme land ca∣led Lucengo, and somwhat further beyond this Island is a great broad créeke called Valdiuia, in our carde La Baldibia, where∣in there runneth a great riuer caled Aynt∣lendo, in our Carde Rio Aymlendos, this Créeke lieth vnder 39. degrées and ⅔. Fol∣lowing the same course further by the shore, to south southwest, you come to the Cape S. Maria, lying vnder 42. degrées, and 1/•• towards the south, and from (as the Pilots report) the coast reacheth south••••st to the straits of Magellana, and betweene them lie many hauens and places needlesse to rehearse, as being noted in the carde: in∣warde in the land there is the Countrey of Patagonen, wherein there are Giantes of nine and of tenne foot high, that paint their faces with diuerse colours made of hearbs, pressing out the sap. And heerewith mak∣ing an end, for the rest I referre the Reader to the Carde.

The end of the second booke.

Notes

• * 1.1

  Congo tran∣slated by master Abra∣ham Hartwel, and Printed in London.
• * 1.2

  ••524.
• * 1.3

  1518.
• * 1.4

  1492.
• * 1.5

  1493.
• * 1.6

  1513
• * 1.7

  151••
• * 1.8

  ••541.
• * 1.9

  1502
• * 1.10

  1509
• * 1.11

  1524.
• * 1.12

  1498.
• * 1.13

  〈◊〉〈◊〉
• * 1.14

  1500.
• * 1.15

  1521
• * 1.16

  1519
• * 1.17

  1543
• * 1.18

  1••31
• * 1.19

  1533
• * 1.20

  1535.
• * 1.21

  153••
• * 1.22

  1544
• * 1.23

  1536.
• * 1.24

  1539.
• * 1.25

  1557
• * 1.26

  1539.